Autodesk Official Training Guide
Essentials
Autodesk Revit
®
®
Structure 2010
Learning Autodesk Revit Structure 2010 ®
®
Hands-on exercises demonstrate the concepts of building information modeling and the tools for parametric design, analysis, and documentation.
255B1-050000-CM00A June 2009
© 2009 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what’s>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer’s Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. “AS IS.” AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Published by: Autodesk, Inc. 111 Mclnnis Parkway San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents Introduction ....................................................................................................... ix Chapter 1: Building Information Modeling ........................................................ 1 Lesson: Building Information Modeling for Structural Engineering .......................................................................................... 2 About Building Information Modeling ...................................................... 3 About Bidirectional Associativity .............................................................. 7
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics ...................................................................... 9 Lesson: Exploring the User Interface ................................................................ 10 The Revit Structure User Interface .......................................................... 11 The Ribbon Framework ........................................................................... 15 Guidelines for Using the User Interface .................................................. 18 Exercise: Explore the Revit Structure User Interface ............................... 19 Lesson: Working with Structural Elements and Families ................................... 26 About Structural Elements ...................................................................... 27 About Families ........................................................................................ 29 Guidelines for Working with Structural Elements and Families ............... 32 Exercise: Work with Structural Elements and Families ............................ 33
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model ........................................................ 37 Lesson: Working with Views ............................................................................. 38 About Views ............................................................................................ 39 View Properties ....................................................................................... 44 Guidelines for Working with Views ......................................................... 55 Exercise: Explore and Create Views ........................................................ 56 Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility .................................................................. 62 About Controlling Object Visibility .......................................................... 63 View Templates ....................................................................................... 67 Modifying Line Styles .............................................................................. 69 Using Filters ............................................................................................. 69 Guidelines for Controlling Object Visibility ............................................. 72 Exercise: Control Object Visibility ........................................................... 73 Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views .......................................... 75 About Elevation and Section Views ........................................................ 76 Controlling Visibility of Elevation and Section Tags ................................. 83 Guidelines for Working with Elevation and Section Views ...................... 84 Exercise: Work with Elevation and Section Views ................................... 85
Contents
■
iii
Lesson: Working with 3D Views .................................................................... 93 About 3D Views .................................................................................. 94 Navigating Through a 3D View ............................................................ 96 About Cameras ................................................................................... 99 Creating and Modifying Camera Views ............................................. 103 Changing Material Properties ........................................................... 105 Guidelines for Working with 3D Views ............................................. 108 Exercise: Work with 3D Views ........................................................... 109
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project ............................................................. 115 Lesson: Starting a Project ............................................................................ 116 About Projects .................................................................................. 117 Creating Project Templates ............................................................... 121 Guidelines for Creating Project Template Files ................................. 123 Exercise: Set Up a Project and Transfer Project Standards ................ 124 Lesson: Adding and Modifying Levels ......................................................... 128 About Levels ...................................................................................... 129 Adding and Modifying Levels ............................................................ 131 Guidelines for Adding and Modifying Levels ..................................... 133 Exercise: Add Levels .......................................................................... 134 Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids ........................................................ 137 About Grids ....................................................................................... 138 Methods of Creating and Modifying Grid Lines ................................ 139 Guidelines for Creating and Modifying Grids .................................... 141 Exercise: Create and Modify a Grid .................................................. 143
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls .................................... 149 Lesson: Working with Structural Columns .................................................. 150 About Structural Columns ................................................................. 151 Loading Structural Columns .............................................................. 153 Creating Structural Column Types ..................................................... 153 Structural Column Tools and Options ............................................... 154 Creating Openings in Structural Columns ......................................... 158 Guidelines for Working with Structural Columns .............................. 159 Exercise: Add and Modify Structural Columns .................................. 160 Lesson: Working with Structural Walls ........................................................ 165 About Structural Walls ...................................................................... 166 Structural Wall Type Parameters ....................................................... 168 Structural Wall Instance Parameters ................................................. 170 About Wall Pilasters .......................................................................... 172 Creating Wall Openings ..................................................................... 174 Guidelines for Working with Structural Walls ................................... 175 Exercise: Create Structural Wall Types .............................................. 177 Exercise: Create Structural Walls with Openings ............................... 179 Exercise: Create and Modify Pilasters ............................................... 184
iv
■
Contents
Chapter 6: Creating Frames ....................................................................... 187 Lesson: Adding Floor Framing ..................................................................... 188 About Floor Framing ......................................................................... 189 About Beams ..................................................................................... 191 Beam Properties ............................................................................... 194 Adding Openings in Beams ............................................................... 195 Guidelines for Adding and Modifying Beams .................................... 196 Exercise: Add Floor Framing ............................................................. 197 Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems ....................................... 202 About Beams and Beam Systems ..................................................... 203 Beam System Properties ................................................................... 205 Methods of Creating Sloped Beams ................................................. 206 Process of Creating a 3D Beam System ............................................ 207 Guidelines for Working with Beams and Beam Systems ................... 208 Exercise: Work with Beams and Beam Systems ................................ 209 Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames ............................................ 217 About Structural Steel Frames .......................................................... 218 Setting Steel Frame Symbols in a Plan View ..................................... 220 Process of Adding Bracing Members ................................................ 221 Editing Braces .................................................................................... 222 Guidelines for Working with Structural Steel Frames ....................... 223 Exercise: Work with Structural Steel Frames .................................... 224 Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams ....................................................... 230 About Concrete Beams ..................................................................... 231 Options to Edit Concrete Beam Joins ................................................ 232 Vertical Justification of Beams .......................................................... 235 Guidelines for Working with Concrete Beams .................................. 237 Exercise: Work with Concrete Beams ............................................... 238
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs ........................................................ 243 Lesson: Adding Floors ................................................................................. 244 About Floor Elements ....................................................................... 245 Process of Adding a Floor Element ................................................... 246 Creating Sloped Floors ...................................................................... 247 Creating Shaft Openings in Floors ..................................................... 248 Guidelines for Adding Floors ............................................................. 249 Exercise: Add and Modify Floor Elements ........................................ 250 Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Structural Framing ............................... 255 About Roofs ...................................................................................... 256 Process of Sketching Roofs ............................................................... 258 Guidelines for Creating Roofs ........................................................... 259 Exercise: Create a Sloped Roof with Steel Framing ........................... 260
Contents
■
v
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations ............................................................... 267 Lesson: Adding Foundations ....................................................................... About Foundations ............................................................................ Creating Stepped Walls and Foundations ......................................... Guidelines for Adding Foundations ................................................... Exercise: Add Foundations ................................................................ Exercise: Create an Elevator Pit ........................................................
268 269 272 273 274 277
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps ...................................................................... 281 Lesson: Creating Stairs ................................................................................ 282 About Stairs and Railings .................................................................. 283 Creating Stairs ................................................................................... 286 Guidelines for Creating Stairs ............................................................ 288 Exercise: Create U-Shaped and Monolithic Stairs ............................. 289 Lesson: Creating Ramps .............................................................................. 293 About Ramps ..................................................................................... 294 Process of Creating Ramps ............................................................... 296 Guidelines for Creating Ramps ......................................................... 298 Exercise: Create a Ramp and Modify the Railing .............................. 299
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules .............................. 303 Lesson: Adding Dimensions ......................................................................... 304 About Temporary Dimensions ........................................................... 305 About Permanent Dimensions .......................................................... 308 About Spot Dimension Symbols ........................................................ 313 Guidelines for Adding Dimensions .................................................... 315 Exercise: Add Dimensions and Spot Symbols .................................... 316 Lesson: Working with Text and Tags ........................................................... 321 About Text ......................................................................................... 322 About Tags ........................................................................................ 323 Process of Adding Tags ..................................................................... 326 Setting Text Placement Parameters .................................................. 327 Guidelines for Working with Text and Tags ....................................... 327 Exercise: Add Column and Beam Tags .............................................. 329 Lesson: Creating Legends ............................................................................ 334 About Legends .................................................................................. 335 Guidelines for Creating Legends ....................................................... 338 Exercise: Create a Legend ................................................................. 339 Lesson: Working with Schedules ................................................................. 342 About Schedules ............................................................................... 343 Working with Schedules .................................................................... 346 Guidelines for Working with Schedules ............................................ 347 Exercise: Create Schedules ................................................................ 348
vi
■
Contents
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing ................................................................... 353 Lesson: Working with Detail Views ............................................................. 354 About Detail Views ........................................................................... 355 Process of Saving and Reusing a Detail View .................................... 362 Guidelines for Saving and Reusing a Detail View .............................. 363 Exercise: Add 2D Annotations to a Detail View ................................. 364 Lesson: Adding Concrete Reinforcement .................................................... 371 Adding 3D Reinforcement ................................................................. 372 Adding Detail Components ............................................................... 373 Guidelines for Adding Concrete Reinforcement ................................ 375 Exercise: Add Reinforcement Elements and Detail Components ....... 376 Lesson: Working with Drafting Views ......................................................... 382 About Drafting Views ........................................................................ 383 Process of Creating and Reusing Drafting Views ............................... 384 Guidelines for Reusing Drafting Views .............................................. 385 Exercise: Create a Drafting View ....................................................... 386 Lesson: Working with CAD Details .............................................................. 392 Options for Importing and Editing CAD Files .................................... 393 Guidelines for Working with CAD Details .......................................... 396 Exercise: Import and Edit DWG Details ............................................. 398
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation ................................... 403 Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks ............................................. 404 About Sheets and Titleblocks ............................................................ 405 About Revision Tracking .................................................................... 407 Process of Creating Sheets by Using Customized Titleblocks ............ 412 Creating Revision Clouds ................................................................... 413 Guidelines for Working with Sheets and Titleblocks ......................... 414 Exercise: Create a Sheet by Using a Titleblock .................................. 415 Lesson: Printing Sheets ............................................................................... 420 Print Settings ..................................................................................... 421 Print Setup Settings .......................................................................... 423 Guidelines for Printing Sheets .......................................................... 425 Exercise: Print a Sheet Set ................................................................ 426 Lesson: Exporting Content to CAD Formats ................................................ 428 Settings for Exporting Content .......................................................... 429 Process of Exporting Views to CAD Formats ..................................... 431 Guidelines for Exporting Content to CAD Formats ............................ 432 Exercise: Export Views ...................................................................... 433
Appendix .................................................................................................... 435
Contents
■
vii
viii
■
Contents
Introduction Welcome to the Learning Autodesk Revit Structure 2010 Autodesk Official Training Guide, a training guide for use in Authorized Training Center (ATC) locations, corporate training settings, and other classroom settings. Although this guide is designed for instructor-led courses, you can also use it for self-paced learning. The guide encourages self-learning through the use of the Autodesk Revit Structure 2010 Help system. This introduction covers the following topics: ■ Course objectives ■ Prerequisites ■ Using this guide ■ CD contents ■ Completing the exercises ■ Installing the exercise data files from the CD ■ Imperial and metric datasets ■ Notes, tips, and warnings ■ Feedback This guide is complementary to the software documentation. For detailed explanations of features and functionality, refer to the Help in the software.
ix
Course Objectives After completing this guide, you will be able to: ■ ■
■
■
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
Describe building information modeling methodology and its benefits. Use different parts of the Revit Structure user interface and work with different types of structural elements and families. Use the different views listed in the Project Browser, control the visibility and graphical representation of objects in a structural model, and work with elevation, section, and 3D views. Set up a project and transfer standards between projects, add and modify levels in a structural model, and create and modify grids. Work with structural columns and structural walls. Add floor framing using beams, work with beams and beam systems, add and edit structural steel moment and braced frames, and work with concrete beams. Add floors in structural models, create a roof, and add structural framing to the roof for support. Add foundations to a structural model. Create stairs and various types of ramps. Add dimensions and spot dimension symbols, work with text and tags, create a legend with notes, annotation symbols, and legend components, and work with different types of schedules. Work with detail views, add 3D and 2D reinforcement elements and detail components to concrete detail views, and work with drafting views and CAD details. Work with sheets and titleblocks, print sheets, and export Revit Structure content to CAD formats.
Prerequisites This guide is designed for new users of Revit Structure. It is recommended that you have a working knowledge of: ■ Basic structural engineering and design skills. ■ Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Microsoft® Windows® XP, or Microsoft® Windows® Vista.
Using This Guide The lessons are independent of each other. However, it is recommended that you complete the lessons in the order that they are presented unless you are familiar with the concepts and functionality described in those lessons. Each chapter contains: ■ Lessons Usually two or more lessons in each chapter. ■ Exercises Practical, real-world examples for you to practice using the functionality you have just learned. Each exercise contains step-by-step procedures and graphics to help you complete the exercise successfully.
CD Contents The CD attached to the back cover of this book contains all the data and drawings you need to complete the exercises in this guide.
x
■
Introduction
Completing the Exercises You can complete the exercise in two ways: using the book or on screen. ■ Using the book Follow the step-by-step exercises in the book. ■ On screen Click the Learning Autodesk Revit Structure 2010 AOTG icon on your desktop, installed from the CD, and follow the step-by-step exercises on screen. The on screen exercises are the same as those in the book. The onscreen version has the advantage that you can concentrate on the screen without having to glance down at your book.
After launching the onscreen exercises, you might need to alter the size of your application window to align both windows.
Installing the Exercise Data Files from the CD To install the data files for the exercises: 1. 2. 3.
Insert the CD. When the setup wizard begins, follow the instructions on screen to install the data. If the wizard does not start automatically, browse to the root directory of the CD and double-click Setup.exe.
Unless you specify a different folder, the exercise files are installed in the following folder: C:\Autodesk Learning\Autodesk Revit Structure 2010\Learning\ After you install the data from the CD, this folder contains all the files necessary to complete each exercise in this guide.
Introduction
■
xi
Imperial and Metric Datasets In exercises that specify units of measurement, alternative files are provided as shown in the following example: ■ Open i_export_ifc.rvt (imperial) or m_export_ifc.rvt (metric). In the exercise steps, the imperial value is followed by the metric value in parentheses as shown in the following example: ■ For Length, enter 13'2" (4038 mm). For exercises with no specific units of measurement, files are provided as shown in the following example: ■ Open c_boundary_conditions.rvt (common). In the exercise steps, the unitless value is specified as shown in the following example: ■ For Length, enter 400.
Notes, Tips, and Warnings Throughout this guide, notes, tips, and warnings are called out for special attention. Notes contain guidelines, constraints, and other explanatory information.
Tips provide information to enhance your productivity.
Warnings provide information about actions that might result in the loss of data, system failures, or other serious consequences.
Feedback We always welcome feedback on Autodesk Official Training Guides. After completing this guide, if you have suggestions for improvements or if you want to report an error in the book or on the CD, please send your comments to
[email protected].
xii
■
Introduction
Chapter
1 Building Information Modeling Building information modeling (BIM) is an integrated workflow built on coordinated, reliable information about a project from design through construction and into operations. The Revit platform is purpose-built software for building information modeling. Building information modeling (BIM) makes sustainable design practices easier by enabling architects and engineers to more accurately visualize, simulate, and analyze building performance earlier in the design process.
Chapter Objective In this chapter, you will learn about building information modeling methodology.
1
Lesson: Building Information Modeling for Lesson: Structural Engineering This lesson describes the building information modeling (BIM) process for structural engineering. Applying building information modeling results in better drawings, shorter timelines, and improved productivity. It offers an opportunity for building industry professionals to design, construct, and operate buildings of higher quality at a lower cost and at reduced environmental impact.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■
2
■
Describe building information modeling. Describe bidirectional associativity.
Chapter 1: Building Information Modeling
About Building Information Modeling Building information modeling is a building design and documentation methodology based on coordinated, reliable, high quality information. It enables design and construction teams to create and manage information about a building project consistently and reliably across the scope of the project. The information is stored in a single building model. This ensures that the information is coordinated, consistent, and complete. The building industry has traditionally illustrated building projects with manually created drawings. Information was added to these illustrations by using notes and specifications. With the advent of CAD technology, this process was automated. However, the output of manual drafting, graphics CAD systems, and object-oriented CAD systems remained the same: a graphic abstraction of an intended building design. The development of the building information modeling methodology represents a new way of thinking and working. The ability to model with objects minimizes tedious drafting by having one 3D object handle multiple 2D representations when placed in a project. More important is what you can do with the model. You use the coordinated data inherent in the model to visualize, simulate, and analyze your designs and make better informed design decisions. Building information modeling supports large team workflows to improve project understanding and enable more predictable outcomes. The visibility that BIM provides to all members of the project team contributes to its success through better coordination, improved accuracy and the ability to make more informed decisions earlier in the process.
Definition of Building Information Modeling BIM is an integrated process that allows professionals to explore a project’s key physical and functional characteristics digitally before it is built. Coordinated, consistent information is used to: ■ Design innovative projects from the very earliest stages ■ Visualize, simulate, and analyze real-world appearance, performance, and cost ■ Document accurately ■ Deliver projects faster, more economically, with reduced environmental impact By adopting BIM, architects, engineers, contractors, and owners can easily create coordinated, digital design information and documentation.
Lesson: Building Information Modeling for Structural Engineering
■
3
Autodesk Revit Structure and Building Information Modeling Revit Structure is purpose-built software for building information modeling. Traditional drafting and CAD software represent the geometry of a design by using stylized symbols from designated illustrations. Some examples of these illustrations may be a series of plans, elevations, and sections. These illustrations are essentially independent of one another. Building information modeling software represents the design as a series of intelligent objects and elements such as walls, beams, schedules, and plan views. These objects and elements have parametric attributes. The information about these objects and elements is stored in a single building model. You can extract any number of different views of the data from the model.
4
■
Chapter 1: Building Information Modeling
Revit Structure is a building design and documentation system that supports the design, documentation, and even construction efforts required for a building project. Because of its parametric change technology, any change you make is automatically coordinated everywhere in your project, including model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.
Building Information Tailored to the User When using a building information modeling process, the building information is stored in a single building model instead of in a format predicated on a presentation format, such as a drawing file or a spreadsheet. The building information model presents intelligent data for editing and review in views and formats that are appropriate for and familiar to the user. Some examples of these formats are a structural detail or a framing plan. For example, information such as structural beams are represented differently in a framing plan than they are in a structural detail. While the beam is represented by a symbolic line in plan, and a realistic representation in detail, both are different representations of the same structural element.
Managing Change with Building Information Modeling Building information modeling solutions manage iterative changes in a building model throughout the design, construction, and operation phases. A change to any part of the building model is replicated in all other associated parts. Maintaining a single, internally consistent representation of the building can improve drawing coordination and reduce the number of errors in the documents. As a result, building documents can be of higher quality, and the costs of changes and coordination reduced. Building information modeling tools can enable the design, construction, and occupancy of the building to proceed with less friction and fewer difficulties than conventional tools.
Lesson: Building Information Modeling for Structural Engineering
■
5
BIM for Structural Engineering BIM for structural engineers follows the same methodology for the entire structural engineering process, focusing on a digital design model that can be used for coordination with architects, and mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and civil engineers. BIM is integrated with analysis, design, and construction documentation. The design model can also be extended from design through fabrication and construction. Autodesk has a complete portfolio of structural engineering software that supports this end to end workflow.
At the center of the BIM workflow is Autodesk Revit Structure, integrating a multi-material physical and analytical model. This single model can be created on its own, or by leveraging 2D or 3D architectural information. The Revit Structure model can be used throughout the interactive design process to collaborate with all parties involved. The result is a coordinated and consistent design model that reflects the most upto-date design. The analytical model is used to integrate Revit Structure and widely-used industry standard structural analysis and design applications, such as Autodesk® Robot® Structural Analysis Professional. The analytical model contains information such as loads, load combinations, member sizes, and release conditions for use in leading third-party analysis applications. The creation of the analytical model uses engineering rules to produce a consistent analytical representation of the physical structure. Engineers can override initial analytical settings and edit the analytical model before linking to structural analysis packages. Autodesk Robot Structural Analysis Professional software is a collaborative, versatile, and fast structural analysis and design application that incorporates BIM, allowing engineers to readily analyze a wide variety of structures. Revit Structure is also used to create the construction documents required for the project. Its bidirectional associativity ensures that changes made to the model are automatically updated on every sheet of the construction documents. Revit Structure can also be used in conjunction with AutoCAD to leverage the power and productivity of the widely-used drafting platform, providing a robust and powerful solution for construction documents. Finally, the same model can be used downstream for fabrication detailing and shop drawings of
6
■
Chapter 1: Building Information Modeling
steel and concrete reinforcement using leading third-party detailing applications as well as AutoCAD Structural Detailing. AutoCAD® Structural Detailing software is a powerful solution for faster and efficient detailing and creation of fabrication shop drawings for reinforced concrete and steel structures.
About Bidirectional Associativity A key feature of Revit Structure is bidirectional associativity, which ensures that changes to any elements of the design model are immediately reflected in all views where those elements appear.
Definition of Bidirectional Associativity Bidirectional associativity is the ability of the building information model to coordinate changes made in any view and propagate these changes out to all other views. Bidirectional associativity is applied automatically to every component, view, and annotation. For example, a change in the size and location of a column is reflected in all plans, details, and schedules; all of which are associated with the column and influenced by the change in the column properties. The beams framing into the column are also affected by the changes and are automatically adjusted. Revit helps ensure that plans, schedules, and building sections and elevations are immediately available, up-to-date, and accurate.
Lesson: Building Information Modeling for Structural Engineering
■
7
Parametric Relationships The term parametric refers to the relationships among the elements of a building design model. These relationships enable the software to coordinate and manage the changes made to the building model. The relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these relationships are called parameters; therefore, the operation of the software is called parametric. It is these parametric relationships that deliver fundamental coordination and productivity benefits provided by the building information modeling methodology.
Updating the Design Model A fundamental characteristic of Revit Structure software is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, the bidirectional associativity feature of the software determines the elements that are affected by the change and propagates that change to any affected elements.
Examples of Bidirectional Associativity ■ ■ ■
Flip a section line and all views update. Draw a wall in plan and it appears in all other views including material takeoffs. Change a beam or column type in a schedule and the change propagates throughout the graphical and non-graphical views.
Examples of Parametric Relationships ■
■
8
■
Beams attached to supporting columns located on column grids. When a grid moves, the column moves with it and the beams lengths adjust accordingly. A structural truss modeled using constraints that define the number of bays and lengths of diagonals. When the span of the truss changes, vertical members are added where necessary and the diagonal web members adjust accordingly.
Chapter 1: Building Information Modeling
Chapter
2 Revit Structure Basics Before you begin to use Revit Structure, you need to become familiar with the interface and the structural elements and families used to create structural designs.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■
Use different parts of the Revit Structure user interface. Work with different types of structural elements and families.
Chapter Overview
■
9
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface This lesson describes how to use the different parts of the Revit Structure® user interface. You begin the lesson by learning about the main user interface. Then, you learn about the ribbon framework and some recommended practices for using the user interface. The lesson concludes with an exercise on exploring the user interface. Revit Structure provides a user friendly interface where tools and options are available on the ribbon. In addition, context menus provide quick access to commonly used tools. The status bar provides information and tips that assist you while you work. Familiarity with the user interface helps you work with the software more efficiently.
Revit Structure user interface with a project file open
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Identify the different parts of the Revit Structure user interface. Describe the Revit Structure ribbon framework. State the recommended practices for using the user interface. Explore the Revit Structure user interface.
■ ■ ■ ■
10
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
The Revit Structure User Interface Revit Structure is a powerful application that uses the building information modeling methodology and runs on the Microsoft Windows operating system. Like most Windows applications, the user interface of Revit Structure features a ribbon with tabs and panels, toolbars, and dialog boxes that you can use to perform various tasks. You use the mouse to select buttons from the panels or toolbars to perform operations.
Recent Files Window Every time you launch Revit Structure, a startup window named Recent Files is displayed. This window provides links to recently opened project or family files.
Recent Files window
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
11
Identifying the Primary User Interface Elements The following illustration shows the ribbon in Revit with different tabs, panels, and buttons.
User Interface Description Element Application Button Opens the application menu that provides access to common tools, such as Save, Print, and Publish. Tab Contains tools, settings, and standard functions. Only one tab can be active at a time and the active tab is on top. Panel Groups buttons for similar functions and tools. Expanded Panel
12
■
Button
Expands a panel to display available actions and is indicated by an arrow next to the panel name. You can temporarily pin an open expanded panel. Starts a tool or operation.
Split Button
Opens a drop-down with actions for the particular tool.
Dialog Launcher
Opens a dialog box.
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
The following illustration shows the Project Browser, status bar, View Control Bar, and other elements of the Revit Structure user interface.
User Interface Element Project Browser
Description
Navigation Bar
Displays a tree view of a logical hierarchy for all views, schedules, sheets, and families in the current project. Displays the name of the family and element type when you position the cursor over an object. Displays tips or hints when you use a comment. Provides shortcuts to commonly used view commands, such as View Scale and Model Graphics Style. Displays the view that you have selected in the Project Browser. Views can be tiled or maximized to fill the entire view window. Displays Zoom controls and opens the Steering Wheels.
View Cube
Works as an orientation control for 3D views.
Status Bar View Control Bar View Window
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
13
Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions. You can also access advanced options, such as Export and Publish, to manage files.
Application menu
Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar displays the commonly used actions, such as undo and redo changes, which you can use on files. You can customize the default Quick Access toolbar by adding tools from the ribbon.
Quick Access toolbar
14
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
InfoCenter Toolbar You use the InfoCenter toolbar to search for information through keywords and access subscription services and product-related updates. You can also access topics in Help.
InfoCenter toolbar
Context Menus Context menus are displayed when you right-click an object or an area of the user interface. They list common options, such as Zoom, and other options related to the current task. For example, if you select a wall in the current view, and then right-click it, the context menu displays options such as Change Wall's Orientation and Select Joined Elements.
The Ribbon Framework The ribbon is displayed at the top of the application window. You use the ribbon to access tools and options that help you design a building project. You can customize the ribbon by changing its view state and by rearranging the panels that contain the tools. You can toggle between the ribbon view states by using the control to the right of the Manage tab. The following illustrations show the various ribbon view states.
Full ribbon
Ribbon minimized to tab and panel labels
Ribbon minimized to tab labels
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
15
Ribbon Tabs The ribbon displays nine tabs and all tools in Revit are available on these tabs. You make a tab active by clicking its name. Each tab consists of panels of grouped tools. The following illustration shows the various ribbon tabs.
The following table lists the tools and options that you can access on the nine ribbon tabs in Revit Structure.
16
Tab
Tools and Options
Home
Includes commonly used tools for placing building elements such as beam, column, brace, wall, floor, and foundation. This tab also includes tools grouped by circulation, reinforcement, Datum, Work Plane, and Model.
Insert
Includes tools for linking and importing files, loading family files, and seeking content online.
Annotate
Includes tools for placing dimensions, detailing, drafting, text, tags, and symbols.
Modify
Includes tools for editing objects, geometry, linework, and faces. This tab also includes copy and paste tools using the clipboard, inquiry tools, and phasing tools.
Analyze
Includes tools related to the analytical model, such as adding loads, boundary conditions, and analytical checks and adjustments.
Architect & Site
Includes tools for creating conceptual masses and architectural tools, including doors, window, roofs, and curtain walls. This tab also includes tools for modeling and modifying the site components.
Collaborate
Includes tools for collaboration with internal and external team members. This tab also includes tools for workset creation, workset management, and coordination.
View
Includes tools for controlling graphic appearance of objects, creating views, and adding sheets. This tab also includes options for toggling between views and displaying user interface toolbars.
Manage
Includes tools grouped by Project Settings, Project Location, and Macros. This tab also includes options for managing projects and design.
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
Contextual Tabs When you start a tool or select elements, a contextual tab opens on the ribbon displaying a set of tools that relate only to the context of that tool or element. The Type Selector drop-down and the Element Properties drop-down are available on the contextual tabs. Additional tools are also displayed on the contextual tab for working with the element that you are placing or modifying. The Options Bar appears under the contextual tab. The following illustration shows the Place Beam contextual tab that opens when you activate the Beam tool.
User Interface Description Element Element Properties Allows you to open either the Instance Properties or the Type Properties drop-down dialog box. Using these dialog boxes, you can change the properties of either an individual instance of a family type or all the instances of a family type. Type Selector Allows you to change from one type of element to another. The contents of drop-down the drop-down change depending on the current tool or selected elements. Options Bar Displays options for configuring elements you create or modify. The options change depending on the current tool or selected elements.
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
17
Guidelines for Using the User Interface User interface elements such as the ribbon, Options Bar, and Project Browser help you to work efficiently. The following guidelines help you to work with the user interface. ■ Use the cursor tooltip to view keyboard shortcut commands for tools. The cursor tooltip displays when you hold it over a button on the ribbon. Instead of a command line in Revit, you can enter keyboard shortcut commands to access tools. For example, enter VG to open the Visibility/ Graphics dialog box. ■ Control tooltip appearance by using the Options dialog box. This helps you view the appropriate information for your experience level. ■ While working with a tool, when no other action is active, the Modify action is active by default. To end a tool or operation quickly, press ESC twice to revert to the Modify status. ■ Use the Options Bar to select command-specific tools such as setting wall height while you are placing walls. This is quicker than selecting and changing walls later. ■ Use the Project Browser to create, delete, change, or switch between views. This helps you quickly manage the views in a project. ■ Read the hints and tips displayed on the status bar while working. These provide valuable information about using the tools. ■ Hide the Project Browser while working on big drawings so as to expand the view window and display a larger part of the drawing. To unhide the Project Browser, use the User Interface dropdown on the Windows panel of the View tab. You can also toggle the ribbon display to enlarge your view on small screens.
18
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
Exercise: Explore the Revit Structure User Interface In this exercise, you explore the different parts of the user interface. Your firm is standardizing on Revit Structure. You need to learn the user interface before you start work on a project. You do the following: ■ Explore views of a model. ■ Explore model properties using the interface.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics. Click Exercise: Explore the Revit Structure User Interface.
2.
Examine the tab names on the ribbon.
3.
Click each tab and examine the panels that they contain. Notice the organization of these tabs and where different tools and options are found. On the InfoCenter toolbar at the upper-right corner of the screen, expand the drop-down for Help, as shown below.
4.
Explore Views of a Model 1.
Open c_rst_essentials_ui.rvt. The file opens in the 3D - Atrium view. Note: The illustrations in the exercise may vary depending on how you navigate in the project.
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
19
7.
5.
Examine the Project Browser. It lists all the views associated with the structural model. Notice that the 3D - Atrium view is bold, indicating it is the active view.
Press F1 to open the Revit Structure User's Guide window. Ensure that the Contents tab is active.
The Project Browser always contains all the views of a model and is used to navigate between the views. You can easily create and name new views as required in your design process. 8. To examine the different views available in this model, in the Project Browser, under Views (All), Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. This activates the view. 9. Return to the 3D - Atrium view. 10. On the View Control Bar, change Model Graphics Style to Shading with Edges.
6.
Become familiar with this help system. You can continually utilize this system throughout your learning process and beyond. Close the Revit Structure User’s Guide window. Notice the change in the graphical display of the view.
20
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
11. Right-click anywhere in the view window. Notice the context menu for this 3D view and click View Properties.
12. In the Instance Properties dialog box, for Visibility/Graphics Overrides, click Edit in the Value field.
13. In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, notice the visibility settings for this view.
14. Click Cancel in both the dialog boxes. 15. In the view window, place the cursor over the curved foundation wall. The edges will highlight and a tooltip and the status bar display information about the wall.
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
21
16. Click to select the curved foundation wall. The selected wall displays in blue. A contextual tab named Modify Walls opens on the ribbon. Notice the tools available on this tab.
18. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Notice the properties of the wall.
17. Right-click the selected curved foundation wall. Click Elements Properties to open the Instance Properties dialog box.
■ Click Cancel to close the dialog box. 19. Click View tab > Windows panel > Close Hidden. This closes the different views you opened while exploring the model using the Project Browser.
Note: To open the Instance Properties dialog box, you can also click Element Properties dropdown > Instance Properties on the Element panel of the Modify Walls tab.
22
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
Explore Model Properties Using the Interface 1. 2.
3.
4.
Move the cursor over to the column at the grid intersection J3 to highlight it. The column type is displayed in the tooltip and on the status bar.
5.
Move the cursor over the edge of the floor slab to highlight the floor element. Click to select the floor element. The color of the floor changes to blue indicating the selection. The floor type is displayed in the Type Selector drop-down on the Modify Floors tab.
In the Project Browser, under Views (All), Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 to open the view. To zoom in to examine a portion of the view at close range: ■ On the Navigation Bar at the right of the view window, click the drop-down arrow under the Zoom tool. ■ Ensure that Zoom in Region is selected.
Click and drag a selection box around the area between grid lines H and K and grid lines 2 and 4.
Note: If your mouse is equipped with a scroll wheel, you can scroll in and out in any view. Hold down the scroll wheel and you can pan side to side.
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
23
6.
7.
Click Modify Floors tab > Element panel > Element Properties drop-down > Instance Properties to open the Instance Properties dialog box for the selected floor.
In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Notice the floor properties. If you change these properties, only the selected floor properties change.
9.
Click Home tab > Structure panel > Wall. A contextual tab named Place Structural Wall opens. Notice that the Options Bar below the ribbon displays options such as Location Line, Chain, and Offset for sketching or placing new walls.
10. Click Place Structural Wall tab > Selection panel > Modify to exit the Wall tool. 11. Click the Annotate tab. Notice the tools that are available on this tab.
12. In the view window, select the floor slab as selected previously. 13. Open the 3D - Atrium view. 14. In the view window: ■ Zoom the view to fit and notice that the floor slab is still selected. ■ Clear the selection by clicking away from the floor slab. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Examine the panels on the Modify Floors tab. Notice that the tab displays tools for modifying the selected floor. ■
8.
24
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
15. On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style to open the associated list. ■ Click Wireframe to change the view to wireframe.
Apply the other model graphic styles. Return to the Shading with Edges style. Click View tab > Windows panel > Tile to display all the views that you have opened. On the Navigation Bar in the active view: ■ Click the Zoom drop-down. ■ Click Zoom All to Fit. Notice that each view is zoomed to fit within its tiled window. Close the file without saving changes. ■
16. 17. 18.
19.
Lesson: Exploring the User Interface
■
25
Lesson: Working with Structural Elements Lesson: and Families This lesson describes how to work with different types of structural elements and families. You begin the lesson by learning about structural elements and families. Next, you learn some recommended practices for working with them. The lesson concludes with an exercise on working with structural elements and families. Structural elements, such as columns and beams, are used to model a building structure. Revit provides a standard library of elements, in which elements of similar types are grouped into families. These Revit families are groups of elements with common parameters and usage. For example, a steel building can contain several different wide flange column sizes, such as W10x88, W12x65, and W14x82, but they all belong to the same wide flange column family. You can create new families or easily modify the existing ones using the Revit Family Editor, without the need for any programming. The following illustration shows a building structure built with standard Revit elements, including beams, columns, braces, floors, walls, and foundations.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe structural elements. Describe families. State the recommended practices for working with structural elements and families. Work with structural elements and families.
■ ■ ■ ■
26
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
About Structural Elements A structural model comprises different structural elements, such as beams, columns, walls, and foundations.
Definition of Structural Elements Structural elements are the fundamental blocks of a building structure. When you place an element in a structural model, the individual element is called an instance of that element type. The instances of an element type have certain common parameter values. Element instances are broadly divided into four categories: datum, model, view, and annotation. The model category is further subdivided into the component and host categories. The following illustration shows the categories of element instances and some examples of elements included in these categories.
The following table describes each element category. Category
Description
Datum
Includes elements such as levels, column grids, and reference planes that establish a context for the host and component elements. These datum elements help layout the building structure.
Model
Includes elements such as walls, floors, columns, and beams that are used to model a structural design.
Component
Includes elements such as beams, columns, braces, and foundations that fill the details of a structural model.
Host
Includes elements such as walls, slabs, roofs, stairs, and ramps that form the basic built-in-place structure of a model.
Lesson: Working with Structural Elements and Families
■
27
Category
Description
View
Includes elements such as structural plans, sections, and schedules that are dynamic representations of a structural model, have their own properties, and can be modified or deleted. View elements control the annotation elements placed in a view. If you delete a view, the annotations placed in the view are also deleted. View elements do not control the host and component elements.
Annotation
Includes elements such as dimensions, text notes, section tags, and object tags that are two-dimensional and are visible only in the specified view of a structural model. These elements help create structural documentation.
Elements as Objects Structural elements such as walls, columns, and beams are called objects. The properties of these objects, such as structure and behavior, are called parameters. These properties simplify the process of creating a structural model. For example, when you draw a wall element in Revit, you do not need to ensure that the wall layer is active as in a conventional CAD application. In addition, you do not need to draw the faces and internal structural details of the wall element separately. The wall element behaves as a wall and has all the visual attributes of a wall, such as the required line weight and color. You can join a wall element to other walls, connect it structurally to floors and ceilings, and place windows and doors in it. Intelligence is programmed into Revit elements so that their behavior is affected by the relationships they share with other elements.
Example of Structural Elements The following illustrations show wall elements, wall instance parameters, and wall type parameters.
Wall elements
28
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
Wall instance parameters
Wall type parameters
About Families Families are classes of elements within a category that group elements with a common set of parameters, identical use, and similar graphical representation. Revit contains various predefined families, which you can use in your projects. You can modify these predefined families to suit project requirements. You can also create custom families by using templates for beams, columns, and foundations.
Definition of Families A family is a collection of objects with similar characteristics. These characteristics are represented by instance and type parameters. Instance parameters are specific to a particular instance of an object in a structural model, but type parameters apply to all objects of a particular type. Different elements within a family may have different values for some or all properties; however, the set of properties is the same. Each element with a different value is a new type within a family. For example, a beam with a specific profile can be of different sizes and all beams of different sizes are new types within the beam family. Similarly, rectangular columns can be considered as one family, though the columns belonging to the family are available in different styles and different sizes within those styles.
Lesson: Working with Structural Elements and Families
■
29
The following illustration shows different types of columns belonging to the Structural Columns family.
Component and System Families There are two types of families, component and system. Component families, also known as loadable families, are families for which you can specify parameters and graphical representations. The extensive library of component families includes annotation components, 2D detail components, and 3D model components. You can create component families by using family templates or by loading existing component families into a project. You can also modify the existing component families. A special type of component family is an in-place family, which is specific to the project in which it is created and edited. An example of an in-place family is a tapered column. System families are families that have a predefined set of parameters and graphical representation. The system family library includes walls, dimensions, roofs, floors, and levels. System families are not available as external files; therefore, you cannot load or create system families as separate files. However, you can modify the existing system families to suit project requirements or organization standards. You can use a predefined system family to generate new types in that family in a project. For example, although the behavior of a wall is predefined, you can still create different types of walls with different compositions. You can transfer system families between projects. The following table shows an example of an element, a family, a type, and an instance.
30
Option
Example
Element
Wall
Family/System family
Basic Wall
Type
Exterior - 12" Concrete
Instance
Actual user-drawn wall in a project
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
Example of Families Revit provides controls for how elements are constructed and located in a project using the Family, Type, and Instance Properties dialog boxes. The family properties control the geometry of elements, the type properties control their size, and the instance properties control the location of elements in space. The following illustrations show a wall instance, different wall families, and a wall family type.
Wall instance
Wall families
Wall family type
Lesson: Working with Structural Elements and Families
■
31
Guidelines for Working with Structural Elements and Families The following recommended practices help you work efficiently with structural elements and families. ■ Familiarize yourself with the predefined content libraries that Revit installs and custom content libraries created by other users in your organization. This enables you to reuse existing elements and saves the time and effort that goes into creating a library from scratch. You can also access the Revit content online. ■ Save a family to the library folder after creating new types or modifying a type within a family. This makes the new family type available across projects and to other users. ■ Identify and create common system content that is frequently used in your organization, such as wall and floor types, and include it in the template file of your organization. This saves time because you do not have to recreate the system content as you model future projects. ■ Move the cursor over an element to view the tooltip information about its family and type while you are working in the view window. Take care not to click elements and modify them accidentally.
32
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
Exercise: Work with Structural Elements and Families In this exercise, you view different types of structural elements, families, and types of families. You also change the parameters of a beam. In your project, you want to view the different types of structural elements and families in different views.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics. Click Work with Structural Elements and Families. 1.
Open i_rst_essentials_structural_elements.rvt or m_rst_essentials_structural_elements.rvt. The file opens in the default 3D view of a building structure consisting of composite concrete floor slabs supported on steel framing and load bearing walls. Notice that only the
2.
model elements display in the 3D view. The datum elements, which are levels and grids, do not display in the 3D view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Open the Elevation 2 - a view, which shows a steel brace frame consisting of wide flange beams, wide flange columns, and steel tube braces. In addition to the model elements, there are level and grid datum elements and annotation tags that belong to the view.
Lesson: Working with Structural Elements and Families
■
33
5.
3.
Select the beam below the SECOND FLR. level.
6.
4.
34
Select W-Wide Flange W12x26 (M_W-Wide Flange W310X38.7) from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the depth of the beam changes, and also that the ends of the braces adjust with the depth of the beam.
Click Modify Structural Framing tab > Element panel > Type Selector drop-down.
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
On the Element panel, select Type Properties from the Element Properties drop-down. 7. In the Type Properties dialog box: ■ Notice that the W12x26 (W310X38.7) beam belongs to the W-Wide Flange (M_W-Wide Flange) family. ■ Click Cancel. 8. In the view window, select one of the two W10x49 (W250x115) columns. 9. Open the Type Properties dialog box again. 10. In the Type Properties dialog box: ■ Notice that the W10x49 (W250x115) column belongs to the W-Wide FlangeColumn (M_W-Wide Flange-Column) family. ■ Click Cancel. Note: It is important to note that the column and beam elements share the same type parameters that define their size, such as bf, tf, and tw. However, these elements belong to different families because they have a different set of instance parameters that define their location in the model based on their structural use.
11. In the view window, clear the selection from the column. 12. Open the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. 13. In the view window, notice the stick representation of the steel framing. This is because the view is set to the Coarse detail view. 14. On the View Control Bar, change the Detail Level to Medium. The beam extrusions representing the actual flange widths of the members are now visible.
Note: Changing the Detail Level can be useful for checking whether the flange widths accommodate the slab edges or architectural wall assemblies at shaft openings and at the perimeter of the building. 15. Open the Structural Framing Schedule view. This schedule view lists every instance of structural framing elements currently in the model. You can assign parameters common to structural framing elements to display by using the properties of the schedule view. In this case, Reference Level, Family and Type, Length, and Structural Usage are displayed. Note: Schedule views are bidirectional, similar to the other views in the Revit model. If elements are added or removed from the model, the schedule is automatically updated accordingly. Similarly, any changes made in the schedule view are propagated throughout the model.
16. Click View tab > Windows panel > Tile to display the tile view.
17. Click in the default 3D view window to make it active. 18. On the Navigation Bar, click Zoom All to Fit from the Zoom options drop-down.
Notice that each view is zoomed to fit its tiled window. Note: If the Zoom All to Fit option is already selected in the Zoom options drop-down, click the Zoom icon to activate Zoom All to Fit. 19. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Working with Structural Elements and Families
■
35
36
■
Chapter 2: Revit Structure Basics
Chapter
3 Viewing the Structural Model In this chapter, you learn how to create, duplicate, and manage views. Additionally, you learn how to control object visibility in views and create elevation, section, and 3D views.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Use the different views listed in the Project Browser. Control the visibility and graphical representation of objects in a structural model. Work with elevation and section views. Work with 3D views.
Chapter Overview
■
37
Lesson: Working with Views This lesson describes how to use the different views listed in the Project Browser. You begin the lesson by learning about views and the use of view properties. Then, you learn about some recommended practices for working with views. The lesson concludes with an exercise on exploring existing views and creating new ones. View elements are essential to the process of creating a Revit model. You can use views, such as the plan, section, elevation, and 3D views, to visualize a model as it is being built and generate the construction documentation. Each view has specific properties that can be used to modify its graphical display, independent of the other views. However, changes made to model elements, such as beams, columns, and walls, are reflected in all associated views. The following illustration shows four different views tiled in the view window: a framing elevation, a 3D view, a wall elevation, and a framing plan.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe views. Explain the use of view properties. State the recommended practices for working with views. Explore and create views.
■ ■ ■ ■
38
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
About Views The Project Browser displays a list of all project views. These views display different representations of the same structural model. When you open a new view, the views that were already open remain open and their settings do not change.
Definition of Views Views provide a way of visualizing and working on a building model. You use views to display a model from different directions and reference points that help you build the model. In addition, you use views to generate plans, elevations, sections, details, and schedules that are used to assemble construction documentation. When you start a project, certain views are created by default based on the project template that you select. You can edit the properties of these views and create new views, as required. You can also duplicate existing plan and 3D views to create new views. You can navigate within a view using the mouse wheel, Steering Wheels, or the view cube, and switch between views in the middle of an activity. For example, you can select a floor in 3D view and edit it in plan view. However, only one view can be active at any given time.
Bidirectional Associativity Bidirectional associativity ensures that the changes made in one view automatically reflect in all the associated views. Bidirectional associativity applies to every component, view, and annotation in a project. For example, a change made to the spacing of the floor framing in a plan view is reflected in all the associated views, such as section views.
Options for Duplicating Views By duplicating a view, you can display the same portion of the structural model in multiple views with different view settings, if required. The following table describes the three options that you can use to duplicate views. Options
Description
Duplicate
This option creates a view that is a copy of the original view. A duplicate view displays model elements but not annotation elements from the original view. For example, you can use this option to create a duplicate foundation plan that displays a referenced architectural plan and is used for coordination purposes. The duplicate plan is independent of the original foundation plan.
Lesson: Working with Views
■
39
Options
Description
Duplicate with Detailing
This option creates a view that inherits all details of the original view. A duplicate with detailing view displays both model and annotation elements from the original view. For example, you can use this option to create an overall foundation plan that includes the detailing you added to the original foundation plan. The overall plan is independent of the original foundation plan. Any additional annotation you add is displayed only in the view to which it is added.
Duplicate as a Dependent
This option creates a dependent view that inherits view properties and view-specific elements from the original view, known as the parent view. A dependent view is used to display only a specific area of the view. You can insert matchlines to indicate where the view is split and view references to link views. Annotation added to the dependent view is displayed in the parent view and vice versa. This option helps to create views that show portions of a plan when the entire plan is too large to fit on a drawing sheet.
The following illustrations show an original view and its duplicate copies created by using the options for duplicating views.
Original view with annotation
Duplicate view without annotation
40
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Duplicate with detailing view, with annotation included
Duplicate as a dependent view, with annotation included
Lesson: Working with Views
■
41
Underlay You use the underlay property of a plan view to display another plan view of the model under the current plan view. Underlay can be above or below the current level and appears in halftone. You use underlay to understand the relationship among the components on different floors. You can select and modify elements in the underlay or snap to the underlay elements for the purpose of the design layout. In the following illustration, the halftone lines show a lower-level plan view as underlay in the current plan view.
Examples of Views The following illustrations show the different types of views of a structural model.
3D view
42
■
Callout view
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Framing Elevation view
Section view
Plan view
Elevation view
Lesson: Working with Views
■
43
Schedule view
View Properties You use view properties to set and modify parameters associated with the active view, such as scale, graphics style, and underlay. Certain view instance properties are available on the View Control Bar at the bottom of each view window. You can use this bar to quickly access some of the properties that affect the views in the view window You can also modify the properties of a view by using the Instance Properties dialog box for that view. The following illustration shows the Instance Properties dialog box for a structural plan view.
44
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
View Property Parameters View property parameters affect the way a model is displayed in the active view window. Different types of views have different properties. The following table describes the key parameters available in the Instance Properties dialog box of a view. Parameter
Description
View Scale
Changes the scale of the view as it appears on the drawing sheet.
Scale Value
Defines a custom scale value. Scale Value is enabled when Custom is selected for View Scale.
Display Model
Comprises three settings: Normal, Do Not Display, and As Underlay. The Normal setting displays all elements normally. This setting is intended for all nondetail views. The Do Not Display setting hides the model and displays only detailed, view-specific elements. These elements include lines, regions, dimensions, text, and symbols. The As Underlay setting displays all detailed, view-specific elements normally and model elements appear dimmed.
Detail Level
Applies a Coarse, Medium, or Fine detail level setting to the view scale. This setting overrides the automatic detail level setting for the view.
Visibility/ Graphics Overrides
Controls the visibility of objects by category in a view. You can specify visibility settings using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.
Model Graphics Style
Specifies different graphic styles for the project view. The styles include Hidden Line, Wireframe, Shading, and Shading with Edges.
Graphic Display Options
Control the shadows and silhouette lines in a view.
Discipline
Specifies the discipline for the project view and controls the display of model objects. You can select the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, and Coordination disciplines for the project.
Color Scheme
Specifies the color pattern to be applied when rooms are visible in the view.
View Name
Displays the name of the active view. The view name also appears in the Project Browser and on the title bar of the view.
Title on Sheet
Shows the name of the view as it appears on the sheet; the name is different from the value in the View Name property. This parameter is not available for sheet views.
Note: This is a powerful feature of Revit and you will learn more about it later.
Lesson: Working with Views
■
45
Parameter
Description
Crop View and Crop Region Visible
Sets a boundary around the building model. You can select the boundary and resize it using drag controls. The visibility of the model changes when you resize the boundary. To turn off cropping, clear the Crop Region check box. To turn off the boundary and maintain the cropping, clear the Crop Region Visible check box.
View Range
Controls the specific geometric planes that define the boundaries of plan views. You can set these boundaries by defining the height of the Top clip plane, the Cut plane, and the Bottom clip plane. This parameter is available only in plan views.
Phase Filter
Applies a specific phase filter to a view. This parameter controls the appearance of model objects based on their phase status.
Phase
Displays the specific phase of a view. View Phase, Phase Filter, and Object Phase work together to determine which model components are visible in the view and how they appear graphically.
View Range Plan views are three-dimensional. All plan views and reflected ceiling plan views have an instance property called View Range, which is a group of horizontal planes that affect object visibility and appearance in a view. View Range has four horizontal planes: Top, Cut, Bottom, and View Depth. The Top and Bottom planes represent the top and bottom extents of the view, respectively. The Cut plane determines the display of elements in a view. While model elements above the Cut plane are not displayed, model elements below the Cut plane are in projected line weight. Model elements that pass through the Cut plane are displayed in Cut line weight, which is heavier than projected. When the View Depth plane is set below the Bottom plane, the view displays the elements below the Bottom plane, down to the View Depth level, in Beyond line weight, which is lighter than Projected. The following illustration shows walls that are Cut in the view; Projected, which is below the Cut plane and above the Bottom plane; and Beyond, which is below the Bottom plane and above the View Depth plane.
46
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located in the lower-left corner of the view window. You can use this bar to quickly access some of the view parameters that affect the views in the view window. The following illustration shows the View Control Bar.
View Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog Crop/Do Not Crop View Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements
View Scale The view scale controls the plotting display of a view. It determines how the view will fit on a sheet. You select a scale value to adjust the display characteristics, such as line weights, of an object automatically. You can select a predefined scale value or specify a custom scale value, as shown.
Lesson: Working with Views
■
47
The following illustrations show views with different scale values.
View with a scale value of 6" = 1'-0" (1:2)
View with a scale value of 1/8" = 1'-0" (1:100)
Detail Level Detail Level affects the display of the component geometry. You can choose a display setting for the view from three detail levels: Coarse, Medium, and Fine. Coarse displays only the outlines of walls, floors, and roofs. Medium and Fine display the compound structures of components.
The following illustrations show the plan view of a column with different detail levels.
Coarse detail level
48
■
Fine detail level
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Model Graphics Style Model Graphics Style controls the appearance of objects. The display styles available for Model Graphics Style are Wireframe, Hidden Line, Shading, and Shading with Edges, as shown.
You use the Wireframe and Hidden Line styles to duplicate the appearance of a standard printed page. For illustration and design review, you use Shading and Shading with Edges styles. The following illustrations show a structural model with different model graphics styles.
Wireframe style
Hidden Line style
Shading style
Shading with Edges style
Lesson: Working with Views
■
49
Shadows On/Off You use Shadows On/Off to review design and drawings. Zoning requirements sometimes restrict how the shadow of a building can fall on adjoining properties. You can check this by turning on the shadows using Shadows On.
You can adjust the shadow properties and silhouette edge style using Graphic Display Options.
Structural model with shadows turned on Structural model with shadows turned off
Show/Hide Rendering Dialog You use Show/Hide Rendering Dialog to specify settings for the rendered image and start the rendering process. Show/Hide Rendering Dialog uses default options with which you can easily generate a quality rendered image without an in-depth understanding of the rendering technology. In the 3D Orthographic and 3D Perspective views, you can activate or hide this option on the View Control Bar. Selecting Show Rendering Dialog opens the Rendering dialog box, which contains settings and controls for creating rendered views that display the effects of sunlight, shadow, and materials.
50
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
The following illustration shows the Rendering dialog box.
Crop View You can activate the crop view for view elements by selecting the Crop View instance parameter in the Instance Properties dialog box. When you select Crop View, it displays the elements only within the boundaries of the crop view. When you turn off the crop view by selecting Do Not Crop View, the elements within and outside the crop view boundaries are displayed.
Callout view with crop boundary displayed but not activated
Callout view with crop boundary displayed and activated
Lesson: Working with Views
■
51
Show/Hide Crop Region You use Show/Hide Crop Region to define the boundaries for a view. You can hide or show a crop region in a view, as required. When a crop region is visible, you can resize its edges by dragging the control grips.
3D view with crop region activated and hidden
3D view with crop region selected and control grips visible
Temporary Hide/Isolate You use Temporary Hide/Isolate to temporarily hide the selected objects or object categories in the active view, or isolate (display only) the selected object or category. This view parameter is useful when you want to view or edit only a few elements of a certain category.
Temporary Hide/Isolate options
The objects hidden in a view using Temporary Hide/Isolate are not visible in the view window, but they are still a part of the view and are also printed.
52
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
The following illustrations show the effect of the Temporary Hide/Isolate parameter on walls in a plan view when the Isolate Category option is selected.
Upper wall selected
Wall category isolated
Reveal Hidden Elements You use Reveal Hidden Elements for quickly identifying elements hidden in the current view. You can identify them either by category, using visibility graphic overrides, or by element, using Hide in View from the shortcut menu of the selected element. The following illustrations show a brace frame elevation view with hidden floor elements. In the illustration on the left, Reveal Hidden Elements is off and the floor elements are hidden in the view. In the illustration on the right, Reveal Hidden Elements is on and the elements currently hidden in the active view are displayed in magenta.
Reveal Hidden Elements off
Reveal Hidden Elements on
Lesson: Working with Views
■
53
Thin Lines You use the Thin Lines tool to toggle the display of line width in a model. Revit shows lines with applied width, by default, so that each view approximates how it prints according to drafting standards. With Thin Lines turned on, you can easily differentiate between closely spaced lines when you need to work in a cluttered part of a view. Thin Lines affects all the views. This tool is available on the Graphics panel of the View tab. The following illustration shows the Thin Lines tool on the Graphics panel.
In the following illustration, when Thin Lines is turned on, you can view the exact intersection detail at the top of the wall, and when Thin Lines is turned off, the slanting roof hides the top of the wall.
Thin lines turned off Thin lines turned on
54
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Guidelines for Working with Views The following recommended practices help you to work effectively with views. ■ Familiarize yourself with duplicating and modifying views by using the Project Browser because the Project Browser and its associated shortcut menus are important tools for working with views. This helps you speed up your workflow and manage views easily, which is a basic skill in Revit. ■ Familiarize yourself with the View Control Bar, which contains options that you will use while working with views. The View Control Bar helps you navigate and modify views quickly and easily. ■ Familiarize yourself with Temporary Hide/Isolate on the View Control Bar, which is useful for turning elements on and off as you work in a model. ■ Study the Instance Properties and Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog boxes for your working views because these two dialog boxes control what you see in any view. If you understand how to modify view properties, control visibility of elements, and change or override graphic display of elements in these two dialog boxes, you will be able to work more effectively. ■ Adjust the crop region of the view after adding it, and then pin the view at the required position in the view window. This prevents you from inadvertently moving the view. ■ Add drafting elements to the largest scale views because drafting elements are view-specific. Small scale views are generally used for placing objects, and larger scale views become important when you work on detailing and documentation. Placing the drafted items in large scale views is more efficient and saves time. ■ Use dependent views for multistory projects with large floor plans. After you create the dependent views for one level, you can quickly replicate them to other levels by right-clicking the parent view in the Project Browser and selecting Apply Dependent Views from the shortcut menu. ■ Add drafting elements directly to views and not to sheets. When you move the views on a sheet, the elements placed in the view move with the view. ■ Orbit about a particular element in a 3D view by selecting the element first and then rotating the view. This helps maintain the orientation of the view as you orbit. ■ Open a view by double-clicking its name in the Project Browser. This is the quickest way to open a view. ■ Select Close Hidden Windows on the Windows panel of the View tab to close all open views, except the active view in each project. This keeps your Switch Windows list manageable and conserves system resources. ■ Dock, undock, and close the Project Browser to enlarge the view window when required. This provides a larger workspace. ■ Select multiple views from the Project Browser using CTRL+select if you want to change the properties of multiple views simultaneously. This saves time and reduces the chance of errors. ■ Open a 3D view and tile it when working in 2D plan, section, or elevation views. This helps in visualizing the effect of modifications made in the 2D view on the rest of the model.
Lesson: Working with Views
■
55
Exercise: Explore and Create Views In this exercise, you explore different views of a structural model. In addition, you create multiple plan views by using the existing views in the Project Browser. You want to explore and create views of a structural model so that you can properly visualize the structural design. You use the Steering Wheel to view the structural model and then explore the different views in the Project Browser. Finally, you create multiple plan views of the structural model by using the options for duplicating views. You do the following: ■ Explore views. ■ Create multiple plan views.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model. Click Exercise: Explore and Create Views.
Explore Views
56
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
1. 2. 3.
Open c_rst_essentials_viewing.rvt. The file opens in the SECOND FLR. view. Open the default 3D view. On the Navigation Bar, select Full Navigation Wheel from the SteeringWheels drop-down to navigate and view the building model in the view window using the Zoom, Orbit, and Pan tools. Note: If the Full Navigation Wheel is already selected in the SteeringWheels dropdown, click the Steering Wheels icon on the
Navigation Bar to display Full Navigation Wheel.
4.
5.
In the view window: ■ On the Steering Wheel, click Zoom to establish the Zoom pivot point. The Zoom pivot point appears below the point where you click the Zoom tool. ■ Drag the cursor up or right to enlarge the view, and down or left to shrink the view of the building model.
6.
In the view window: ■ On the Steering Wheel, click Orbit to establish the Orbit pivot point. ■ Drag the cursor to spin the view.
In the view window, move the cursor over the building model. Notice that the Steering Wheel follows the cursor.
Lesson: Working with Views
■
57
7.
On the Steering Wheel, click Pan and drag the cursor to move sideways or up and down the view of the building model to pan the view.
Note: Press ESC or click Modify on the Quick Access toolbar to exit the Steering Wheel. 8. Open the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. 9. Use the mouse wheel to zoom in (roll the wheel forward) and zoom out (roll the wheel backward). Notice that the position of the cursor remains fixed in the view window as you zoom in and out. 10. On the Navigation Bar, select Zoom in Region from the Zoom drop-down.
11. Zoom in to the right (east) half of the building model. Notice the section line running vertically through the middle of the building model. This section line denotes the placement of a building section and is named Section 2.
12. Select the vertical section line (Section 2), as shown.
Notice that the cursor changes to the magnifying glass icon. Note: If Zoom in Region is already selected in the Zoom drop-down, click the Zoom icon on the Navigation Bar to display the Zoom tool.
58
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
13. Right-click anywhere in the view window. Click Go to View to make Section 2 the active view.
14. In the Section 2 view, select the callout on the left side of the view. This callout is named Callout of Section 2.
Right-click SECOND FLR. Click Duplicate View > Duplicate to create a duplicate view. Notice that a new view named Copy of SECOND FLR. is added to the Project Browser and is now the active view. In the duplicate view, model elements are visible but the annotations are not. ■ Right-click Copy of SECOND FLR. Click Rename. In the Rename View dialog box: ■ Enter SECOND FLR. - Working. ■ Click OK. The SECOND FLR. - Working view is independent of the original SECOND FLR. view. You can use it as a working view to further build the model and coordinate with a referenced architectural plan. The original SECOND FLR. view can contain the annotation and be used for documentation. Create a new view with detailing. In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans: ■ Right-click SECOND FLR. Click Duplicate View > Duplicate with Detailing. A new view named Copy of SECOND FLR. is again added to the Project Browser and is now the active view. Notice the annotation tags that are visible in the duplicate view. ■ Rename Copy of SECOND FLR. to SECOND FLR. - Overall. This view is also independent of the original SECOND FLR. view. You can change the view to a coarser scale that allows the entire plan or multiple overall plans to fit on the sheet. Additional annotation belongs to the view and does not display in the original view. Create a new view as a dependent view. In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans: ■ Right-click SECOND FLR. Click Duplicate View > Duplicate as a Dependent. A new view named Dependent on SECOND FLR. is added to the Project Browser and listed under the original view. Notice that the annotation tags are visible in the duplicate view. ■ Rename Dependent on SECOND FLR. to SECOND FLR. - West. ■
2.
3.
15. Right-click anywhere in the view window. Click Go to View to make Callout of Section 2 the active view.
4.
Create Multiple Plan Views 1.
Create a new view without detailing. In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans:
Lesson: Working with Views
■
59
5.
In the view window: ■ Select the crop boundaries and resize the view to display only the portion of the plan between the grid lines A and D. ■ Press ESC to clear the selection.
10. Click View tab > Sheet Composition panel > Matchline to add a matchline to the view.
11. In the view window, sketch a vertical line to the left of the grid line D.
6. 7.
This view is dependent on the original SECOND FLR. view and shares the same view settings, such as scale and detail level. Annotations added to the dependent view also display in the parent view and vice versa. Create another dependent view of the SECOND FLR. as SECOND FLR. - East. Resize the view similar to the SECOND FLR. West view to display only the portion of the plan between the grid lines D and G.
12. Click Create Matchline Sketch tab > Matchline panel > Finish Matchline.
8. 9.
60
Clear the selection. Open the parent view SECOND FLR.
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
The matchline is now displayed in both the parent and dependent views. 13. Click View tab > Windows panel > Close Hidden.
14. Open the following dependent views. ■ SECOND FLR. - West ■ SECOND FLR. - East 15. Tile the views. 16. Zoom all the views to fit in their windows. Note: The completed exercise illustration may differ depending on the view that is first opened. 17. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Working with Views
■
61
Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility This lesson describes how to control the visibility and graphical representation of objects in a structural model. You begin the lesson by learning about controlling object visibility and graphical representation by using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box and view template options. Then, you learn to modify line styles to control object visibility and use filters. Next, you learn some recommended practices for controlling object visibility. The lesson concludes with an exercise on controlling object visibility. There are times when you need to control the visibility and graphical representation of elements in certain views, without affecting the entire model. For example, you may not want the elevation symbols to display in the structural plan view. However, if you select and delete these symbols, then the elevation views are also deleted. Instead, you can adjust the visibility graphical overrides of the view to not display the elevation symbols.
Elevation symbols visible
Elevation symbols not visible
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe controlling object visibility and graphical representation. Identify view template options. Modify line styles to control object visibility. Use filters. State the recommended practices for controlling object visibility. Control object visibility.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
62
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
About Controlling Object Visibility You control the visibility of objects to display, hide, or modify the appearance of specific objects in a selected view. You control object visibility and graphical representation in all the views of a project by defining object styles. You use the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box to set object visibility and graphical representation differently for each view.
Definition of Controlling Object Visibility Controlling object visibility involves displaying and hiding specific elements in a defined drawing sheet view. Changing the object visibility in a view modifies the view, not the objects.
Visibility/Graphic Overrides Dialog Box You use the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box to specify the settings for object visibility and appearance. You can access this dialog box by clicking Visibility/Graphics on the Graphics panel of the View tab. You can also open the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box by pressing the VV or VG key combinations, or by opening the Instance Properties dialog box and clicking Edit for the Visibility/Graphics Overrides parameter.
Visibility/Graphics Settings The Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box has four tabs: Model Categories, Annotation Categories, Imported Categories, and Filters. Additional tabs, such as Revit Links Categories, Worksets Categories, and Design Options, are displayed if the project contains linked RVT files, is subdivided into worksets, and includes design options, respectively. You can control the visibility of all categories of objects, such as structural columns and dimensions. You can also control the visibility of object subcategories, such as the stick representation of structural framing girders. You control object category or subcategory visibility by selecting the check boxes on the categories tabs in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. If you clear the check box for a category, its subcategories are also hidden.
Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box
Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility
■
63
Using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, you control the following settings by object category: ■ Change the line thickness, color, and pattern of projection and cut lines by selecting Override for Lines. ■ Change the visibility, color, and pattern of projection and cut patterns by selecting Override for Patterns. ■ Make an object category halftone and/or transparent and change the detail level to course, medium, or fine by selecting Halftone, Transparent, and Detail Level check boxes, respectively.
Show and Hide All Categories and Disciplines When you change the category settings in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, the changes are applied only to the active view. To apply the visibility setting changes for an object category to the entire project, you use the Object Styles dialog box. In a linked architectural Revit model, you can control the visibility of architectural objects in a view by hiding them. For example, when you are working on a structural model that links to an architectural model, the linked model may include some architectural objects in a particular view that you need to see and others that you need to hide. You can display or hide all categories by selecting the Show Model Categories in this View check box on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. Further, to display all object categories from other disciplines (architectural and mechanical), select the Show Categories from All Disciplines check box on the Model Categories tab.
Show Model Categories in this View
Show Categories from All Disciplines
Overriding Host Layers You use overrides to control the visibility of cut edges in host layers in plan and section views. The hosts to which you can apply an override are walls, roofs, floors, and ceilings. These overrides are dependent on the detail level of the view. When you place overrides by color and linetype on wall layers, the overrides display at medium or fine detail level and the plan or section view shows the layers for walls.
64
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Host Layer Line Styles The line styles you assign to the host structure are visible only in the view in which you create them. You can control the visibility of line styles by assigning different line weight, colors, and patterns to each of the layer functions: Structure, Substrate, Thermal/Air, Finish 1, and Finish 2. You define the line style using the Host Layer Line Styles dialog box. You can access this dialog box by selecting Edit in the Override Host Layers section of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.
You can also control the line styles for edges that are common to two layers of differing layer functions. If both layers are drawn using the same line styles, the properties assigned to common edges are used.
Object Styles Object styles define line weight, colors, patterns, and materials for different categories and subcategories of objects or imported geometry layers. You control object styles using the Object Styles dialog box. You can access this dialog box from the Settings drop-down on the Project Settings panel of the Manage tab. You can also access the Object Styles dialog box from the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. The definitions specified in the Object Styles dialog box are applied to the entire project unless they are overridden in specific views using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.
Object Styles dialog box
Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility
■
65
Examples of Views with Controlled Object Visibility The following illustrations show examples of the plan and elevation views with controlled visibility for the section marker.
66
Plan view before hiding section marker
Plan view after hiding section marker
Elevation view before overriding graphics of foundation objects
Elevation view after overriding graphics of foundation objects
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
View Templates View templates contain the standard settings of a view. Revit has default view templates that you can apply to views, and you can also create your own view templates for specific view conditions. The following illustration shows the View Templates dialog box, which you access by selecting View Template Settings from the View Templates drop-down on the Graphics panel of the View tab.
Applying View Templates You can apply a view template using the View Templates dialog box or the shortcut menu of the Project Browser. The following illustrations show the two ways to apply a view template.
View Templates drop-down
Project Browser shortcut menu
Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility
■
67
When you use the Project Browser to create a new view template from an existing view, you first set up the desired view settings in the current active view. You can then apply this view template to all views requiring the same view settings. For example, you may have several brace frame elevation views in your model, but you only want to display the steel beams, columns, and braces and hide the floor slabs and walls. Instead of hiding the slab and wall elements separately for each view, you can create a view template and apply it once to all brace frame elevations. Views and view templates are not associatively linked. Therefore, views created using view templates are not updated when you change a template. To update a view if a template changes, reapply the template.
Hiding Elements Revit provides different options to hide elements that are not applicable to the current view and to change the graphical display of a model object. You access these options by selecting Hide in View from the shortcut menu of an element. Similarly, the graphics of a selected group of elements can be overridden by the elements.
Hide In View shortcut menu
The following table describes the three options that you can use for hiding or modifying the display of elements in a view. Option
Description
Elements
Applies only to the selected element(s).
Category
Applies to the entire category of elements. This is the same as clearing the element category check box in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.
By Filter
Applies to a selection of elements that you predefine using filters.
You can use the Reveal Hidden Elements option on the View Control Bar to quickly view the hidden elements in the current view.
68
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Modifying Line Styles You use the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box to modify the line styles for an object category in a structural model view by changing the graphic display properties of the category. When you modify line style, you can change the weight, color, and pattern of lines. You can change default line styles for all views of the structural model by using the Line Styles dialog box, which you can access from the Settings drop-down on the Project Settings panel of the Manage tab. You can also change line styles that are applied to objects in all views by using the Object Styles dialog box.
Procedure: Modifying Line Styles in a View The following steps describe how to modify line styles. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click View tab > Graphics panel > Visibility/Graphics. In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, Model Categories tab, under Projection/Surface, Lines, click Override for a model object category. In the Line Graphics dialog box, click the Color tab. In the Color dialog box, select a color for the line. Select a pattern for the line from the Pattern list.
Using Filters You use filters to override the graphic display and visibility of objects based on specific criteria and common properties of elements in a view. After creating the filter, you apply it to a plan view.
Visibility by Filter You use filters to have an effect on objects that fulfill the filter criteria. You can define filter criteria or you can select individual objects to include in the filter. You can create a filter, add categories to it, and set a filter by rule. This allows you to control the objects that are visible and specify how these objects will appear in a particular view. For example, you can change the display of all the joists by assigning them to a filter and overriding the visibility graphics of the view to display them in halftone red.
Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility
■
69
Procedure: Creating a New Filter The following steps describe how to create a new filter. 1. 2. 3.
Click View tab > Graphics panel > Filters. In the Filters dialog box, click New. In the Filter Name dialog box: ■ Enter a name for the filter. ■ Select whether to define the criteria, select them, or use the current selection.
Procedure: Adding Categories to a Filter The following steps describe how to add categories to a filter. 1. 2.
70
■
In the Filters dialog box, under Categories, select one or more categories to be included in the filter. The categories that you select determine the parameters that are available in the Filter By lists. In the Filters dialog box, under Filter Rules, select the parameter by which you want to filter from the Filter By list. If the parameter by which you want to filter is not in the list, click More Parameters to view additional parameters or to create a custom parameter.
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Procedure: Setting a Filter by Rules The following steps describe how to set a filter by rules. 1. 2.
In the Filters dialog box, under Filter Rules, select a filter criterion from the list below the Filter By list. Enter a value beginning with the filter criterion symbol in the field below the filter criteria field.
Procedure: Applying Filters to a Plan View The following steps describe how to apply filters to a plan view. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Open a structural plan view. Open the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, Filters tab, click Add. In the Add Filters dialog box, select a filter. In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, specify the values for filter properties, such as Visibility, Projection/Surface, Cut, Halftone, and Transparent. Click Apply to apply the filter to the view.
Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility
■
71
Guidelines for Controlling Object Visibility The following recommended practices help you to control the visibility and appearance of the objects in a structural model. ■ While using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, move the dialog box to one side so that you can see most of the view window. ■ Click Apply before closing the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box to see the changes. This allows you to check your override settings and make repeated changes more quickly. ■ To customize the appearance of objects in all the views of the structural model, override the appearance for the desired structural model categories in the Object Styles dialog box. If you want the desired display characteristics for model objects to appear in all projects, save the Object Styles settings in your project templates. This saves time when you start new projects. ■ When working on a project having linked Revit models, use the options on the Revit Links Categories tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. This allows you to easily control the visibility of objects in linked files by using the host file view, the linked file view, or custom settings. ■ When you work with linked structural models from different architects, nonstructural objects, such as architectural walls, do not display by default in structural views. These structural views include the plan, elevation, section, and 3D views. To set the default visibility characteristics of views, use the Discipline instance property of views. You can set the Discipline instance property of a view to Structural, Architectural, or Coordination to control the visibility of nonstructural items. When the Discipline value of a view is set to Structural, the nonstructural walls do not appear. This helps you simplify views for working while keeping an architectural model linked. ■ To repeat the same graphical adjustments on a number of views, automate the process by creating and assigning view templates. You use view templates to apply view settings to multiple views. ■ Specific view settings can be included or excluded from a view template. For example, if the scale setting is excluded from a view template, it can then be applied to views of various scales.
72
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Exercise: Control Object Visibility In this exercise, you control the visibility and graphical representation of objects in a view. You want to emphasize the framing members and de-emphasize the floor slabs and foundations in an elevation view. You then want to apply the view settings to another elevation view. You do the following: ■ Change the visibility settings. ■ Create and apply a view template.
The completed exercise
Lesson: Controlling Object Visibility
■
73
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model. Click Exercise: Control Object Visibility.
Change the Visibility Settings 1. 2. 3. 4.
Open c_rst_essentials_object_visibility.rvt. The file opens in the 3D view. Open the Elevation 2 - a view. Click View tab > Graphics panel > Visibility/ Graphics. In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box: ■ Under Visibility, clear the Floors check box. ■ For Structural Foundations and Walls, select the Halftone check boxes. ■ Click OK.
Create and Apply a View Template 1.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
74
To create a view template from the Elevation 2 - a view, in the Project Browser, right-click Elevation 2 - a. Click Create View Template From View. In the New View Template dialog box: ■ For Name, enter Brace Frame Elevation. ■ Click OK. The View Templates dialog box is displayed. Note: The View Templates dialog box provides options to further edit the object properties and include and exclude specific settings. In the View Templates dialog box, click OK. Open the Elevation 4 - a view. To apply the view template, in the Project Browser, right-click Elevation 4 - a. Click Apply View Template. In the Apply View Template dialog box: ■ Under Names, click the Brace Frame Elevation view template. ■ Click OK. Notice that the floors are hidden and the foundations appear in halftone. Close the file without saving changes.
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Lesson: Views This lesson describes how to work with elevation and section views. You begin the lesson by learning about the elevation and section views. Next, you learn the steps to control the visibility of elevation and section tags. You also learn some recommended practices for creating the elevation and section views. The lesson concludes with an exercise on working with the elevation and section views. Elevations and sections are used to create vertical views of a Revit model. You create elevation views to display the vertical projection of a model; section views are used to display a cross section through a portion of a model. You create elevation and section views to effectively design and modify a 3D model. These views can be used throughout the design process to assist in creating a model as well as documenting the design intent. The following illustrations show the elevation and section views.
Elevation view
Section view
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
75
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe elevation and section views. Control the visibility of elevation and section tags. State the recommended practices for working with elevation and section views. Work with elevation and section views.
■ ■ ■ ■
About Elevation and Section Views Elevation and section views are standard representations of structural models in construction document sets. These views are needed for effective designing of a structural model and for conveying the design intent to the building contractor. You can create wall building elevation views, framing elevation views, building section views, and wall section views from a plan view. In an elevation or section view, you can perform operations such as adding openings to a wall or editing its profile, which are difficult or impossible to perform in plan views.
Definition of Elevation Views Elevations are vertical orthographic nonperspective views. Level elements are placed in elevation views. You can use elevation views to show elements such as vertical bracing or roof pitch that cannot be accurately displayed in plan views. Elevations can be placed anywhere in a plan view, and they have variable depth and extents, which can be controlled by grips. There are two options for placing elevation views, Framing Elevation and Building Elevation. You can access these two options from the Elevation drop-down on the Create panel of the View tab. The following illustration shows the Framing Elevation and Building Elevation options.
Framing elevation views orient to grids or reference plane elevations and are set to a view depth of six inches (150 mm) or less, by default. Framing elevations are commonly used for adding vertical bracing to structural models. Building elevations orient themselves to the nearest wall, by default. They can be used to create a foundation wall elevation for showing openings and steps in the foundation to accommodate the site grade. Different symbols are used to distinguish framing elevations from building elevations.
76
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
The following illustrations show the building and framing elevation symbols.
Building elevation symbol
Framing elevation symbol
When you start a project with the default template, four elevations are automatically created: north, south, east, and west. You can create additional elevation views, when required. Elevation views are designated in plan views using elevation tags.
Definition of Section Views Section views are vertical orthographic views that cut through a structural model along a specified line. Unlike elevation views, which do not typically display hidden elements, section views represent parts of buildings that are hidden, such as the interior construction of walls, wall and floor joins, and roof and wall joins. Using building section views, you can cut through the entire depth or width of a structural model at large scale to display major structural elements. Wall section views enable you to cut through individual walls at medium scale and display conditions at the base, top, and floor junctions. Detail section views cut through specific areas at small scale. Detail section views are usually vertically limited to a wall and floor or beam and column connections. You create a section view by drawing a section line in a plan view. The section view is created perpendicular to the line. A section view has a default view depth and width, which you can control by using grips.
References in Section Views You may sometimes want to cut a section that references a similar, previously created section, instead of creating a new section. To do this, on the Options Bar, select the Reference Other View check box. Then, from the drop-down next to it, select a section, the callout of a section, or a drafting view name. If there are no existing views to reference, you can select to create a new drafting view. The following illustration shows the Reference Other View check box and the drop-down next to it.
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
77
You can place reference sections in the plan, elevation, section, drafting, and callout views. When you add a reference section to a model, a new view is not created. There is no parametric relationship between the reference section and the referenced view. Therefore, when you resize the section line of a reference section, it does not affect the crop region of the referenced view. The following illustration shows a reference section that is based on an existing section.
Elevation Controls Elevation controls are displayed when you select an elevation of a plan by clicking the square part in an elevation tag. These controls enable you to specify or control various aspects of an elevation. You can use elevation controls to: ■ Rotate the elevation by using the rotation control. ■ Create up to four elevation views by selecting the check box in each quadrant. ■ Delete an elevation view by clearing the corresponding check box. ■ Drag the elevation to a new location by using the cursor drag indicator. The following illustration shows a selected elevation tag and the elevation controls.
View check box Rotation control Cursor drag indicator
78
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Section Controls Section controls are displayed when you select a section line of a plan. You can use section controls to: ■ Toggle the section symbol by using the cycle section head and tail controls. ■ Reverse the direction of the section by using the flip section control. ■ Divide the section line into segments by using the break control. The following illustration shows a selected section tag and the section controls.
Cycle section head control Flip section control Break control Cycle section tail control
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
79
Line Breaks in Section Views If you do not want the section line to be displayed complete from the head to the tail, you can break it into disconnected segments. You use the break control to break section lines and join the split section lines. The following illustrations show breaking and rejoining a section line.
Section break in the middle of a section
Rejoined section line
A break in a section line is view-specific and affects the display of the section only in the view in which the break was made.
Segments in Section Views You can split sections into segments that are at right angles to the view direction. You can then use these segments to show parts of a building model located at different distances. You do not need to create a separate section view for each segment. For example, you can create a longitudinal building section that captures the structural framing along multiple grid lines as shown below. This split section shows the framing along grid line 2 between grid lines A and C, framing along grid line 3 between grid lines C and D, and framing along grid line 4 between grid lines D and G.
Segments in a plan view
80
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Segments in a section view
Instance Parameters of Elevation Views Elevation views have instance parameters, such as scale, detail level, model graphics style, and shadows. Elevations are 3D; you can control the depth of an elevation view by dragging the far clip plane in a plan view or by adjusting the Far Clip Offset parameter in the Instance Properties dialog box.
Far clip plane in a plan view
Far Clip Offset parameter in the Instance Properties dialog box
You can use the Far Clipping parameter of an elevation view to specify how the view represents its clip depth on the faces of objects that are oblique to the view. The Far Clipping parameter of an elevation view has three options: No Clip, Clip Without Line, and Clip with Line. You can access these options by clicking the value field for the Far Clipping parameter in the Instance Properties dialog box.
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
81
The following illustration shows the options of the Far Clipping parameter.
Instance Parameters of Section Views Similar to elevation views, section views have instance parameters, such as scale, detail level, model graphics style, and shadows. Section views are 3D. You can control the depth of a section by dragging the far clip plane indicator in a plan view or by adjusting the value for the Far Clip Offset parameter in the Instance Properties dialog box.
Far clip plane indicator in a section view
Far Clip Offset parameter in the Instance Properties dialog box
You can use the Far Clipping parameter of a section view to specify how the view represents its clip depth on the faces of objects that are oblique to the view. The Far Clipping parameter of a section view has three options: No Clip, Clip Without Line, and Clip with Line.
82
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Examples of Elevation and Section Views The following illustration shows examples of the elevation and section views.
Wall elevation view showing an opening Building section view showing walls, footings, and a roof created in a wall slab
Controlling Visibility of Elevation and Section Tags You can control the visibility of elevation and section tags in several ways. You can specify the view scale at which elevation and section tags are hidden in different views. For example, elevation or section tags can be hidden at scales coarser than 1/8" = 1'-0".
Procedure: Controlling Visibility of Elevation and Section Tags The following steps describe how to control the visibility of elevation and section tags. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
In the view window, select the elevation symbol arrowhead or the section line. Click Modify Views tab > Element panel > Element Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog box, for the Hide at Scales Coarser Than parameter, select a value from the Value list. On the View Control Bar, specify a view scale. In the view window, verify that the elevation or section tag is not visible for a view scale coarser than the specified value.
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
83
Guidelines for Working with Elevation and Section Views The following recommended practices help you to enhance your design productivity and save time. ■ Create external elevation views of a building from the four main directions and save them in your project templates. This saves setup time during the design development process because you can reuse the existing elevation views. ■ Create temporary elevation and section views for study or for aid in the design development process. Temporary views can be created quickly and deleted immediately after they serve their purpose. Effective use of temporary views speeds up your work and improves accuracy. ■ Prefix the view names with meaningful descriptions while creating temporary elevation and section views. This practice enables you and other design team members to distinguish temporary views from the views that are placed on drawing sheets. ■ Pin a view tag in place before adding text, detail components, and other annotations to the view. Pinning prevents the view tag from being moved inadvertently and affecting the extents of the view. ■ Reference similar views that have already been created, whenever applicable. This reduces the amount of detailing and annotation required but still conveys the design intent.
84
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Exercise: Work with Elevation and Section Views In this exercise, you create an elevation view and use it to modify the model. In addition, you learn about the differences between the three types of section views: building section, wall section, and detail view. You are working on a design project that is in its early stages. You want to create elevation and section views for the design development phase. These views will later be added to the construction document set. You do the following: ■ Create a building elevation view. ■ Add an opening to the foundation wall. ■ Create a building section view. ■ Create a foundation wall section view. ■ Create a footing detail view.
The completed exercise
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
85
Completing the Exercise
4.
In the view window: ■ Place the cursor below the bottom wall. ■ Notice that the building elevation tag automatically orients to the face of the wall elements. ■ Click to add an elevation tag to the plan view.
5. 6.
Click Modify to exit the Building Elevation tool. In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation): ■ Notice that a new view Elevation 1 - a is listed. ■ Rename Elevation 1 - a to South Foundation Wall. Notice that the view name change also reflects in the plan view. Tip: It is a good practice to rename the views you plan to use for documentation as you generate them. This speeds up the process of creating and assembling sheets for the drawing set.
To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model. Click Work with Elevation and Section Views.
Create a Building Elevation View 1. 2.
3.
86
Open i_rst_essentials_wall_elev_sect.rvt or m_rst_essentials_wall_elev_sect.rvt. The file opens in the BASEMENT structural plan view. In the view window, zoom in to the bottom wall.
Click View tab > Create panel > Elevation dropdown > Building Elevation.
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
7.
In the view window: ■ Select the arrowhead of the elevation tag. ■ You can adjust the far clip plane by moving the blue double arrows up or down.
4.
8.
Note: You can hide the crop region using Hide Crop Region on the View Control Bar. You now copy the opening on the grid line B to the grid line A.5. To do this, first select the opening on the grid line B.
Note: The continuous blue line represents the plane in which the view is being cut. You can move this plane independent of the elevation tag by selecting and dragging the continuous blue line. In the view window: ■ Zoom out to view the complete bottom wall. ■ Drag the segment handles, displayed as blue dots at each end, to adjust the extent of the elevation to the grid lines. 5. 6.
On the Modify panel, click Copy. In the view window: ■ Click the grid line B. ■ Click the grid line A.5 as shown.
Add an Opening to the Foundation Wall 1. 2.
3.
Open the South Foundation Wall view. On the View Control Bar: ■ Set the scale to 1/4" = 1'-0" (1 : 50). ■ Set the Detail Level to Medium. In the view window, adjust the extent of the view by selecting the crop region and dragging the shape handles.
■
Clear the selection.
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
87
7.
Enter ZE to zoom to extents.
4. 5.
8.
Open the default 3D view. Notice that the opening that you created in the section view is also visible in the 3D view because of bidirectional associativity.
6.
7.
8. 9.
Create a Building Section View 1. 2. 3.
Open the BASEMENT view. Click View tab > Create panel > Section to initiate the Building Section tool. Select Section : Building Section from the Type Selector drop-down.
1. 2. 3.
5.
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Note: Notice that the far clip plane extends past the farthest model element in the direction of the section. This is an attribute of building sections. Use the shape handles to adjust the far clip plane of the building section as shown.
In the Project Browser, under Sections (Building Section), notice that the new building section is listed as Section 1. Rename the view to Building Section Along Grid 2. Open the Building Section Along Grid 2 view. On the View Control Bar, click Hide Crop Region to turn off the crop region. Note: The cut and surface patterns of the wall elements are displayed according to the material settings of the elements. These can be overridden in the view.
Create a Foundation Wall Section View
4.
88
On the Options Bar, set the scale to 1/4" = 1'-0" (1 : 50). To place the section, in the view window: ■ Click below and to the left of the intersection of the grid lines A and 2. ■ Move the cursor to the right and click to place the section tail as shown.
Open the BASEMENT view. Activate the Section tool. Select Section : Wall Section from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar, ensure that the scale is set to 1/8" = 1'-0" (1 : 100). In the view window, zoom in to the control room on the right.
6.
7.
8.
Place the section in the view window as shown.
Note: Notice that unlike the building section, the far clip plane does not extend past the farthest model element in the direction of the section. The wall section is limited to the location where it is cut. Also, notice that the section head has an open arrow in contrast to the filled arrow section head associated with the building section. These symbolic settings can be customized for your organization and project standards. Notice that in the Project Browser, under Sections (Wall Section), a new wall section named Section 1 is listed. Rename the newly created view to Typical Foundation Wall Section. Open the Typical Foundation Wall Section view.
9.
In the view window, select the cropped region.
Notice the tilde symbols along each side of the cropped region. These symbols are used to break the section into parts that can be condensed together to save space on the sheet.
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
89
10. You now break the wall section to display the wall only at the floor levels. Select the tilde symbol, as shown, to initially break the section.
11. Adjust the cropped region of the upper part down to the FIRST FLR. as shown.
90
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
12. Break the upper cropped region again and adjust the cropped regions as shown.
Note: You may need to stretch the cropped regions further to get the same configuration as shown above.
13. Use the double arrows inside each cropped region to place the regions together.
Note: This process can be used to break a section horizontally. However, sections can be broken only in one direction, either horizontally or vertically.
14. To adjust the view, in the view window: ■ Change the scale to 3/8" = 1'-0" (1 : 50). ■ Turn off the cropped region.
Create a Footing Detail View 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Open the BASEMENT view. Activate the Section tool. Select Detail View : Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar, set the scale to 1" = 1'-0" (1 : 20). In the view window: ■ Zoom out, if required. ■ Place the section as shown.
Note: Notice that similar to the wall section, the far clip plane does not extend past the farthest model element in the direction of the section, but is instead limited to the location where it is cut. Also, notice that the section head has no arrow and the tail is different from that in the building and wall sections. These
Lesson: Working with Elevation and Section Views
■
91
6.
7.
symbolic settings can be customized for your organization and project standards. In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Detail), notice the new detail view listed. Rename the newly created view to Typical Footing Detail. Open the Typical Footing Detail view.
10. Zoom to fit each view in its tiled window.
Note: The order of the tiled windows may not be the same as shown above. 11. Close the file without saving changes.
8.
9.
92
Note: Unlike the wall section, the detail view does not provide a section for the full height of the building. Instead, the detail view confines the section to the level on which it is placed. This is an attribute of the detail view. Open the following views: ■ BASEMENT ■ {3D} ■ South Foundation Wall ■ Building Section Along Grid 2 ■ Typical Foundation Wall Section ■ Typical Footing Detail Tile the open views in windows.
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Lesson: Working with 3D Views This lesson describes how to work with 3D views. You begin the lesson by learning about 3D views and cameras and how to navigate through a 3D view. Next, you learn the steps to create and modify camera views and change the material properties of elements in a 3D view. You also learn about some recommended practices for working with 3D views. The lesson concludes with an exercise on working with 3D views. 3D views enable you to visualize a structural model as you build it. They display the actual sizes of the elements, making it easy to see precisely how the elements will work together to form the structure of the building. In 3D views, you can quickly identify coordination issues that may have gone undetected in a 2D environment. 3D views can be used throughout a design process to identify and discuss complicated framing conditions. In addition, these views can be included in construction documentation to convey the design intent to the building contractor. The following illustration shows a 3D view displaying the structure of a building model.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Describe 3D views. Identify the options for navigating through a 3D view. Describe cameras. Create and modify 3D views. Change material properties of elements in a 3D view. State the recommended practices for working with 3D views. Work with 3D views.
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
93
About 3D Views You can represent the structure of a model by using 3D views, which can be rendered with textures and colors. These views help demonstrate the forms and functions of the structural elements in a model and clearly explain your design vision.
Definition of 3D View A 3D view displays the 3D representation of an object from an eye or camera position. You can create two types of 3D views, perspective and orthographic. A perspective view uses the laws of perspective, whereas an orthographic view uses parallel projection. You can create a section box in a perspective or orthographic view to display only a specific part of a model or an object.
Perspective Views A perspective view displays the 3D view of an object as it appears in a lens, from an eye or camera position. In a perspective view, the objects that are at a greater distance from the camera position appear smaller than the objects that are closer to the camera, even if they are all of the same size. The receding parallel lines in a perspective view converge to a vanishing point.
Orthographic Views An orthographic view displays the 3D view of an object from an eye or camera position, where each point in the view is perpendicular to the viewing plane. In an orthographic view, objects of similar size appear to have the same size irrespective of their distance from the camera position. The receding parallel lines in an orthographic view remain parallel and do not converge to a vanishing point.
Section Box Views A section box is a 3D boundary created in the 3D view. This view helps isolate a part of a building model for the purpose of study or illustration. To create a section box view from a perspective or orthographic view, you turn on the section box around the view using the Instance Properties dialog box. When you enable a section box in a 3D view, the only change to the view is the addition of the section box around the structure of the building model. The section box provides triangular control grips that you can use to cut away the required portion of the building model and to limit the scope of visibility in the 3D view.
94
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Example of 3D Views The following illustrations show the various 3D views of the structure of a building model.
Perspective view
Orthographic view
Section box Control grips
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
95
Navigating Through a 3D View You navigate through an orthographic or perspective 3D view to change the orientation of the view or control the appearance of the view according to your requirements. You can navigate through a 3D view using the mouse wheel, Steering Wheels, or view cube. You can navigate faster if you use the mouse wheel or the view cube to navigate through an orthographic view. However, to accurately orient a perspective view for rendering, you should use the Steering Wheels.
Mouse Navigation A mouse wheel provides the zoom, pan, and orbit controls in a 3D view. The pan and orbit controls allow you to orient a particular view to give you the required view. You move the mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out from a view. You can also use the CTRL key and the mouse wheel to zoom. To pan the view (side-to-side), you hold down the mouse wheel. To orbit in a view, you use the mouse wheel and the SHIFT key simultaneously.
Steering Wheel Navigation You open the Steering Wheel by clicking the Steering Wheel on the Navigation Bar or pressing F8. The Steering Wheel can display as the full navigation wheel, the view object wheel, or the tour building wheel. The three wheels provide controls that allow you to zoom, pan, orbit, or place the view center; look around from the camera position; move the model up or down; walk around the view (in perspectives only); and rewind through recent actions. You can control the appearance of the Steering Wheels using the Options dialog box.
Full navigation wheel
View object wheel
Tour building wheel
The following table describes the options on the three Steering Wheels.
96
Wheel
Buttons
Description
Full navigation wheel
Orbit
Rotates the camera eye about the entire model or selected objects.
Zoom
Magnifies the view.
Pan
Moves the view left, right, up, or down.
Rewind
Steps back through recent actions.
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Wheel
View object wheel
Tour building wheel
Buttons
Description
Center
Sets the center for Zoom or Orbit.
Walk
Moves the camera toward the model in the direction the cursor is dragged.
Look
Spins the camera while holding its position.
Up/Down
Moves the camera up or down, holding the same target point.
Center
Sets the center for Zoom or Orbit.
Zoom
Magnifies the view.
Rewind
Steps back through recent actions.
Orbit
Rotates the camera eye about the entire model or selected objects.
Forward
Zooms in toward a selected target.
Look
Spins the camera while holding its position.
Rewind
Steps back through recent actions.
Up/Down
Moves the camera up or down, holding the same target point.
Mini Wheels Navigation You can also open mini versions of the three wheels: full navigation wheel, view object wheel, and tour building wheel. Mini wheels are designed for users who are experienced in 3D navigation and prefer to have more screen space and smaller controls.
Mini navigation wheel
Mini view object wheel
Mini tour building wheel
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
97
You control the appearance of Steering Wheels using the Options dialog box. The following illustration shows the SteeringWheels tab in the Options dialog box.
View Cube Navigation In 3D views, the view cube is present in the upper-right corner of the view window, by default. The view cube consists of a compass and a cube.
Compass
Cube
To orient the view toward a specific direction, you select and drag the appropriate compass direction indicator. You can place the cursor over the compass and then select and drag the model on the ground plane. You can also orbit the model by selecting and dragging any part of the cube. To orient the view, you select any named face, edge, or corner of the cube. To return the view to its original position, you select the home icon.
98
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
You control the appearance of the view cube using the Options dialog box. The following illustration shows the ViewCube tab in the Options dialog box.
About Cameras To create a 3D view, you add a camera to a project and focus the camera on the model in views such as floor plan and elevation. After you add a camera to a project, you can move either the camera or the view target to change the 3D view of the project. You can also set and modify the properties of 3D views and save the views.
Definition of Camera A camera presents a scene from a particular point of view. Camera objects simulate still-image, motion picture, or video cameras in the real world.
Creating Additional 3D Views You change a camera view by modifying the camera properties. You can add cameras to create new 3D views. For example, you can create a view of the inside of a model by placing the camera inside the walls of the model. 3D views differ from each other on the basis of the actions you perform, such as changing the position of the camera or the target point. You can notice the change in the view as you navigate through the 3D view using the Full Navigation Wheel. Additionally, you can modify the far clip plane associated with the camera to change what the 3D view displays.
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
99
Rotating 3D Views The target point defines the axis of rotation for a 3D view. You can rotate a 3D view about this axis by modifying the camera level and its focal point. When you change the model in a 3D view, the changes also occur in other views. You can tile all the open views in the view window to watch the changes simultaneously. In plan or elevations views, you can make the cameras of 3D views visible. You can also modify camera position and target points.
Naming and Saving Views When you first place a camera, a 3D view of the current project is opened in the Project Browser and named 3D View 1. Additional camera view names increment in the Project Browser as they are created. The default 3D view is named {3D}. You open this view by selecting Default 3D View in the 3D View drop-down on the Create panel of the View tab. Clicking Default 3D View again reopens the view. You can also open the view by clicking its name in the Project Browser. You can modify the orientation of the default 3D views and save the changes by renaming the 3D view in the Project Browser. You can then open another default 3D view. You can duplicate the default 3D view or any 3D view. You can rename views when you create them to organize projects with multiple 3D views.
Modifying 3D Views You can modify 3D views by setting their properties, such as display parameter values, view scales, and crop region. You can change the crop region, which defines the boundaries for the 3D views, by moving the top, bottom, right, and left clip planes.
100
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Examples of Cameras and Camera Views The following illustrations show a camera positioned in the plan and elevation views and how the camera creates a 3D view from the plan and elevation views.
Camera positioned in the plan view
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
101
3D view created by the camera positioned in the plan view
Camera positioned in the elevation view
102
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
3D view created by the camera positioned in the elevation view
Creating and Modifying Camera Views You create a 3D perspective or orthographic view of a building model by adding a camera. You modify the view by changing the camera position, target, or field of view.
Procedure: Creating 3D Perspective Views The following steps describe how to create a 3D perspective view. 1. 2.
Open the plan, elevation, or section view in which you want to place the camera. Click View tab > Create panel > 3D View drop-down > Camera.
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
103
3.
On the Options Bar: ■ Select the Perspective check box. ■ Specify the view scale. ■ Set the camera level and Offset, which is set by default to the height of the eye above the level of the view. Note: These options are not available in the section or elevation view. Place the camera and drag the target point. Set the camera target.
4. 5.
Note: The Project Browser contains a default name, such as 3D View 1 or 3D View 2, for the newly created 3D perspective view. You can rename the view.
Procedure: Creating 3D Orthographic Views The following steps describe how to create a 3D orthographic view. 1. 2. 3.
Open the plan, elevation, or section view. Click the Camera tool. On the Options Bar: ■ Clear the Perspective check box.
Specify the view scale. In the view window: ■ Place the camera. ■ Drag the camera to a location where you want to position it. ■ Place the target point. Note: The Project Browser displays the default name of the view under 3D Views. You can rename the view. ■
4.
104
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Procedure: Modifying Existing Camera Views The following steps describe how to modify an existing camera view. 1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Project Browser, double-click the 3D view name. On the Navigation Bar, click SteeringWheels. Using the selected Steering Wheel, use the appropriate buttons to perform the required actions. Note: You can also navigate using the mouse wheel. Save the view to retain the modification.
Changing Material Properties You can modify the appearance of structural elements displayed in a 3D view by changing the material properties of the elements. You can specify these properties in the Materials dialog box, accessible by clicking Materials on the Project Settings panel of the Manage tab.
Materials Dialog Box You use the Materials dialog box to add new materials or to change the properties of existing materials of the structural elements in a view. By changing material properties, such as color, transparency, or texture, you can change the appearance of elements in a view. You can also use the Materials dialog box to specify the material type and identity parameters such as model, manufacturer, and cost of a material.
Click Duplicate in the Materials dialog box to add a new material to the existing materials list.
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
105
Materials dialog box
Material Colors You can use the Materials dialog box to define steel materials with different colors to quickly distinguish between the physical properties of the materials. For example, you can use the color RED for A992 steel, YELLOW for A500 steel and BLUE for A36 steel.
Procedure: Changing Material Properties The following steps describe how to change the material properties of elements in a 3D view. 1. 2.
Click Manage tab > Project Settings panel > Materials. In the left pane of the Materials dialog box, select a material for which you want to change the appearance. On the Graphics tab, under Shading, click the button corresponding to color to change the color of the selected material. In the Color dialog box, you can define colors by specifying values for hue, saturation, and luminosity, or for red, green and blue. In addition, you can create a custom color using PANTONE. On the Graphics tab: ■ Under Shading, for Transparency, specify a value between 0 and 100. ■ Under Surface Pattern, select a pattern for the surface. Click the button corresponding to color to change the color of the surface pattern. Note: You can also specify a cut pattern for the material. Cut patterns are displayed only in plan, section, and 3D section box views.
3. 4. 5.
106
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
6.
On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace to modify the texture of the material.
7.
In the Render Appearance Library dialog box, select the desired texture from the list of predefined textures available for the material. You can filter the texture list using the Class list.
8.
In the Materials dialog box, on the Render Appearance tab, adjust the properties of the selected texture, such as Reflectivity and Transparency.
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
107
Guidelines for Working with 3D Views The following recommended practices help you while working with 3D views. ■ Create copies of the default 3D view in the Project Browser and save them in different orientations using the Orient options on the view cube drop-down. If you save the views in the project templates, you can reuse these views from different directions simultaneously in a project without setting them individually. ■ Create a 3D view quickly from an existing 2D view by right-clicking the view cube and selecting Orient to a View from the shortcut menu. This defines the extent of the section box property of the 3D view to match the cropped region and view depth of the existing 2D view. ■ Create view templates and apply them to 3D views. For example, you can make roofs and walls transparent and apply these conditions to one or more 3D views for presentation or model study purposes. ■ Check structural models in 3D view for interference conditions and gaps. For example, you can use the default 3D view tool to create a view that you spin to look underneath a model, for viewing foundations and footings. You can then delete the view, if required. This helps you check the structural model for errors that are not visible in other views.
108
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Exercise: Work with 3D Views In this exercise, you modify the appearance of elements in an orthographic 3D view and create a perspective view. You have designed a structural model and need to modify the appearance of the model before making a presentation to a client. To obtain a better view of the framing below the roof, you change the color of the steel columns and beams, and make the roof material partially transparent. You also create a section box view of a portion of the structural model. You then create a perspective view to display the changes in the appearance of the structural model. You do the following: ■ Change the color of the steel columns and beams. ■ Change the transparency of the roof material. ■ Create a section box view. ■ Create a 3D view from an existing elevation view. ■ Create a perspective view.
The completed exercise
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
109
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model. Click Exercise: Work with 3D Views.
Change the Color of the Steel Columns and Beams 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Open i_rst_essentials_3d_views.rvt or m_rst_essentials_3d_views.rvt. The file opens in the default 3D view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Click Manage tab > Project Settings panel > Materials. In the left pane of the Materials dialog box, select Metal - Steel from the list. In the right pane of the Materials dialog box, on the Graphics tab, under Shading, click the button corresponding to color. In the Color dialog box: ■ For Red, enter 198. ■ For Green and Blue, enter 0.
6.
In the Materials dialog box, click OK. Notice the change in the color of the columns and beams in the view window. You may need to zoom in to see this change.
Change the Transparency of the Roof Material 1. 2. 3.
4.
Open the Materials dialog box. In the left pane of the Materials dialog box, select Default Roof from the list. In the right pane of the Materials dialog box: ■ On the Graphics tab, under Shading, for Transparency, enter 10. ■ Click OK. In the view window, notice that the roof deck becomes partially transparent and you can view the framing through it.
Create a Section Box View 1.
■
To create a new 3D view, in the Project Browser: ■ Right-click the default 3D view. Click Duplicate View > Duplicate. A view named Copy of {3D} is added under 3D Views and becomes the active view.
Click OK. ■
110
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Rename the new 3D view to Section Box View Long.
2. 3. 4.
5.
Ensure that Section Box View Long is the active view. Right-click in the view window. Click View Properties to access the properties for the currently active view. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Extents, select the Section Box check box. ■ Click OK. Notice that a section box is displayed around the building model in the view window.
6.
Drag the triangular control grip on the left face of the section box backward to move the longer left side of the section box until it cuts through the walls of the building model as shown.
7.
Drag another triangular control grip to move the shorter right side of the section box towards the walls of the building model as shown.
8. 9.
Enter ZE to zoom to extents. Ensure that the section box is still selected.
In the view window, select the section box. Notice that triangular control grips appear on each face of the section box.
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
111
10. On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/ Isolate > Hide Element to hide the section box. Notice that the Temporary Hide/Isolate option is highlighted and a border appears around the view window. 11. Click Temporary Hide/Isolate > Apply Hide/ Isolate to View to make this temporary hide/ isolate view setting permanent.
4. 5.
Select the section box to display its shape handles. The view appears to be a 2D view. However, you can rotate the view using the view cube or by pressing SHIFT+wheel button. Also, adjust the shape handles of the section box as shown.
Create a 3D View from an Existing Elevation View 1. 2.
Open the default 3D view. In the view window, right-click the view cube. Click Orient to View > Elevations > Elevation: Elevation 4 - a.
6. 7. 8. 3.
Notice that the view is displayed as shown.
9.
112
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
The view is still the default 3D view. Create a duplicate 3D view and rename it to 3D Brace Frame. Access the properties of the currently active view. To deactivate the section box and display the entire model, in the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Extents, clear the Section Box check box. ■ Click OK. Zoom to fit to view the entire model.
Create a Perspective View 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the ROOF plan view. To modify the extents of the view, in the view window: ■ Click Zoom to Fit. ■ Click Zoom Out (2x). Click View tab > Create panel > 3D View dropdown > Camera to activate the Camera tool.
On the Options Bar: ■ For Offset, enter 35' (10500 mm). ■ Verify that ROOF is selected in the From list. ■ Verify that the Perspective check box is selected. Note: If the Perspective check box is not selected, an orthographic view is created instead of a perspective view. To add a 3D view, in the view window: ■ Click in the lower-left area of the view window to place the camera. Do not place the camera close to the building model or grid lines. ■ Click to place the camera target point as shown.
6.
This adds a new view named 3D View 1 under 3D Views in the Project Browser. 3D View 1 is now the active view. To view the complete building model, in the view window: ■ Ensure that the crop region of the building model is selected. ■ Drag the circular drag controls on the boundary of the crop region to resize the boundary as shown.
Note: The illustration may appear different depending on the placement of the camera. While dragging the circular controls to resize the boundary of the crop region, you can further zoom out or zoom in the view to display the entire building model. Zoom to fit. On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style > Shading with Edges. Notice that the beams and columns appear red and the roofs appear partially transparent and gray. ■ Select Shadows On. ■ Click Hide Crop Region to remove the boundary of the crop region. This displays the 3D perspective view of the building model. Close the file without saving changes. ■
7.
8.
Lesson: Working with 3D Views
■
113
114
■
Chapter 3: Viewing the Structural Model
Chapter
4 Starting a New Project A project is a database of information for the design of a structural model. In this chapter, you learn how to set up a project and transfer standards between projects. You also learn how to add and modify levels and grids in a structural model.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■
Set up a project and transfer standards between projects. Add and modify levels in a structural model. Create and modify grids.
Chapter Overview
■
115
Lesson: Starting a Project This lesson describes how to set up a project and transfer standards between projects. You begin the lesson by learning about projects. Next, you learn the steps to create project templates and some recommended practices to create project template files. The lesson concludes with an exercise on setting up a project and transferring project standards. Revit provides templates that you can use to start a new project file. These templates provide the content, standards, and settings required to build a model and generate a typical set of structural drawings. However, many engineering organizations have established an extensive set of organization standards that can be replicated by modifying the graphical settings, system families, and component families. These modified settings are stored in an organization’s standard template file, which is used to start new projects. In addition, you can transfer the standards between projects.
Structural project created from a custom template file
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
116
Describe projects. Create project templates. State the recommended practices for creating project template files. Set up a project and transfer project standards.
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
About Projects A project provides essential information, such as the size and location of elements, materials used, and annotations contained in a structural model. The display settings in a project file determine the appearance of the structural model in different views. Based on the design requirements, you can customize the default settings of a project. Typically, a project file is based on a template that provides settings, such as material and display settings, for starting the project. You can customize the predefined project templates, if required. You can also start a project without using a template.
Definition of Projects A project is a database of information for the design of a structural model. It includes the entire structural design and the associated documentation. Additionally, a project provides complete information about various parametric components that are required to represent a structural model in standard dimensional views and in schedules. A project file contains all the information related to the design of a structural model, from geometry to construction data.
Project Templates Project templates help you standardize projects by providing the initial conditions, such as the units, object styles, text types, and standard views. You can select a project template from the template library or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. New projects inherit the families, settings, and geometry from the template they use. By default, a new project is created with the Structural Analysis-default.rte (Structural AnalysisDefaultMetric.rte) template file. The view properties and ranges in this template are set up to work specifically with structural elements. The structural template provides view types for viewing both the analytical and physical models.
You can work with structural elements in projects that are based on nonstructural templates.
Template File Extension Project template files have the .rte extension. By default, template files are stored in the template folders at the same level as the imperial and metric library folders.
Lesson: Starting a Project
■
117
Recent Files Window When you launch Revit Structure, a startup window named Recent Files is displayed. The window contains links to the recently accessed project files and family files. You can also navigate to the required project files or open a new project using the default template. Additionally, you can specify any other template for a new project. To access the help and resource options, you can use the Help drop-down on the InfoCenter toolbar in the upper-right corner of the window. The Recent Files window also contains a link to the web content.
Recent Files window
Browser Organization The Project Browser lists all the views, families, sheets, and groups that are contained in a project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. You can also set filters to limit the types of views and sheets that are displayed. Additionally, you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser.
118
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Project Information You can specify project information, such as the project issue date, address, status, and client name, using the Project Information option. The project information is displayed in titleblock labels, which are automatically updated when you modify the project information. You can view the updated titleblock labels in the sheet view containing the titleblocks.
Project Parameters Project parameters are the attributes that you define and then add to categories of elements in a project. Such parameters are specific to a project and cannot be shared with other projects. If you want to share parameters across multiple projects, you need to create shared parameters. You can use project parameters in both single- and multi-category schedules. Parameters store and track information about one or more categories of elements in a project. The commonly used parameters are already set up in the software. For system families, the parameters are set up in the template files by default. For standard component families, the family parameters are set up as part of the component families. Projects that are created using a template file automatically inherit the parameters that are part of the used template file. You can add more parameters, if required.
Transfer of Project Standards Project standards consist of settings defined for a project. While setting up a new project, you can save time by transferring settings from an existing project to the new project. You can do this using the Transfer Project Standards option on the Project Settings panel of the Manage tab. You can then customize the settings based on the requirements of the new project. Settings that you can transfer across projects include system family types, line weights, materials, view templates, and object styles.
Project Settings panel
You can selectively copy settings from a source to a target project. An object that is not explicitly marked for copying but is referenced by a copied object is also copied to the target project. For example, if you select a wall type, but do not copy the material specified for the wall, the material is automatically copied with the wall type. When you transfer project standards, family types in the target project are not overwritten. Line weights and materials are overwritten when project standards are transferred. For example, if you copy a wall named Wall Type 18 to a project that already contains a wall type with the same name, the existing wall type in the target project is not overwritten.
Lesson: Starting a Project
■
119
Examples of Projects and Project Settings The following illustrations show projects and project settings.
Project Browser organization
Project information in the Instance Properties dialog box
Project parameters
120
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Select Items To Copy dialog box for transferring project standards
Creating Project Templates To create a project template, you can open an existing template file, modify its settings, and save it with a different name. You can also start a new project, define the required settings, and then save it with the .rte extension. Additionally, you can save a project, which includes geometry, as a template. The existing geometry can be used as a base for new design projects. For example, if you have defined the geometry for a concrete parking structure in a project and want to include the geometry in forthcoming projects, then you save the project as a template. Whenever you start a project with this template, the geometry is automatically displayed as part of the new project. If required, you can create additional elements, such as sheets, drafting views and details, schedules, families, cameras, groups, detail groups, and links, within project templates.
View Templates Views and their controls are very important for working effectively in Revit Structure. You can create templates for different view types to hold settings and then apply these templates to views.
Project Template Standards Templates can contain various standards, such as line styles, line weights, and fill patterns, for a project. The following illustration shows some project standards that can be defined in a template and transferred to other templates or projects.
For more information on project template standards, refer to the Revit Structure Help.
Lesson: Starting a Project
■
121
Procedure: Creating Project Templates The following steps describe how to create project templates. 1. 2. 3.
On the application menu, click New > Project. In the New Project dialog box, specify that you want to create a new project template. In the template, define styles, such as text and dimensions, for annotation system families.
4.
Create model element system family types for walls, floors, and other system families that you intend to use frequently in forthcoming projects. Note: The model element system families define the graphical representation and visibility parameters, such as line color, line pattern, and material, of the structural elements. Define the parameters for different line types, such as thin lines and wide lines. Create grids, levels, and views that you intend to use frequently in forthcoming projects. Note: Based on the project requirements, you can define the settings for an element by selecting the corresponding options on the Manage tab. Use the list of project standards that can be transferred between projects as a guide. Load families that you want to use in forthcoming projects. It is not necessary to load all families. Save the template with the .rte extension.
5. 6.
7. 8.
122
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Guidelines for Creating Project Template Files Follow these recommended practices to develop project template files that help you improve your project efficiency and maintain consistent standards while setting up projects. ■ Use the list of project standards as a guide for creating a project template file. A list of project standards includes the system families, standards, and settings that should be set up in a project template file. You should standardize the formatting for elements, such as text and dimensions, in the project template file to maintain consistency throughout projects. Following this practice also saves project setup time. ■ Set up and organize commonly used sheets in the Project Browser so that the sheets can be used for placing views and other information that you need to include as part of the construction drawings. This practice helps you save time during the documentation phase of a project. ■ Create and include commonly used schedules in project template files to save setup time. ■ Include model and detail component families, detail components, filled regions, and repeating detail system families in project template files. This practice saves time and reduces the chances of errors when a structural design is transferred from the model development phase to the detailing and documentation phase. ■ Avoid loading excess content into template files. This can increase the file size and affect its performance. Load only the content applicable to the projects for which the template is being created. For example, if you are creating a standard template to be used on steel projects, load only the common beam and columns sections. There is no need to load all the standard steel sections because additional steel sizes can be loaded as the structure is built.
Lesson: Starting a Project
■
123
Exercise: Set Up a Project and Transfer Project Standards In this exercise, you set up a project and transfer its standards to another project. You are setting up a new project using the default structural project template. You organize the Project Browser by discipline, specify project information, and define project parameters. Then, you reuse the project information and project parameters in another project by transferring the standards to that project. You do the following: ■ Open a project template. ■ Organize the Project Browser. ■ Specify project information. ■ Define project parameters. ■ Transfer project standards.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 4: Starting a New Project. Click Exercise: Set Up a Project and Transfer Project Standards.
Open a Project Template 1.
124
On the application menu, click New > Project.
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
2.
Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. In the New Project dialog box, click Browse to specify the template file for the project.
3.
In the Choose Template dialog box: ■ Navigate to the Imperial Templates (Metric Templates) folder. ■ Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte (Structural Analysis-DefaultMetric.rte).
2.
In the Browser Organization dialog box, Views tab: ■ Select the Discipline check box.
Click Edit. In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box, Folders tab, verify that Discipline is selected in the Group By list. On the Filter tab: ■ Select Discipline from the Filter By list. ■ Ensure that Equal To is selected in the list displayed on the left below the Filter By list. ■ Select Structural from the list displayed on the right below the Filter By list to display only structural views. ■
Click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK. Notice that on the application window title bar, a default project name, which includes a project number, is displayed for the new project. Note: The project number can vary depending on the number of projects you have created in the current session.
3.
■
4.
4.
Organize the Project Browser 1.
Click View tab > Windows panel > User Interface drop-down > Browser Organization. 5.
Click OK to close each dialog box. Notice that the tree view in the Project Browser is collapsed and only the Structural group is displayed under Views (Discipline).
Lesson: Starting a Project
■
125
Specify Project Information 1.
Click Manage tab > Project Settings panel > Project Information.
4. 5.
Under Categories, select the Views check box. Click OK to close each dialog box. Note: If the Parameter Value dialog box opens to assign a value for the parameter to the currently selected elements, click OK.
Transfer Project Standards 1.
2. 3.
In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Other, for Project Address, click Edit. In the Edit Text dialog box: ■ Enter 111 McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, CA 94903, and USA in three lines, as shown.
2.
3. Click OK. Close the Instance Properties dialog box. ■
4.
Define Project Parameters 1. 2. 3.
On the Project Settings panel, click Project Parameters. In the Project Parameters dialog box, click Add. In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data: ■ For Name, enter View Purpose. ■ Ensure that Common is selected in the Discipline list. ■ Ensure that Text is selected in the Type of Parameter list. Note: With the View Purpose parameter, you can organize the Project Browser such that views are grouped according to their purpose. A view purpose can be analytical, construction documentation, working, or any other purpose that you specify to better organize the views in the Project Browser. ■
■
126
Verify that Other is selected in the Group Parameter Under list. Verify that Instance is selected so that the View Purpose parameter can be set for each instance of a view.
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Open i_rst_essentials_getting_started.rvt or m_rst_essentials_getting_started.rvt. This is the target project to which you transfer standards. On the Project Settings panel, click Transfer Project Standards.
In the Select Items To Copy dialog box: ■ Select the name of the new project that you have set up from the Copy From list. Standards are copied from this project to the currently active project. ■ Click Check None to clear all check boxes. ■ Select the Browser Organization, Project Info, and Project Parameters check boxes to transfer this information to the target project. ■ Click OK.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
11. 12.
13.
14. 15.
In the Duplicate Types dialog box, click Overwrite to update the browser organization and project information in the new project.
Note: The warning in the Duplicate Types dialog box is displayed because Revit recognizes discrepancy between the values for each of these parameters and gives you the option to overwrite them or only transfer any new types. Click Project Information. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Other, for Project Address, click Edit. In the Edit Text dialog box, verify that the address is updated to the value you had entered earlier. Click OK to close each dialog box. On the Project Settings panel, click Project Parameters. In the Project Parameters dialog box: ■ Verify that the View Purpose parameter is displayed in the list. ■ Click OK. Open the Browser Organization dialog box. In the Browser Organization dialog box, Views tab: ■ Select the Discipline check box. ■ Click Edit. In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box, Filter tab, verify that the filter applied is the same as that applied to the project you created earlier. Click OK to close each dialog box. Close all files without saving changes.
Lesson: Starting a Project
■
127
Lesson: Adding and Modifying Levels This lesson describes how to add and modify levels in a structural model. You begin the lesson by learning about levels. Next, you learn the steps and some recommended practices for adding and modifying levels. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding levels. Levels define the vertical extent of the building model and are used to place and modify model elements. Each model element placed in a model is associated with a level; for example, horizontal elements such as beams and floors are assigned to a level. Levels are also assigned to the top and bottom of vertical elements such as columns or walls. If the elevation of a level changes, all the associated elements are changed automatically and reflected in all views because of bidirectional associativity.
Different levels in a section view
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
128
Describe levels. Identify the steps to add and modify levels. State the recommended practices for adding and modifying levels. Add levels to a project.
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
About Levels Levels define the vertical position and extents of structural elements in a project. Levels also form the horizontal plane for structural plan views. You can constrain columns, beams, and walls to levels so that they move when a level changes height. When you create a new project with a default template such as Structural Analysis-Default.rte or Structural Analysis-DefaultMetric.rte, two levels are automatically created, Level 1 and Level 2.
Definition of Levels Levels are finite horizontal planes that act as references in a structural model for level-hosted elements such as roofs and floors. You can also use levels to define the vertical extents of walls and the vertical placement of elements such as beams and columns.
Level Types You use the Level tool to add new levels by sketching the required level lines in elevation or section views. All level lines have associated labels that display the name and elevation of the level by default. The following table describes the two level types, story and non-story. Levels
Description
Story
A level that defines a floor or a roof of a building. You create a level for each known story in the structural model. All story levels have corresponding plan views. The symbol for a story level is blue.
Non-story
A level that does not define a floor or a roof of a building. Top of walls, top of foundation, and column splice elevation are examples of non-story levels. Although non-story, or reference, levels do not have corresponding plan views, they can still act as a host for placing objects and information. The color that represents a non-story level is black.
Level Lines and Level Labels Levels are represented as lines in elevation and section views. You can align the heads and tails of level lines with one another as you draw them. If you select a level line that is aligned, a closed padlock is displayed to indicate alignment. If you move the level line horizontally, all level lines that are aligned with it also move. If required, you can also move a level line independently of other level lines. To do this, you unlock the padlock. A label and a level symbol are automatically assigned to each new level. If required, you can edit the label of a level to rename the level. The level symbol can be modified to display on either or both ends of the level line. This modification is view specific and only affects the current view.
Lesson: Adding and Modifying Levels
■
129
If you create different level types, you can associate different symbol families with different level types.
Constraining Objects You use levels to constrain slabs, beams, structural columns, and walls. The advantage of constraining columns and walls to levels is that if you change the placement of a level, the size of all vertical objects constrained to that level changes accordingly. If you set a column or wall constraint to a height or depth, you can later modify that constraint to a level, with or without an offset distance. Columns and walls have base and top constraints. If you create a column or a wall in the default downward direction, the top constraint is set to the level of the current view. You can set the base constraint either to a level or to a depth. If you create columns and walls in the upward direction, you set the base to a level and define the height.
Example of Levels The following illustration shows the default levels in the project template file Structural AnalysisDefault.rte.
The following illustrations show examples of the story and non-story levels.
Story level that represents the top of a finished floor
130
■
Non-story level that represents the elevation of a column splice
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Adding and Modifying Levels You can easily add new levels to a project at any time. You can modify levels in a structural model by renaming them, changing their height, and offsetting their position. Modifying levels allows you to make the levels specific to a project.
Procedure: Adding Levels in an Elevation or Section View The following steps describe how to add a new level. 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
Change the active view to an elevation or section view. To add a level, click Home tab > Datum panel > Level. Note: You can also enter LL to activate the Level tool. You can copy or array levels to make new levels; however, they will be non-story unless you generate a corresponding plan view. On the Options Bar, clear the Make Plan View check box if you want to add a non-story level. In the view window, first click to enter the start point of the level line. Tip: The information in the lower-left corner of the status bar guides you while you use the Level tool. Move the cursor to the left or right to add a level line of the required length. Click to place the level line. Note: Levels can only be placed horizontally.
Procedure: Modifying Levels The following steps describe how to modify levels. 1. To change the name of a level line: ■ Select the level line. Note: When you select an element, any text displayed in blue is editable. ■ ■
Click the level name displayed in the rectangle above the level line. Enter a new name for the level.
Lesson: Adding and Modifying Levels
■
131
2.
Select or clear the check boxes at the ends of the selected level line to display or hide the legend for the level line.
3.
To change the height of the selected level line: ■ Click the level height displayed in the rectangle below the level line. ■ Enter a new height for the level. Note: If you alter the elevation of a level, all elements associated with or constrained to that level are automatically adjusted. Click the 3D control to change the control from model extents to view-specific extents.
4.
The display changes to 2D and the open circle changes to a filled circle. Note: The annotation 3D indicates that if the end of the level line is moved in the current view, the change is reflected in all the other elevation or section views in which that level is displayed. Click the 2D control to change the control from view-specific extents to model extents. The display changes to 3D and the filled circle changes to an open circle. Note: The annotation 2D indicates that moving the end of the level line in the current view does not affect other views. Click the Add Elbow drag control symbol to offset the head from the level line.
5.
6.
The level head is offset and the Add Elbow drag control symbol changes to a filled circle.
132
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
7.
Drag the filled circle near the level head to reposition the head.
Guidelines for Adding and Modifying Levels The following recommended practices help you add and modify levels effectively. ■ Place frequently used levels in the project templates based on the types of construction. This helps when you are adding predefined levels in multistory projects. You can also place levels for defining footings, foundations, and standard heights of members in the project templates that ensure that low-rise projects develop quickly and efficiently. ■ Create and use non-story levels to define intermediate heights between floor levels, such as foundation steps and column splices. This allows you to define and flex components parametrically, which saves time and reduces the probability of errors. The non-story levels can be hidden in the section and elevation views using the Hide in View, Filter, and View Template tools. ■ Create a plan view at a given level to check structural conditions as necessary and delete the view when you do not need it. You can create a plan view from a non-story level at any time so that creating more levels than floors early in a project reduces the number of views in the Project Browser while providing a vertical structure. This helps you develop a comprehensive understanding of the structural model quickly and accurately. ■ Use the Array tool to quickly generate levels for a multistory building. This will save time in creating the model. It is important to first establish the desired level name for the level used to create the array. Revit assigns the new level names based on the established sequence. For example, if you select Level 4 to start the array, the new levels are named Level 5, Level 6, Level 7, and so on.
Lesson: Adding and Modifying Levels
■
133
Exercise: Add Levels In this exercise, you add levels to a project. You need to set up a new project with levels for floors and a roof.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise
4.
To place a new level in the project: ■ Zoom in to the view. ■ Click above the left end of the existing level, approximately 12' (3600 mm) above the level.
5.
Move the cursor to the right and click above the right end of the existing level, using the dashed extension line as a reference to align the new level with the existing one.
To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 4: Starting a New Project. Click Exercise: Add Levels. 1. 2.
3.
134
Open i_rst_essentials_levels.rvt or m_rst_essentials_levels.rvt. The file opens in the BASEMENT structural plan view. In the view window, double-click the triangular edge of the North Elevation symbol to open the North Elevation view.
Click Home tab > Datum panel > Level.
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
A plan view named LEVEL 2 appears in the Project Browser.
6.
Exit the Level tool by pressing ESC twice.
7.
Create two more levels by copying the initial level. To begin, in the view window, select LEVEL 2. Click Modify Levels tab > Modify panel > Copy. To place the copied level: ■ On the Options Bar, select the Constrain and Multiple check boxes. ■ Click anywhere on Level 2 in the view window to specify the copy start point. ■ Move the cursor up and click when the temporary dimension changes to 12' 0" (3600 mm) to place LEVEL 3.
8. 9.
10. Continue to move the cursor up and click again when the temporary dimension changes to 12' - 0" (3600 mm) to place LEVEL 4. Exit the Copy tool.
Notice that the copied levels are black because they do not have the corresponding plan views created. Note: The plan views can be created by selecting Structural Plan from the Plan Views drop-down on the Create panel of the View tab. 11. Zoom in to the level markers. Notice that the names of all the new levels start with LEVEL.
Lesson: Adding and Modifying Levels
■
135
12. To rename the first new level above BASEMENT: ■ To open the field for editing, double-click the name of the level. ■ Enter FIRST FLR. (including the end period). ■ Press ENTER.
13. In the Revit dialog box, click Yes to rename the corresponding views. The updated view name appears in the Project Browser. 14. Change the name of LEVEL 3 to SECOND FLR.SECOND FLR. ROOFROOF
136
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
15. To update the elevation of the ROOF level: ■ Place the cursor on the elevation field of the ROOF level. ■ Click the elevation to edit it. ■ Enter 36' (10800 mm). Press ENTER. The ROOF level adjusts position.
16. Enter ZE to zoom to extents. 17. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids This lesson describes how to create and modify grids. You begin the lesson by learning about grids and the methods of creating and modifying grid lines. Next, you learn about some recommended practices for creating and modifying grids. The lesson concludes with an exercise on creating and modifying grids. Grids are used to create the layout of the structural system with respect to the footprint of the building. You use grids to locate and coordinate the column and wall elements. You can constrain elements to grids so that the elements move and adjust to any changes made to the grid spacing and orientation.
Grid with concrete rectangular columns
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Describe grids. Identify the methods of creating and modifying grid lines. State the recommended practices for creating and modifying grids. Create and modify grids.
Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids
■
137
About Grids Grids form the basic framework in a structural model. Grid lines are displayed on structural plans specifically for locating columns, walls, and framing elements.
Definition of Grids Grids are finite vertical elements represented as lines in the plan, elevation, and section views. In a plan view, you can draw grids using straight lines or arcs. The grids that comprise straight lines are referred to as rectangular grids, and the grids that comprise arcs are referred to as circular grids. However, only straight-line grids can be added in the elevation and section views. Grids do not appear in 3D views. To be displayed in a view, a grid line must cross the plane of the view and be orthogonal to it. The following illustrations show examples of grids in a plan view and the corresponding section view.
In the plan view, both Grids 1 and 2 cross the cut plane of Section A.
138
■
In the Section A view, only Grid 1 is displayed because it is orthogonal to the cut plane of Section A.
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Example of Grids The following illustrations show examples of grids in a plan view. In a plan view, grids can be straight lines or arcs.
Rectangular grid
Circular grid
Methods of Creating and Modifying Grid Lines You create a grid line by sketching lines or picking lines from the model. After creating a grid line, you can modify it and propagate the modifications across different views.
Adding Grids Lines You add grid lines by activating the Grids tool on the Datum panel of the Home tab. You can place grids by manually sketching them using the Draw Line or Arc commands or by picking existing lines from a referenced CAD file. The following illustration shows the Draw panel with the Line and Pick Lines tools.
Revit automatically names a new grid in sequence with the last grid placed. However, to change the sequence, you can renumber grid lines while placing them. In addition, once a grid is added, you can select it and use the Editing tools to copy, rotate, mirror, or array to add more grids and modify them.
Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids
■
139
Grid Controls After placing a grid line, you can modify it using grid controls. You can view the grid controls by selecting the grid line. You can drag a grid line to increase or decrease its length. You can also turn on or off a grid bubble, add an elbow to a grid line, and renumber a grid line. The following illustration shows different grid controls.
Grid line controls for a 3D extent
Grid line controls for a 2D extent
Check box to turn on or off a grid head. A similar check box also appears at the other end of the grid. You use these check boxes to display the grid head at either or both ends of the grid line. Grid drag control is used to adjust the length of the grid line. The grid drag control can be an open circle or a closed dot. The open circle corresponds to 3D extents, where the length of the grid is for all plan views unless set to 2D extent. The closed dot corresponds to 2D extents, where the length of the grid is for the current view only. Elbow control is used to offset the grid head from the grid line when two adjacent grid heads overlap.
Propagate Datum Extents Dialog Box Grid modifications are view specific and affect only the current plan view. You can propagate these modifications to other plan views by selecting the plan view check boxes in the Propagate Datum Extents dialog box. You access this dialog box by selecting the Propagate Extents tool on the Datum panel of the Modify Grids tab.
Plan view check boxes in the Propagate Datum Extents dialog box
140
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Guidelines for Creating and Modifying Grids The following recommended practices for creating and modifying grids help you work with grids effectively. ■ If you work with similar construction projects regularly, you should place grids at default locations in the project template. You can always delete grid lines that are not required and modify grid spacing to suit project requirements. This helps you start projects quickly without spending time on individual setups. ■ After grids are set and are not likely to change, pin the location of the grids to prevent them from being moved accidentally. To pin the location of grids, select the grid line and use the Pin tool on the Modify panel of the Modify Grids tab. ■ After you add the grids, lock the dimensions between grids to fix the spacing between grid lines. This prevents the grids from being changed inadvertently when you are working in the model. ■ If your projects use graphical column schedules that are based on grid intersections, add intersecting grid lines at all column locations. This ensures that the columns appear in the graphical column schedule. ■ When working on a project, add all level elements before adding grid lines. This is because the grid lines placed in a plan view will extend vertically to the lowest and highest levels in elevation. If more levels are added after the grids are placed, the grids need to be stretched accordingly in the elevations. Therefore, adding level elements before grid lines saves time. ■ Control the extent of grids using a scope box. This enables you to extend multiple grids simultaneously and save time. ■ When an architect is also using Revit, you can link the architect’s model to yours and simply copy grids directly from the linked architectural model using the Copy/Monitor tool. You can then use automated coordination tools to monitor the location of the copied grid lines with those in the linked architectural model. These tools are also available for level, column, wall, and floor elements. These tools enable you to save considerable time when starting the structural model and facilitate coordination throughout the project.
For more information on Working with Linked Models, see the Revit Help.
Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids
■
141
Example The following illustration shows an example of pinning the location of grids to prevent them from being moved accidentally.
142
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Exercise: Create and Modify a Grid In this exercise, you create a grid and modify it by changing the properties of grid lines. You also add dimensions to the grids and extend them by modifying their length. You are creating a structural model that includes columns, and you need to add grid lines to identify the locations of the columns in your project. You create a grid using an imported CAD file and add additional grids and dimensions to the file. Then, you extend grids in a plan view and propagate the display settings to other plan views. You do the following: ■ Create a grid using an imported CAD file. ■ Add additional grids and dimensions. ■ Extend grids using a scope box. ■ Propagate grid display settings to other plan views.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 4: Starting a New Project. Click Exercise: Create and Modify a Grid.
Create a Grid Using an Imported CAD File 1.
Open i_rst_essentials_grids.rvt or m_rst_essentials_grids.rvt. The file opens in the BASEMENT structural plan view. Notice the imported CAD file that you can use as a template. Note: For more information regarding importing and linking CAD files, refer to the Interoperability section of the Revit Help menu.
Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids
■
143
2. 3. 4.
Click Home tab > Datum panel > Grid. To add grid lines, click Place Grid tab > Draw panel > Pick Lines. To add the first vertical grid line, in the view window: ■ Click grid line A in the CAD import object. ■ Clear the check box at the bottom of the grid line to hide the grid line bubble at the bottom. ■ Select the check box at the top of the grid line to display the grid line bubble at the top.
8.
To draw the second vertical grid line: ■ Click the center point of the column to specify the start point of the grid line. ■ Move the cursor up until it snaps into alignment with grid line A.
Click to specify the end point of the grid line aligning it with the end point of grid line A. Rename the new vertical grid line A.5. Add another grid line on the CAD import grid B using the Pick Lines tool. To align grid heads with grid line A.5: ■ Hide the grid line bubble at the bottom of the grid line. ■ Show the bubble at the top of the grid line. A new vertical grid line A.6 is added. Rename the new vertical grid line B. Add grid line C in the view window using the Pick Lines tool. Align grid heads as shown. ■
9. 10. 5.
To change the name of the new vertical grid line: ■ Click the bubble at the top of the grid line. ■ For grid name, enter A.
11.
12. 13. 14.
Press ENTER. Notice that the grid bubble in the CAD file is partially visible through the bubble of the new grid line A. This is because the grid bubble size in Revit is different. Zoom in to the column located to the right of the door to the Boiler Room. Click Place Grid tab > Draw panel > Line. ■
6. 7.
144
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
15. To complete duplicating the grid: ■ Click horizontal grid line 1. Notice that the name automatically changes to D. ■ Rename the grid line as 1. ■ Click the horizontal grid lines 2 and 3 in the CAD file to add grid lines 2 and 3. These grid lines are automatically numbered.
21. In the view window: ■ Zoom in to grid line 1. ■ Select the text layer inside the grid bubble 1.
22. Click Hide in View to hide the layer that holds the grid numbers in the CAD file. 23. Exit the Query tool.
Add Additional Grids and Dimensions 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 16. Exit the Grid tool. 17. In the view window, move the cursor over the CAD file and select it when the tooltip displays Walls_arch.dwg : Import Symbol : Location . 18. To begin hiding the layers in the CAD file, click Modify Walls_arch.dwg tab > Import Instance panel > Query. 19. In the view window: ■ Zoom in to grid line B. ■ Select the bubble inside grid bubble B.
6.
Click Annotate tab > Dimension panel > Aligned. To add dimensions from grid lines A to C, in the view window: ■ Click grid lines A, A.5, B, and C in sequence. ■ Click outside grid line C to place the dimension string. To fix the two grid lines B and C at the specified spacing, click the padlock below the dimension connecting the two grid lines. Exit the Aligned dimension tool. In the view window: ■ Zoom to fit the view. ■ Zoom out (2x). ■ Pan to the right so that the grid lines move to the left of the view window. To extend the horizontal grid lines 1, 2, and 3, in the view window: ■ Select grid line 1. A dotted reference line and a padlock are displayed, indicating that the heads of grid lines 1, 2, and 3 are locked in alignment. ■ Drag the grid drag control at the end of grid line 1 to the right, approximately four times the dimension between grids B and C. Notice that grid lines 2 and 3 also move with grid line 1. ■ Press ESC.
20. In the Import Instance Query dialog box, click Hide in View to hide the layer of the CAD grid bubble.
Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids
■
145
7. 8. 9. 10.
11. 12. 13. 14.
15. 16. 17. 18.
Activate the Grid tool. Activate the Pick Lines tool. On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100' (30500 mm). To place a vertical grid line, in the view window: ■ Place the cursor over grid line C, moving from the right side. Notice that a dotted line is displayed on the right of grid line C, near grid line 1 bubble indicating the side on which the offset occurs. ■ Click grid line C to place the new grid line. ■ Align the grid heads. Rename the new grid line as G. Activate the Line tool. On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 0. In the view window, draw three new vertical grid lines from bottom to top between grid lines C and G. When you draw grid lines from bottom to top, the bubbles are placed at the top and the heads are aligned with grid line B. Note: The spacing between the grids may vary. Exit the Line tool. Rename the new grid lines as D, E, and F from left to right. Activate the Aligned dimension tool. To add dimensions from grid lines C to G, in the view window: ■ Click grid lines C, D, E, F, and G. Add the dimension at the same height as the dimension string between grid lines A and C. The new dimension snaps into alignment with the existing string. ■ Click outside grid line G to place the dimension string. ■ Click the EQ symbol.
20. To add another horizontal grid line below grid line 3, in the view window: ■ Place the cursor below grid intersection C3. ■ Using the temporary dimension with the extension line from the end of grid line 3, click to specify the start point 18' (5400 mm) below grid line 3.
21. Move the cursor horizontally and click at the point where the extension line extending from grid 3 head appears.
22. Rename the new horizontal grid line as 4. 23. Exit the Grid tool.
Notice that the grid lines are automatically equally spaced. 19. Activate the Grid tool.
146
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Extend Grids Using a Scope Box 1. 2.
3.
4.
Click View tab > Create panel > Scope Box. On the Options Bar, for Height, enter 50' 0" (15240 mm). This extends the scope box from the BASEMENT level up to 50' 0" (15240 mm) above the BASEMENT level. To insert the first vertex of the scope box, click to the left of grid line A and above grid line 1.
To insert the other vertex of the scope box, click to the right of grid line G and below grid line 4.
Note: The scope box is three-dimensional and controls the extent of grids in the plan and elevation views. 6. Close the Elevation 1 - a view. 7. To begin extending the grid lines to the extents of the scope box, in the view window, select grid line A. 8. Right-click grid line A. Click Select All Instances. 9. To assign grid lines to the extents of the scope box, click Modify Grids tab > Element panel > Element Properties drop-down > Instance Properties. 10. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Extents, for Scope Box, select Scope Box 1 from the Value list. ■ Click OK. 11. Exit the selection set. Note: Instead of using the scope box, you can also stretch the grid lines manually using the drag controls. When you drag grid lines manually, locked grid lines extend together.
Propagate Grid Display Settings to Other Plan Views 1. 2. 3. 5.
Open all the plan views. To tile the views, enter WT. Zoom all views to fit in their tiled windows.
Open the Elevation 1 - a view to ensure that the scope box extends above the roof level.
4. 5. 6.
Notice that the grids in the FIRST FLR., SECOND FLR., and ROOF plan views do not match the BASEMENT plan view. To begin propagating the extents to other plan views, activate the BASEMENT plan view. Select all the grids. Click Modify Grids tab > Datum panel > Propagate Extents.
Lesson: Creating and Modifying Grids
■
147
7.
In the Propagate Datum Extents dialog box: ■ Select the Structural Plan: FIRST FLR., Structural Plan: ROOF, and Structural Plan: SECOND FLR. check boxes. ■ Click OK. Notice that the grid display settings in all the views are the same.
8.
Close the file without saving changes.
148
■
Chapter 4: Starting a New Project
Chapter
5 Creating Structural Columns and Walls Structural columns, walls, and their associated foundations and pilasters are an integral part of the primary structural framing system for buildings. Common structural column families come preloaded in the default project template. In this chapter, you learn how to work with structural columns, create structural walls and new wall types in a plan view, and add foundations, pilasters, and an elevator pit.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■
Work with structural columns. Work with structural walls.
Chapter Overview
■
149
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns This lesson describes how to work with structural columns. You begin the lesson by learning about structural columns. Next, you learn the steps to load and create different types of structural columns. You also learn about the tools and options for placing structural columns. In addition, you learn how to create openings in structural columns and some recommended practices for working with structural columns. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding and modifying structural columns. Structural columns are an integral part of the structural framing system for buildings. They transfer loads from the floor and roof framing down to the foundations. The sizes, locations, and orientations of columns directly impact the use of the building floor space. Grids are used to locate and coordinate column locations.
Concrete rectangular structural columns placed at grid intersections
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
150
Describe structural columns. Load structural columns. Create structural column types. Identify the tools and options for placing structural columns. Create openings in structural columns. State the recommended practices for working with structural columns. Add and modify structural columns.
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
About Structural Columns Before adding structural columns in a plan, you typically create a grid. Then, you add columns relative to grid lines and grid intersections. Structural columns are anchored on the grid intersections at which they are added. As a result, the columns move with the grid intersections when the spacing between grid lines is modified.
Definition of Structural Columns Structural columns are load-bearing elements that have type and instance parameters. Parameters, such as width and depth, are the same for all structural columns of a particular type and are classified as type parameters. Parameters that are different for structural columns of the same type are classified as instance parameters. Some examples of instance parameters are Base Level, Top Level, Phase Created, and Top Vertical Projection.
Structural Column Families Revit out-of-the-box content libraries include several structural column families organized by material such as concrete, precast concrete, steel, light gauge steel, and wood. These families can have associated type catalogs depending on whether the sections are standardized. The concrete families are not designed based on a standard list of sizes and do not offer type catalogs. You can use the predefined parameters provided by the family to create custom sizes or types. A type catalog includes all the standardized sizes or types, such as ASIC steel shapes, light gauge steel shapes, and dimension lumber sizes, predefined by the family file. When you load a column type from a type catalog, you select from a list of standard sizes. Revit out-of-the-box templates have preloaded column families and types. However, additional families and types can be added to the project by loading them from Revit content libraries. The following table describes the predefined structural column families for each material: Material
Description
Steel
Predefined steel column families are available, such as Double C-ChannelColumn, HSS-Hollow Structural Section-Column, HSS-Round Hollow Structural Section-Column, WWF-Welded Wide Flange-Column, and WWide Flange-Column. You select a standard steel size from a type catalog to load it into the project.
Light Gauge Steel
Predefined light gauge steel column families are available, such as Light Gauge-Angles-Column, Light Gauge-Channel Studs-Column, Light GaugeRunner Channels-Column, Light Gauge-Studs-Column, and Light GaugeZees-Column. You select a standard light gauge steel size from a type catalog to load it into the project.
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns
■
151
Material
Description
Concrete
Predefined concrete column families are available, such as ConcreteRectangular-Column, Concrete-Round-Column, and Concrete-SquareColumn. A type catalog is not available for concrete columns. After loading the family into the project, you can create additional types by duplicating existing types and modifying the predefined parameters.
Precast Concrete
Predefined precast concrete column families are available, such as PrecastRectangular Column, Precast-Rectangular Column with Corbels, and Precast-Square Column. A type catalog is not available for precast concrete columns. After loading the family into the project, you can create additional types by duplicating existing types and modifying the predefined parameters.
Wood
Predefined wood column families are available, such as Dimension Lumber-Column, Glulam-Southern Pine-Column, and Timber-Column. You select a standard wood size from a type catalog to load it into the project.
Structural Columns vs. Architectural Columns There are two types of columns, structural and architectural. The structural and architectural columns are two distinct categories of families and are listed under separate folders in the content library. Structural columns have analytical properties and representations. Architectural columns do not have any analytical properties and representations. You cannot change an architectural column to a structural column using the Type Selector drop-down.
Examples of Structural Columns The following illustrations show different types of structural columns from the library.
Steel column
152
■
Concrete column
Wood column
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Loading Structural Columns By default, only a few column sizes are loaded into a project. For additional column sizes, you can load structural columns from the structural column libraries to the project template so that the structural columns that you use most often are available in project files.
Procedure: Loading Structural Columns The following steps describe how to load structural columns. 1. 2. 3.
Click Insert tab > Load from Library panel > Load Family. In the Load Family dialog box, browse to Structural > Columns > Steel or Concrete. In the Load Family dialog box, select the required structural column family.
4.
In the Specify Types dialog box, select the required structural column types if you are loading steel columns.
Creating Structural Column Types You can create new structural column types by duplicating an existing column type and specifying the dimensions and other parameters, such as Identity Data.
Procedure: Creating Structural Column Types The following steps describe how to create new structural column types. 1. 2.
Click Home tab > Structure panel > Column drop-down > Structural Column. Click Place Structural Column tab > Element panel > Element Properties drop-down > Type Properties.
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns
■
153
3. 4. 5.
In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. In the Name dialog box, enter a name for the new structural column type. In the Type Properties dialog box, specify the dimensions and other type parameters for the new structural column type.
Structural Column Tools and Options Structural columns can be placed as vertical elements or slanted elements. Vertical structural columns can be placed only in the plan or 3D views. Slanted structural columns can be placed only in the elevation, section, or 3D views.
Vertical Column Tool When you activate the Structural Column tool in a plan view, the Slanted Column tool on the Placement panel is inactive. The following illustration shows the options available when the Structural Column tool is active in a plan view.
Slanted Column Tool When you activate the Structural Column tool in a section or elevation view, the Vertical Column tool is inactive. The following illustration shows the options available when the Structural Column tool is active in an elevation view.
154
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Column Options Bar The following illustration shows the options available by default on the Options Bar to place an individual instance of a structural column.
Option Tag
Description Adds a tag to the element being placed.
Rotate After Placement Height/Depth
Rotates columns after they are added.
Constraint
Attaches the top or bottom of a column to a level. You can select Unconnected from the list to specify a length.
Creates columns going up or down from the current level.
Placing Multiple Columns You can place multiple structural columns using the On Grids and At Columns tools on the Multiple panel of the Place Structural Column contextual tab. The following illustration shows the On Grids and At Columns tools on the Multiple panel.
The At Columns tool allows you to place structural columns inside selected architectural columns. The On Grids tool allows you to place structural columns at the intersection of selected grid lines. The On Grids tool automatically associates the columns with the grid intersections, and the columns move with the grid lines.
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns
■
155
Column Style You use the Instance Properties dialog box to change the style and parameters of the columns that you place in a structural model. The following illustration shows a typical Vertical column constrained to grid line 4.2. This column will stretch if the grid line moves or the levels change in elevation.
The following illustration shows a Slanted - End Point Driven column with the top associated with grid line 4 and the bottom associated with grid line 4.2. This column will stretch if the grid lines move or the levels change in elevation.
156
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
The following illustration shows a Slanted - End Point Driven column with Top Offset set to 3' 0" to demonstrate that the top of the column is associated and constrained to grid line 4. This column will stretch if the grid lines move or the levels change in elevation, and the angle of the column will adjust accordingly. However, the 3' 0" offset will remain constant.
The following illustration shows a Slanted - Angle Driven column with Top Offset set to 3' 0" to demonstrate that the top of the column is not associated and constrained to grid line 4. This column will stretch if grid line 4.2 moves or the levels change in the elevation. However, the column will not stretch if grid line 4 moves. The column angle and the 3' 0" offset will remain constant.
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns
■
157
Creating Openings in Structural Columns Sometimes, it is necessary to cut an opening through columns and other structural elements to enable elements from other building trades to pass through these structural elements. You can create openings through structural columns in a building model using By Face on the Opening panel of the Modify tab.
Structural column with column web opening
Procedure: Creating Openings in Structural Columns The following steps describe how to create openings in structural columns. 1. 2.
Click Modify tab > Opening panel > By Face. In the view window, move the cursor on the face of the column to which you want to add the opening, and then click to select the column face. Click Create Opening Boundary tab > Draw panel > Line and sketch the boundaries of the opening in the structural column. Click Create Opening Boundary tab > Opening by Face panel > Finish Opening.
3. 4.
158
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Guidelines for Working with Structural Columns The following recommended practices help you work with structural columns effectively. ■ Check the properties of the view and the placement options on the Options Bar when you place structural columns. This helps you work accurately and quickly. ■ Pin columns in position to prevent inadvertent movement of the columns. To pin columns, use the Pin tool on the Modify panel of the Modify Structural Column contextual tab. If a pinned column is not located on a grid, you cannot move the column until the column is unpinned. If the pinned column is located on a grid, the column moves with the movement of the grid but does not move away from it until unpinned. You can also pin grid lines, if required. ■ Add structural columns using the On Grids placement tool instead of adding them individually. You can add columns at all grid intersections and then delete the ones you do not need. Columns placed at grid intersections are automatically associated with the intersecting grid lines and move with them. Therefore, you do not need to pin the columns to the grid intersections individually. ■ Place a dimension between the centerline of the columns and the grid lines and lock the dimensions using the padlock to manually constrain columns off the grid lines to the nearest grid line. You can also delete the dimensions. When you delete a dimension, a warning is displayed stating that the constraints can be maintained even if the dimension is deleted. This eliminates the need to create grid lines for every column.
Example of Pinning a Column The following illustration shows a structural column pinned to a grid intersection for preventing inadvertent movement of the column.
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns
■
159
Exercise: Add and Modify Structural Columns In this exercise, you add structural columns to a grid and modify them by adjusting their constraint parameters. You have started working on a structural project and have placed grid lines in the design. You need to add structural columns to the grid in the structural model and adjust constraint parameters of the columns. You do the following: ■ Add structural columns. ■ Modify structural columns.
The completed exercise
160
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls. Click Exercise: Add and Modify Structural Columns.
7. 8.
Exit the Structural Column tool. In the view window, select the column at the grid intersection C4.
9.
Press SPACEBAR to rotate the column by 90 degrees. Notice that the column web becomes horizontal.
Add Structural Columns 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
Open i_rst_essentials_columns.rvt or m_rst_essentials_columns.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. In the view window, zoom in to the grid line C. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Column drop-down > Structural Column. Select W-Wide Flange-Column : W10x49 (M_W-Wide Flange-Column : W250X73) from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height from the Height/Depth list. ■ Select ROOF from the Constraint list. Select the grid intersections C1, C2, C3, and C4 to add columns at these intersections.
Note: You can also select multiple columns and rotate them together by pressing SPACEBAR. 10. Enter ZE to zoom to extents.
Note: Be sure the intersecting grid lines are highlighted as shown. This makes the column snap to the intersecting grid lines. The column will then move with the grid lines.
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns
■
161
11. In the view window, CTRL+select all the columns on the grid line C. Note: You can also draw a selection box from left to right across the grid line C to select all the columns on the grid line.
15. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the columns on the grid line G by 90 degrees. 16. Activate the Structural Column tool. 17. Select W-Wide Flange-Column : W10x33 (M_W-Wide Flange-Column : W250X49) from the Type Selector drop-down. 18. On the Options Bar: ■ Select the Rotate After Placement check box to rotate the columns as they are added. ■ Verify that the Height and ROOF parameters are selected. To add and rotate the columns: 19. ■ Click the grid intersection D1 to add a column. Notice the rotation control that prompts you to graphically set the rotation angle. ■ Drag the rotation angle line clockwise to 90 degrees to make the column web horizontal on the grid intersection D1.
12. Click Modify Structural Columns tab > Modify panel > Copy. 13. On the Options Bar, verify that the Multiple check box is clear. 14. In the view window: ■ Click grid line C. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right and click grid line G to place the columns.
Click to place the column. 20. On the Options Bar, clear the Rotate After Placement check box. ■
Notice that the newly added columns on the grid line G appear highlighted.
162
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
21. In the view window: ■ Place the cursor at the grid intersection E1 so that the grid lines are highlighted. ■ Press SPACEBAR and notice that the column orientation rotates by 45 degrees. ■ Continue rotating until the column web is horizontal.
25. To add columns to multiple grid intersections: ■ CTRL+select the grid lines D, E, F, 2, and 3. Notice that columns are displayed at the grid intersections.
Press SPACEBAR. Notice that all the columns rotate by 90 degrees. 26. Click Finish Selection. The columns are added at the selected grid intersections. 27. Enter ZE to zoom to extents. 28. Exit the Structural Column tool. ■
22. Click to place the column. 23. Continue adding structural columns at grid intersections F1, D4, E4, and F4 and make the column webs horizontal on these grid intersections. 24. Click Place Structural Column tab > Multiple panel > On Grids.
Modify Structural Columns 1. 2. 3.
4.
In the view window, CTRL+select all the columns. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ For Base Level, select BASEMENT from the list. ■ For Base Offset, enter -1' 6" (-450 mm). ■ Verify that Top Level is set to ROOF. ■ For Top Offset, enter -6" (-150 mm). Click OK to close the Instance Properties dialog box.
Lesson: Working with Structural Columns
■
163
5.
To modify the grid dimension: ■ Select the grid line D. Notice the grid dimension displayed between the grid lines C and D. ■ Click the grid dimension and enter 30' (9150 mm).
Press ENTER. Notice that the grid spacing between the grid lines from C to G changes to 30' (9150 mm). The columns move with the grid lines. Open the default 3D view. Close the file without saving changes. ■
6. 7.
164
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls This lesson describes how to work with structural walls. You begin the lesson by learning about structural walls, structural wall parameters, and pilasters. Next, you learn the steps to create wall openings and some recommended practices for working with structural walls. The lesson concludes with exercises on creating structural wall types and structural walls with openings, and creating and modifying pilasters. Structural walls are an integral part of the structural model. They transfer gravity and lateral loads to foundations.
Structural wall with openings and a pilaster
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Describe structural walls. Identify the type parameters of structural walls. Identify the instance parameters of structural walls. Describe pilasters. Create wall openings. State the recommended practices for working with structural walls. Create structural wall types. Create structural walls with openings. Create and modify pilasters.
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
165
About Structural Walls Building projects contain different types of walls, such as basement walls, partition stud walls, exterior walls, and interior walls. Many of the basic structural wall types common to building projects are included in the out-of-the-box templates, which can be used as a starting point for creating additional wall types for your projects. Walls belong to the Basic, Curtain, or Stacked wall families. The Basic wall family is typically used in structural models. Curtain walls, consisting of curtain girds and mullions, are typically specified by the architect. Stacked walls can be used to model vertical steps in the wall, such as a brick ledge or a slab bearing shelf.
Wall types belonging to different families
For more information on Curtain Walls and Stacked Walls, refer to Revit Help.
166
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Definition of Structural Walls Structural walls resist gravity and lateral forces and are designed and scheduled accordingly. During the design phase, you can add generic structural walls to the model. These walls act as placeholders for the height and width of actual walls, which are specified as the design progresses. You create a structural wall by sketching the location line of the wall in a plan or a 3D view. To do this, you need to first activate the Structural Wall tool available in the Wall drop-down on the Structure panel of the Home tab. Then, you can add walls by drawing them, selecting lines in a CAD file, or selecting faces of mass objects.
Wall Layers Walls contain layers that correspond to the structure of wall systems. All layers within the wall element have a definite purpose. For example, in a metal stud over CMU wall type, the concrete masonry unit layer provides structural support, the air and insulation layers act as thermal barriers, and metal studs hold a gypsum wallboard finish. Each wall layer has specific function, material, and thickness parameters, which you can modify based on your requirements. Revit automatically detects the characteristics of each layer and matches each characteristic to the appropriate function. The following illustration shows the different wall layers in a structural wall.
Gypsum wallboard finish Metal stud Air or insulation Concrete masonry unit
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
167
Example of Structural Walls The following illustration shows different types of structural walls in a section view.
Exterior - 8" Concrete Generic - 8" Masonry Exterior - Brick on Metal Stud Exterior - Brick on CMU
Structural Wall Type Parameters In a project, type parameters are common to all the structural walls of a family type. If you modify a family type, the change is reflected throughout the project in all the instances of that family type. For example, if you increase the thickness of a layer for a specific structural wall type, all the walls in the project that are of the same wall type are automatically modified. Some of the type parameters that you can change affect the following: ■ The structure of the wall, including its layers and materials. ■ The behavior of the wall at inserts and ends, such as doors, windows and openings, and at physical ends of the wall. ■ The way the wall is displayed in the structural model. ■ The wall function that is used to schedule walls in the structural model. You change the type parameters of a structural wall using the Edit Assembly dialog box, which can be accessed by selecting Edit for the Structure parameter in the Type Properties dialog box.
168
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Edit Assembly Dialog Box You use the Edit Assembly dialog box to modify the wall type by adding or removing the layers that define the construction of the wall. In this dialog box, the layers are organized from exterior to interior, with the exterior layers appearing at the top of the list. Each layer that is listed in the dialog box is assigned a function, material, and thickness. Structural walls contain only layers within the core boundary layers. The following illustration displays a typical structural wall assembly.
You can add or remove layers from a wall assembly and create wall types by duplicating an existing type and modifying its structure.
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
169
The following illustration shows a wall assembly with the interior and exterior finishes in the Edit Assembly dialog box. In the wall assembly, layers 1 and 8 correspond to the exterior and interior finish face, respectively. Layer 5 represents the structural portion of the wall contained within the core boundary layers.
You can display a preview of the wall structure by clicking Preview at the bottom of the Edit Assembly dialog box.
Structural Wall Instance Parameters Instance parameters are specific to a structural wall. When you change an instance parameter, only the properties of the selected walls are altered. Some of the instance parameters that you can change are: ■ Location Line ■ Base and Top Constraints ■ Structural Usage You can change the instance parameters for a structural wall using the Instance Properties dialog box and the Options Bar.
170
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Instance Properties Dialog Box You can modify the location line, base and top constraints, and structural usage parameters using the Instance Properties dialog box.
Location Line A location line represents a vertical plane in the wall. This parameter is independent of the wall type and does not change if the wall type is changed. You can specify the location line of a wall using any of the following options: ■ Wall Centerline ■ Core Centerline ■ Finish Face: Exterior ■ Finish Face: Interior ■ Core Face: Exterior ■ Core Face: Interior
Base and Top Constraints The Base Constraint and Top Constraint parameters are used to define the wall vertically in the model. When you specify the base and top constraint of a wall, you connect the wall to specified levels.
Wall parameters of a wall constrained between the basement and the second floor
After you specify the base constraint of a wall, you may also specify a value for base offset. This sets the bottom of the wall elevation below the floor by a certain distance to reach the foundation.
Structural Usage Parameters The Structural Usage parameters determine the function of a structural wall in a model. These parameters set apart structural walls from nonstructural or partition walls. The Structural Usage parameters are categorized as nonbearing, bearing, shear, and structural combined. The value of the Structural Usage parameter controls whether the wall is placed as a structural or a partition wall. By default, structural walls are assigned as bearing and partition walls are assigned as
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
171
nonbearing. Nonbearing walls do not appear in structural views. You can change the Structural Usage parameter any time.
For more information on the Structural Usage parameter, refer to Revit Help.
Wall Options Bar When you select the Structural Wall tool, the Options Bar displays wall placement options. The following illustrations show the various options available on the Options Bar.
Option Height or Depth
Chain
Description Sets height or depth to create structural walls going up (Height) or down (Depth) from the current level. Attaches the top or bottom of a structural wall to a level. Select Unconnected to specify the height of the wall. Sets the wall alignment constraint to center, core, or face of the wall. You can change the location line after the wall is placed. Creates structural walls in succession.
Offset
Offsets walls from pick points or the sketch line.
Radius
Creates circular walls or filleted corners based on the value specified.
Constraint Location Line
About Wall Pilasters Pilasters are cast integral with a wall and are used to support columns bearing on the wall from above. Pilasters can act as buttresses for additional lateral support of retaining walls.
Definition of Pilasters Pilasters are columns that are integral with a wall. You add pilasters to structural walls as structural columns, which integrate with walls when their materials are the same. You can model pilasters using the Structural Columns or short Structural Wall segments. You can also use intersecting structural walls to add wall pilasters. The height and depth parameters of pilasters can be set independent of the height and depth of the wall to which they are attached.
172
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Use the Structural Column tool and not the Architectural Column tool from the Column drop-down to create pilasters because architectural columns do not contain analytical model components or properties.
Example of Pilasters The following illustration shows the difference between pilasters created by adding a concrete wall and column.
24"-wide concrete wall added to create pilaster 24" concrete column added to create pilaster
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
173
Creating Wall Openings Walls often include openings for doorways, windows, and mechanical penetrations. You can create rectangular openings using the Door and Window tools on the Architect panel of the Architect & Site tab. The door and window elements are hosted by the wall and require the wall to exist in the model. If the wall is deleted, so are the door and window elements. You can also create openings of various shapes by editing the profile of the wall.
Openings created using the Door and Window tools
Openings created by editing the profile of the wall
Procedure: Creating Wall Openings The following steps describe how to create wall openings by editing the profile of a wall. 1. 2. 3.
Select a structural wall. Click Modify Walls tab > Modify Wall panel > Edit Profile. In the Go To View dialog box: ■ Select the required view. ■ Click Open View. Use the tools on the Draw panel of the Place Structural Wall tab to sketch the openings in the wall.
4.
174
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
5.
6.
Use the tools on the Edit panel of the Modify tab to create a continuous closed loop with gaps or overlap.
Note: The wall profile must be a continuous closed loop without any overlapping or gaps between the lines. Any continuous closed loop within the overall closed loop will create an opening in the wall. Click Modify Walls > Edit Profile tab > Wall panel > Finish Wall.
Guidelines for Working with Structural Walls The following recommended practices help you work with structural walls effectively. ■ To modify the type parameters for a set of structural walls, create a new structural wall family type from an existing type, change the required type parameters, and then apply the new type to the structural walls that need to be changed. This prevents you from unintentionally modifying other structural walls of the original family type. ■ When setting the location line of a wall, place the location line at the appropriate location (centerline or face) that you want in the structural model. Walls have interior and exterior orientation, and the direction you move the cursor determines the direction in which the wall faces. This allows you to change the wall thickness or orientation and maintain its correct location in the plan. ■ Model structural walls to their intended height both in the plan and elevation views instead of modeling individual segments of walls from floor to floor. You can always split walls or use a stacked wall type if the wall changes thickness as it increases in height. This approach allows you to keep the structural model simple and provides more accurate placement. ■ When adding pilasters, use structural columns or intersecting structural walls for the pilaster so that an analytical model line or surface is created for the pilaster elements. You should also verify which of these pilaster elements will be recognized by your analysis and design software to save time and reduce cost during the analysis phase. ■ When creating wall openings, use the door and window elements for standard openings. You can then make changes to the opening size by modifying the properties of existing types or duplicating and creating a new type. This saves time because once the standard opening types are created they can be copied or placed throughout the model. For non-standard and unique openings, edit the profile of the wall. ■ To model special conditions at wall intersections that should not join, such as a concrete cold joint where the walls are not cast in the same pour, you should disallow joins at the ends of walls by using the Disallow Join option. This allows you to build the structural model accurately and reduce the time spent on drafting.
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
175
Example The following illustration shows the intersection of concrete walls in a plan view with monolithic wall construction and cold joint construction. Using a cold joint construction allows you to build the structural model accurately and reduce the time spent on drafting.
Monolithic wall construction where wall Cold joint construction where the right end of the ends are allowed to join (default setting) horizontal walls is set to Disallow Join
176
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Exercise: Create Structural Wall Types In this exercise, you create a new structural wall type by modifying an existing structural wall type. You are in the early stages of an engineering design project. The design file assigned to you for this project does not contain wall types that the designer has specified. Therefore, you edit an existing exterior wall type to create a new exterior wall type. You also create a new interior masonry wall type by duplicating the existing concrete wall type. You do the following: ■ Modify an existing structural wall type. ■ Create a new structural wall type.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls. Click Exercise: Create Structural Wall Types.
1. 2. 3.
Open i_rst_essentials_wall_concepts.rvt or m_rst_essentials_wall_concepts.rvt. The file opens in the BASEMENT structural plan view. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Wall dropdown > Structural Wall. Select Basic Wall : Exterior - 10" Concrete (Basic Wall : Exterior - 250mm Concrete) from the Type Selector drop-down.
Modify an Existing Structural Wall Type
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
177
14. In the Fill Patterns dialog box: ■ Select Concrete. ■ Click OK. 15. Click OK to close all open dialog boxes. Notice that the Structural Wall tool is still active and the Basic Wall : Exterior - 12" Concrete (Basic Wall : Exterior - 300mm Concrete) wall is selected in the Type Selector drop-down. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
Open the Instance Properties dialog box. To modify the existing wall type, in the Instance Properties dialog box, click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog box, click Rename. In the Rename dialog box: ■ For New, enter Exterior - 12" Concrete (Exterior - 300mm Concrete). ■ Click OK. In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. In the Edit Assembly dialog box, for Thickness of Structure [1], enter 12" (300 mm).
Create a New Structural Wall Type 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 10. In the Edit Assembly dialog box: ■ For Structure [1], click in the Material field. ■ Click […]. 8. 9. 10.
11. In the Materials dialog box: ■ Under Materials, select Concrete. Notice the cut pattern, surface pattern, and shading color that are assigned to the material in the Graphics tab. ■ Click OK. 12. In the Edit Assembly dialog box, click OK. 13. In the Type Properties dialog box, under Graphics: ■ Click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern field. ■ Click […].
178
■
11. 12.
13.
To begin creating a structural wall type, open the Instance Properties dialog box. Open the Type Properties dialog box. To copy an existing wall type, in the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. In the Name dialog box: ■ For Name, enter Interior - 8" CMU (Interior 190mm CMU). ■ Click OK. Open the Edit Assembly dialog box for modifying the structural wall. In the Edit Assembly dialog box, for Structure [1]: ■ For Thickness, enter 7 5/8" (190 mm). ■ Open the Materials dialog box. In the Materials dialog box: ■ Under Materials, select Masonry - Concrete Masonry Units. ■ Click OK. In the Edit Assembly dialog box, click OK. Open the Fill Patterns dialog box for Coarse Scale Fill Pattern. In the Fill Patterns dialog box: ■ Click Diagonal Crosshatch. ■ Click OK. Click OK to close all open dialog boxes. In the Type Selector drop-down, notice the new entries for Basic Wall : Exterior - 12" Concrete (Basic Wall : Exterior - 300mm Concrete) and Basic Wall : Interior - 8" CMU (Basic Wall : Interior - 190mm CMU). Close the file without saving changes.
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Exercise: Create Structural Walls with Openings In this exercise, you use a column grid to sketch new basement walls and add openings to the walls. You are working on a project that is in its early stages and you have a structural model with a column grid. As the next step of the design, you need to sketch basement walls in plan view and add openings in elevation and plan views. Then, you need to edit the wall profile to add an opening. You do the following: ■ Sketch basement walls in plan view. ■ Add a door opening in plan view. ■ Add window openings in elevation view. ■ Edit the wall profile to add an opening.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls. Click Exercise: Create Structural Walls with Openings.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open i_rst_essentials_structural_walls.rvt or m_rst_essentials_structural_walls.rvt. The file opens in the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. Activate the Structural Wall tool. Select Basic Wall : Exterior - 12" Concrete (Basic Wall : Exterior - 300mm Concrete) from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Draw panel, ensure that the Line tool is selected.
Sketch Basement Walls in Plan View
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
179
5.
6.
On the Options Bar: ■ Ensure that Depth is selected from the Height/Depth list. ■ Select BASEMENT from the Constraint list. ■ Select Core Face: Exterior from the Location Line list. ■ Verify that the Chain check box is selected. In the view window, click grid intersections A1, B1, B2, C2, C3, A3, and A1 in sequence to draw the walls.
12. In the view window, zoom in to the new wall between grid intersections B2 and C2. Notice that the wall does not line up with the wall line in the CAD file.
13. To align the new wall with the wall line in the CAD file, click Modify tab > Edit panel > Align. 14. On the Options Bar, verify that Wall Faces is selected from the Prefer list. 15. In the view window: ■ Click the upper gray wall line in the CAD file. 7. 8. 9.
Exit the wall placement tool. Open the BASEMENT structural plan view. In the view window, select all the walls that you created. Tip: To select all the walls, place the cursor over a wall and press TAB. When all the walls are highlighted, click the highlighted walls to select all the walls. Alternatively, CTRL+select all the walls. Click the upper edge of the new structural wall. The structural wall moves to align with the wall line in the CAD file. Notice that the wall location line constraints, faces, and centerline are highlighted as you move the cursor over the walls. 16. Exit the Align tool. ■
10. Open the Instance Properties dialog box for the selected walls. 11. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Constraints: ■ For Base Offset, enter -18" (-450 mm) to set the wall below the floor line. ■ Click OK.
180
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
17. Zoom out to view the entire floor plan.
Move the cursor to the right along grid line 2. ■ Enter 39' 0" (11900 mm) and press ENTER to place the wall. 23. Exit the Structural Wall tool. ■
Add a Door Opening in Plan View
18. Open the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. 19. Activate the Structural Wall tool. 20. Select Basic Wall : Generic - 8" Masonry (Basic Wall : Generic - 190mm Masonry) from the Type Selector drop-down. 21. On the Options Bar: ■ Ensure that Depth is selected from the Height/Depth list. ■ Ensure that BASEMENT is selected from the Constraint list. ■ Ensure that Core Face: Exterior is selected from the Location Line list. 22. To add a new masonry wall over the architectural wall sketch, in the view window: ■ Click the intersection of the concrete wall and the grid lines in the CAD file near grid intersection A2 as the wall start point.
1. 2.
Open the BASEMENT structural plan view. Zoom in to the masonry wall between grid intersections A2 and B2.
3.
Click Architect & Site tab > Architect panel > Door. Ensure that Door-Opening 36" x 84" (0915 x 2134mm) is selected in the Type Selector dropdown.
4.
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
181
5.
In the view window: 10. To place the window opening, in the view window: ■ Place the cursor over the masonry wall near the center of the doorway to the BOILER ■ Place the cursor above the FIRST FLR. ROOM. level and to the right of grid line B. Notice the blue horizontal extension line, which ■ Move the cursor to the left or right until the represents the default Sill Height as temporary dimension from the centerline of specified in the Type Properties dialog box. the foundation wall shows 13' 6" (4100 mm).
Click to place the door opening. Note: You can adjust the location of the door opening by selecting the door and modifying the temporary dimensions. Exit the Door tool. ■
6.
Add Window Openings in Elevation View 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
9.
182
Open the SOUTH WALL ELEVATION view. Zoom in to the wall between grid lines A and C. Click Architect & Site tab > Architect panel > Window. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box, click Edit Type. To duplicate an existing window type, in the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. In the Name dialog box: ■ For Name, enter 78" x 84" (1980 x 2140mm). ■ Click OK. In the Type Properties dialog box, under Dimensions: ■ For Width, enter 6' 6" (1980 mm). ■ For Height, enter 7' 0" (2140 mm). Notice the value of Sill Height. Click OK to close all open dialog boxes.
■
Click to the right of the intersection of grid line B and the FIRST FLR level. Exit the Window tool. To begin adjusting the position of the window opening, select the window opening. Open the Instance Properties dialog box for the selected window opening. To override the default Sill Height parameter, in the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Constraints, for Sill Height, enter 0' 0" (0 mm). ■ Click OK. To align the left edge of the window opening to grid line B, click Modify Windows tab > Modify panel > Move. ■
11. 12. 13. 14.
15.
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
16. In the view window: ■ Click the left edge of the window opening. ■ Click grid line B. The window opening moves to align with the grid line.
6.
7. 17. Press ESC to clear the selection.
Press ESC to exit the Modify Walls tool.
Notice that the window opening on the right displays symbolic lines representing the opening. These lines are built into the window family. The opening on the left created by editing the profile does not display symbolic lines. However, you can add detail lines to this view. To view the changes made to the project, open the default 3D view.
Edit the Wall Profile to Add an Opening 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
Select the wall between grid lines A and C. Click Modify Walls tab > Modify Wall panel > Edit Profile. Notice that the elements in the view are now inactive and fuchsia lines define the extent of the wall. Click Modify Walls > Edit Profile tab > Draw panel > Rectangle. To add an opening, in the view window: ■ Click the intersection of grid line A.5 and the FIRST FLR. level to add the first corner of the opening. ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. To specify the opposite corner of the opening, click at a point where the temporary dimension displays 6' 6" (1980mm) horizontally and 7' 0" (2140mm) vertically.
8.
Close the file without saving changes.
To exit the Edit Profile tool, click Modify Walls > Edit Profile tab > Wall panel > Finish Wall.
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
183
Exercise: Create and Modify Pilasters In this exercise, you create and modify pilasters in the walls. To do this, you use a column grid based on a CAD file, which is created by an architect. You are working on a project that is in its early stages and contains a model with a grid. You create and modify concrete and masonry pilasters in the basement plan view. You do the following: ■ Create and modify concrete pilasters. ■ Create and modify masonry pilasters.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls. Click Exercise: Create and Modify Pilasters.
1.
2. 3.
Open i_rst_essentials_structural_walls_pilasters.rvt or m_rst_essentials_structural_walls_pilasters.rvt. The file opens in the BASEMENT structural plan view. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Column drop-down > Structural Column. Select Concrete-Square-Column : 24 x 24 (M_Concrete-Square-Column : 600 x 600mm) from the Type Selector drop-down.
Create and Modify Concrete Pilasters
184
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
4.
5.
On the Options Bar: ■ Ensure that Height is selected from the Height/Depth list. ■ Ensure that FIRST FLR. is selected from the Constraint list. In the view window, click the grid intersections B2 and B3 to add columns that intersect with walls.
7.
In the Type Properties dialog box: ■ Under Dimensions, for b, enter 16" (400 mm).
Click OK. Click OK in the Instance Properties dialog box. Click the intersection of grid lines A.5 and 2 to add a 16" x 16" (400mm x 400mm) pilaster to the masonry wall. ■
8. 9.
6. 7. 8.
Exit the Structural Column tool. Zoom in to grid intersection B3. To begin changing the concrete column properties, select the concrete column. 9. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. 10. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Constraints, for Top Offset, enter 3' 0" (900 mm). ■ Click OK. 11. Enter ZE to zoom to extents.
10. 11. 12. 13.
14.
Creating and Modifying Masonry Pilasters 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Zoom in to the middle of the masonry wall at the intersection of grid lines A.5 and 2. To begin creating a 16" x 16" (400mm x 400mm) column type, activate the Structural Column tool. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. Open the Type Properties dialog box. Duplicate the family type. Rename the new family type as 16" x 16" (400mm x 400mm).
15. 16. 17.
Notice the pilaster has adopted the same cut pattern as the wall. Exit the Structural Column tool. Select the pilaster. To begin changing the property of the pilaster, open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Materials and Finishes, click in the value column for Column Material. ■ Click […]. In the Materials dialog box: ■ Under Materials, select Masonry - Concrete Masonry Units. ■ Click OK. This changes the material property only for this column instance. Click OK to close the Instance Properties dialog box. To begin aligning the lower face of the pilaster with the lower face of the masonry wall, activate the Align tool. In the view window, click the lower face of the masonry wall next to the pilaster and the lower face of the pilaster in succession.
Lesson: Working with Structural Walls
■
185
18. Click the blue padlock to anchor the pilaster to the wall. This is to ensure that if the anchored wall is relocated, the pilaster is relocated along with it.
19. Zoom to extents. 20. Close the file without saving changes.
186
■
Chapter 5: Creating Structural Columns and Walls
Chapter
6 Creating Frames Revit provides various tools and libraries that help you model and manipulate common structural components used for frames and floors systems. In this chapter, you learn how to add floor framing, steel moment frames, and braced frames to a structural model. You also learn to work with beams and beam systems, and concrete beams.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Add floor framing to a structural model by using beams. Work with beams and beam systems. Add and edit structural steel moment and braced frames. Work with concrete beams.
Chapter Overview
■
187
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing This lesson describes how to add floor framing to a structural model by using beams. You begin the lesson by learning about floor framing and beams. Next, you learn the properties of beams, the steps to add openings in beams, and some recommended practices for adding and modifying beams. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding floor framing to a structural model. The floor framing is an integral part of the structural framing system of a building. It consists of horizontal beams that transfer gravity loads to the vertical column and wall elements.
Floor plan with floor framing
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
188
Describe floor framing. Describe beams. Explain the properties of beams. Add openings in beams. State the recommended practices for adding and modifying beams. Add floor framing to a structural model.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
About Floor Framing Floor framing provides support to the floor slab and distributes loads to the columns and walls. You can use the structural framing libraries that ship with the software to load predefined floor support elements into a project. You can also create additional custom families, if required. The following illustration shows the floor framing elements highlighted in blue.
Definition of Floor Framing Floor framing is a system that has horizontal beam elements supported by vertical elements, such as walls and columns. Floor framing elements are typically made of steel, wood, and concrete. They are added after the columns and walls are placed in a model.
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing
■
189
Examples of Floor Framing The following illustrations show examples of floor framing systems.
Steel beams supporting a composite concrete slab on metal deck. The steel floor beams transfer loads from the composite slab to steel columns and masonry or concrete walls.
Cast-in-place concrete beams and pan joists supporting a concrete slab. The concrete beams and pan joists transfer loads from the concrete slab to the concrete columns. The concrete beams and pan joists are cast monolithically with the slab and columns.
Timber joists and beams supporting a Precast, prestress inverted T-beams and L-beams plywood floor. The joists and beams supporting double tee members. The beams transfer loads transfer loads from the plywood floor to from the double tees to the concrete columns. the timber columns.
190
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
About Beams Beams are elements that form the primary support structure for a floor. When you add beams to a plan view of a structural model, they are annotated with a tag that moves with the beam by default.
Definition of Beams Beams are framing elements that can be attached to vertical structural elements, such as columns and structural walls, in a structural model. You add beams after the columns and structural walls have been modeled.
Structural Usage Beams are assigned a Structural Usage property based on their function in a structural model. By default, Revit Structure assigns the Structural Usage property to a beam automatically, based on the structural elements that support the beam. However, after a beam is placed in a model, the structural usages can be changed using the instance properties of the beam element. The following table describes the structural usages that Revit automatically assigns to beams. Structural Usage
Description
Girder
A beam element spanning between column elements
Joist
A beam element spanning between girders
Purlin
A beam element spanning between joists
Additional structural usages include Horizontal Brace and Other. You can select beams based on their structural usage using the Filter tool, which opens the Filter dialog box listing the elements by category. The following illustration shows the Filter dialog box listing the Structural Framing elements by their structural usage.
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing
■
191
You can also define the graphical representation of structural framing by assigning line weights according to structural usage. This can be done for the entire project in the Object Styles dialog box or for each view in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. For example, the girders can be shown at a heavier line weight than the joists in the Object Styles dialog box, as shown.
Methods of Adding Beams You can add beams in a structural model using the following methods: ■ Sketch beams between two points. ■ Add beams between structural elements using grid lines as references. ■ Lay out a bay of beams using beam systems. ■ Add additional beams by using editing tools, such as Copy, Mirror, and Array. When adding beams to a structural model, you can frame the beam ends to structural columns, concrete or masonry bearing walls, and other beam elements.
Beams in Different Views Typically, beams are placed in a plan view and assigned to the associated level. For example, beams placed in a SECOND FLR. plan view are assigned to the SECOND FLR. level. Beams can also be added in section or elevation views. When placing beams in section or elevation views, the work plane, which is typically a grid line, must be defined. After a beam is placed, it can be modified in another view, including plan, elevation, section, and 3D views.
3D Snaps You can create new beams by snapping to other structural elements in a view. To do this, select the 3D Snapping check box on the Options Bar. 3D snapping is used to model sloped framing. Beams placed using 3D snapping are not planar with the datum level and grid elements.
192
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Examples of Beams The following illustrations show examples of beams.
Labeled beam plan, containing beams in the form of girders and joists.
Irregular and regular bay in a structural plan view. The W18x35 girders connect columns and structural walls and the W12x26 joists span across the girders.
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing
■
193
Beam Properties Beam properties are instance and type parameters that define the characteristics of beams. You can set values for beam properties to control the representation of beams in a structural model. After you select the Beam tool on the Structure panel of the Home tab, you can use the Options Bar to preset the beam properties.
Options for Setting Beam Properties After you select the Beam tool, the Place Beam tab displays various options for setting beam properties, as shown.
Additional options for setting beam properties are displayed on the Options Bar, as shown.
The following table describes the options that you use to preset the beam properties.
194
Option
Description
Load Family
Loads beam elements into a project from the structural framing libraries, if the required beam element is not already loaded.
On Grids
Enables the selection of grid lines to add beam elements. Beams are only added between the points where grid lines intersect with columns.
Placement Plane
Indicates the floor level at which a beam is added.
Structural Usage
Sets the usage of a beam in a structural model.
3D Snapping
Activates snaps to place beams. You place beams by snapping to existing elements in the model.
Chain
Draws beams in succession, with the end point of the last drawn beam as the starting point of the next beam.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Adding Openings in Beams Openings are void regions that intersect with and remove parts of elements in a structural model. In certain projects, you need to show openings in beam webs or flanges. These openings allow passage of ducts, pipes, or other construction elements. You can cut openings through beams, braces, or structural columns by selecting the By Face option on the Opening panel of the Modify tab. Beams, braces, and columns provide two perpendicular planes for openings. These planes align with the major and minor axes of the beams, braces, or columns. The following illustration shows an opening in a beam web.
Procedure: Adding Openings in Beams The following steps describe how to add openings in a beam. 1. 2. 3.
4.
Click Modify tab > Opening panel > By Face. In the view window, select the plane of the beam to which you want to add an opening. Notice that the software indicates whether to pick a flange or web. Sketch the opening on the beam, brace, or column. Note: When you sketch an opening for a structural beam, brace, or column by using the rectangle option, you can specify a radius. By using the radius, you can sketch rectangles with fillets and avoid sharp corners on the opening, which can concentrate stresses. Click Create Opening Boundary tab > Opening by Face panel > Finish Opening.
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing
■
195
Guidelines for Adding and Modifying Beams The following recommended practices help you to place beams accurately and enable you to modify the beams later when adding and modifying beams.
Guidelines for Adding Beams ■
■
■
■
Place the beams using the Beam System tool for typical bay framing with uniform beam spacing. Then, copy or array the bay to other bays if the bay dimensions are similar. By using the Beam System tool for uniformly spaced beams, the layout rules for the beam system allow you to quickly place the beams and to modify them later to suit design requirements. Use the Beam tool instead of the Beam System tool to add beams individually to bays with nonuniform beam spacing or bays with openings. Using the Beam tool provides greater flexibility in placing the beams and modifying them later. Place beams using the Grid Intersection tool. The beams will get added between grid intersections with columns. This ensures that beams are connected and associated with the columns and if the columns move, the beams will follow. Clear the Tag check box on the Options Bar to prevent beam tags from being placed automatically when placing beams in a cluttered framing plan. Following this practice keeps the plan view less cluttered while it is being developed. The tags can be added later when the views are annotated and documented.
Guidelines for Modifying Beams ■
■
■
■
196
If you want to show a detailed view of the connection of a beam to a wall, use the elevation view to adjust the distance of the end of the framing element from the wall. The changes made in an elevation view do not affect the stick symbol representation in plan view, which, in turn, makes it easier to control the display of a beam in multiple views. When you frame a beam element to a bearing wall, use the Beam/Column Joins tool on the Edit Geometry panel of the Modify tab to adjust the graphical display of the beam framing in the wall. The Beam/Column Joins tool only affects views set to a course detail representation. This tool can also be used to correctly display the end of a cantilever beam supporting an edge beam. The gap distance between the beam end and the supporting member is specified by selecting Structural Settings on the Project Settings panel of the Manage tab. These settings can be used to adjust the graphical display of steel framing plans for the entire project. Use the shape handles to control the location of the end of the extrude shape of a beam element at medium or fine detail level in section view. This is useful for controlling the beams ends when creating and annotating model sections.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Exercise: Add Floor Framing In this exercise, you add floor framing by adding girders and beams in a structural model. You have received a design project file with structural walls, a grid system, and columns set in place. You want to add floor framing by adding girders and beams. You do the following: ■ Add steel girders. ■ Add beams between girders. ■ Mirror beams.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 6: Creating Frames. Click Exercise: Add Floor Framing.
Add Steel Girders 1.
Open i_rst_essentials_floor_framing.rvt or m_rst_essentials_floor_framing.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. structural plan view.
2. 3. 4.
Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Beam. Click Place Beam tab > Detail panel > Load Family to load the predefined steel beam type into the project. In the Load Family dialog box: ■ Navigate to the Imperial Library (Metric Library) > Structural > Framing > Steel folder. ■ Select the W-Wide Flange.rfa (M_W-Wide Flange.rfa) file to load this beam family. ■ Click Open.
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing
■
197
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
In the Specify Types dialog box: ■ Under Types, CTRL+select W18x35 (W460X52) and W16x26 (W410X38.8). ■ Click OK. In the Family Already Exists dialog box, click Overwrite the Existing Version. In the view window, zoom in to the area between the grid intersections B1 and G4, if required. Select W-Wide Flange : W18x35 (M_W-Wide Flange : W460X52) from the Type Selector drop-down. Click the grid intersections B1 and C1 to add a girder.
13. Click Place Beam tab > Multiple panel > On Grids to place multiple instances of beams simultaneously. 14. In the view window, to draw three girders between the grid intersections D1 and D4, select the grid line D. Three beams in halftone are displayed.
10. Add another girder between the grid intersections C1 and D1.
11. On the Options Bar, select the Chain check box. 12. In the view window, click the grid intersections D1, E1, F1, and G1 to draw three consecutive girders from D1 to G1.
Notice that with the Chain check box selected, the endpoint of the previous beam is the start point of the next beam.
198
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
15. Click Place Beam > On Grid Lines tab > Multiple Selection panel > Finish Selection to finish creating the beam on the grid line D. 16. Click On Grids to place more beams. 17. In the view window, to draw girders along the grid lines E, F, and G: ■ Click to the right of the grid line G. ■ Draw a selection box by dragging the cursor from right to left across the grid lines G, F, and E.
Beams in halftone are displayed. 18. Click Finish Selection to finish creating the beams on the grid lines E, F, and G. 19. Click On Grids.
20. To draw girders along the grid lines 3 and 4, in the view window: ■ Click below the grid line 4. ■ Draw a selection box by dragging the cursor from right to left across the grid lines 4 and 3.
21. 22. 23. 24.
25. 26.
Beams on the grid lines between the columns are displayed. Finish creating the beams on the grid lines 3 and 4. On the Options Bar, ensure that the Chain check box is selected. In the view window, click the grid intersections G2, F2, E2, D2, and C2 to draw four consecutive girders from G2 to C2. Press ESC to stop placing more beams but to keep the Beam tool active. Note: Ensure that you press ESC only one time. On the Options Bar, clear the Chain check box. In the view window: ■ Zoom in to the area between the grid intersections B1 and D3. ■ Click the grid intersection D3. ■ Move the cursor to the left and click the right endpoint of the horizontal wall centerline when the endpoint snap is displayed.
27. In the view window: ■ Click the grid intersection C1. ■ Move the cursor toward the grid intersection C2 and click the right endpoint of the horizontal wall centerline when the endpoint snap is displayed.
This locates the beam end centered on the wall. 28. Press ESC to stop placing beams but to keep the Beam tool active.
Add Beams Between Girders 1. 2. 3.
Right-click in the view window. Click Zoom to Fit. Select W-Wide Flange : W12x26 (M_W-Wide Flange : W310X38.7) from the Type Selector drop-down. In the view window, to add beams between girders: ■ Zoom in to the area between the grid intersections F1 and G2. ■ Click the midpoint of the girder between the grid intersections F1 and F2 to start adding the beam. ■ Click the midpoint of the girder between the grid intersections F1 and G1 to finish adding the beam.
This locates the beam end centered on the wall.
The line weight of this beam is different from the beams along the grid lines.
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing
■
199
4.
Note: Beams that run between columns are automatically classified as girders. This beam is classified as a joist because it runs between girders. Add a joist between the midpoints of the grid intersections F2 and G2, and G1 and G2.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
Add a beam from the midpoint of the lower W12x26 (W310x38.7) beam perpendicular to the upper beam.
Notice that the line type of this beam is different from girders and joists. It is classified as a purlin in the software because it runs between joists. Exit the Beam tool.
Mirror Beams 1.
200
In the view window, CTRL+select the three new beams that you have added.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
5. 6.
Click Modify Structural Framing tab > Modify panel > Mirror. On the Options Bar, ensure that the Copy check box is selected. In the view window, click the grid line F to mirror the beams.
Notice that there are no beam tags for the new beams. This is because the tags were not included in the selection set that was mirrored from the grid line F. The beam tags are separate elements from the beam elements and can be added to a view anytime using the annotation tools. Open the default 3D view. In the view window, draw a selection box across the structural model to select it.
7. 8.
Click Multi-Select tab > Filter panel > Filter. In the Filter dialog box: ■ Click Check None to clear all check boxes. ■ Select the Structural Framing (Girder), Structural Framing (Joist), and Structural Framing (Purlin) check boxes. Note: If any of the above check boxes are not displayed in the Filter dialog box, you need to check the placement of the beams.
Click OK. Click Modify Structural Framing tab > Clipboard panel > Copy. 10. On the Clipboard panel, click Paste Aligned drop-down > Select Levels. 11. To copy the FIRST FLR. framing to the SECOND FLR. and ROOF, in the Select Levels dialog box: ■ CTRL+select the ROOF and SECOND FLR. levels. ■ Click OK. 12. In the view window, verify that the beams are created on the roof and second floor levels. ■
9.
13. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Adding Floor Framing
■
201
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems This lesson describes how to work with beams and beam systems. You begin the lesson by learning about beams, beam systems, and beam system properties. Next, you learn about the methods of creating sloped beams. You will also learn about the process of creating a 3D beam system and some recommended practices for working with beams and beam systems. The lesson concludes with an exercise on working with beams and beam systems. Beams can be quickly added to structural framing bays using beam systems. When placing a beam system, you use the layout rules to specify the spacing or number of beams in a beam system. You can place beams and beam systems horizontally or at a slope, as in roof decks.
Floor framing without beam systems
Floor framing with beam systems
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
202
Describe beams and beam systems. Describe beam system properties. Identify the methods of creating sloped beams. Identify the steps in the process of creating a 3D beam system. State the recommended practices for working with beams and beam systems. Work with beams and beam systems.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
About Beams and Beam Systems You create beams in a structural model to connect various structural elements. Beams can be placed in horizontal or vertical planes along straight lines or along curved paths. To place beams, you use the Beam tool on the Structure panel of the Home tab. To create more than one beam at a time, you can create beam systems.
Definition of Beams and Beam Systems Beams are structural framing members that run between girders or other beams to support floor or roof decks. Beams are typically composed of metal, wood, or concrete. A beam system is an array of beams governed by layout rules that specify the spacing, distance, or number of beams in a bay. Beam systems are categorized as planar and 3D.
Planar Beam System A planar beam system consists of beams that are in the same plane. The supporting members for planar beam systems slope at the same rate and in the same direction.
3D Beam System A 3D beam system consists of beams that are located in different planes. The supporting members for a 3D beam system slope at different rates and in different directions.
Beams and Beam Systems Display When you create beams or beam systems to support flooring, by convention the beams are displayed with hidden lines in floor plans. The following illustration shows a section view of a typical concrete on metal deck supported by steel beams.
The following illustrations show different options for displaying beams with hidden lines in the plan view.
Wireframe display at the medium detail level
Hidden line display at the coarse detail level
Hidden line display at the medium detail level
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems
■
203
You can use the Linework tool on the Edit Linework panel of the Modify tab to change the appearance of beams in a plan view.
Methods for Creating Beam Systems Using the Beam System tool on the Structure panel of the Home tab, you can create a beam system in a structural model. To do this, select a support formed by a closed loop of beams or structural walls. This method is called the single-click placement method of creating beam systems. Another method of creating a beam system is by sketching the outline of the beam system. You can create 2D or 3D beam systems in the plan or 3D views. The 2D beam systems are placed at the current level. In 3D beam systems, the elevation of each beam is defined by the height and slope of the walls or by the beams that support the beam system. In a 3D view, you can create 2D and 3D beam systems by using the sketch method only. However, in a plan view, you can also create 2D and 3D beams systems using the single-click placement method.
Example of Beams and Beam Systems The following illustrations show different beams and beam systems.
204
2D beam system supported on horizontal beams
2D beam system supported on horizontal curved beams
3D planar beam system with each beam having the same slope
3D non-planar beam system with each beam having a different slope
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Beam System Properties The Beam System tool displays options corresponding to the beam system on the Options Bar. You can use these options to set the properties of the beam system. Beam system properties include type, layout rules, and orientation of the beams. These properties determine the placement of beam systems in a structural model.
Beam System Properties You can set the beam system properties before creating the beam system. The following illustrations show the beam system options on the Options Bar.
The following table describes the beam system options. Option
Description
Beam Type
Specifies the type of beams used in the beam system. The list displays the same beam types as the Type Selector drop-down. You can load additional beam types into the project if the beam you require is not in the Beam Type list.
Justification
Specifies the justification type of the beam system as Beginning, Center, or End. The justification type determines the placement of the first beam in the beam system and each subsequent beam is spaced at a fixed distance from that point. Note: You can specify the justification only if you select the layout rule as Fixed Distance.
Layout Rule
Specifies the pattern in which beams are arranged in a bay. The layout rule can be of the following types: ■ Fixed Distance: Sets beams at a certain fixed distance from the previous beam in the pattern. ■ Fixed Number: Sets a specified number of beams that are equally spaced. ■ Maximum Spacing: Sets beams at a nominal spacing. ■ Clear Spacing: Same as Fixed Distance, but the spacing is measured between the exteriors of the beams instead of between their centerlines. With the Clear Spacing layout rule, when you adjust the size of an individual beam in a beam system, the beams next to it move to maintain the distance between the beams.
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems
■
205
Option
Description
3D
Specifies whether the beams in the beam system are planar or nonplanar with respect to the current level. If the 3D check box is not selected, the beams are placed planar with the current level, regardless of whether the supporting members are sloped. This is often referred to as a 2D beam system. If the 3D check box is selected, the elevations at the ends of the beams are controlled by the slope of the supporting members. This means that the beams can accommodate different support heights and can be nonplanar with the current level. This is often referred to as a 3D beam system.
Walls Define Slope
Specifies the default value for the slope of the sketch lines that are associated with walls in a beam system. You can set this property only for sketch lines that have a wall as their support. When you set this property, the heights are examined for the structural walls that outline the beam system and then beams are placed accordingly. Note: You can set this property only if you select the 3D Snapping check box on the Options Bar.
Tag
Places a tag on either individual beams or a beam system.
Framing or System
Defines the type of tag to be placed for a beam or a beam system.
Methods of Creating Sloped Beams Beams slope when their ends are not at the same elevation. You create sloped beams in a structural model to support sloped surfaces, such as pitched roof structures, ramps, and sloping floors. You can create sloped beams by associating beams with a sloped plane or using end offsets.
Associating with a Sloped Plane You can associate beams with a sloped work plane, which can be an existing sloped slab or a sloped reference plan. To do this, you establish a work plane in a section view of the structural model and set it as the current work plane. Then, you use this sloped work plane to create beams in plan views.
206
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Using End Offsets You can define the slope of a beam using 3D snapping and picking supports. This method automatically assigns the end offsets of the beam according to the elevation of the supporting members.
3D snapping and picking supports in a 3D view
Once the beam is placed, you can modify the end offset values in the Instance Properties dialog box. You can also select the beam in the view window and modify its end offsets. The following illustration shows methods of modifying the end offset value of a beam.
Instance Properties dialog box
3D snapping and picking supports in a plan view
Process of Creating a 3D Beam System You can create 3D beam systems, in which the elevation is defined by its support. To create a 3D beam system in a 3D view, you select sloped supports in the sketch mode.
You can also create a 3D beam system in a plan view using the single-click placement method with the 3D check box selected.
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems
■
207
Process: Creating a 3D Beam System The following illustration shows the process of creating a 3D beam system in a 3D view.
The following steps describe the process of creating a 3D beam system in a 3D view. 1.
Open a 3D view. Open a 3D view that shows the part of the structural model to which you want to add a 3D beam system. Activate the sketch mode. Click Beam System on the Structure panel of the Home tab. Next, activate the sketch mode by clicking Create Sketch on the Sketch panel of the Place Beam System contextual tab. Select the supporting beams. Select the supporting beams to specify the direction and outline of the beam system using the Pick Supports tool on the Draw panel of the Create Beam System Boundary contextual tab.
2. 3.
Guidelines for Working with Beams and Beam Systems The following recommended practices help you work efficiently with beams and beam systems. ■ Use 3D snapping while placing beams and beam systems in plan views. Using 3D snapping ensures that the beams or beam systems slope to meet their supports, even when the supports are modified after the beams or beam systems have been created. ■ Use the single-click placement method of placing beams to quickly place beam systems in framing plans. ■ Use the Pin tool to unpin individual beam system members from their default positions and adjust them individually, as required. Do this with caution and ensure that you document the change with dimensions or text notes to avoid errors. ■ Use the start- and end-level offset parameters to set the elevation of the girders supporting a beam system instead of manually adjusting the elevation of the girders. The beam system supported by the girders slopes with the girders when you adjust the offset level parameters. ■ Use beam systems for typical bay framing with uniform beam spacing. For example, if additional beams are required to frame around openings or support a concentrated load, it is better to place all the framing in the bay individually using the standard Beam tool. This gives more flexibility when updating the framing because of design changes resulting in a shift of the openings or locations of the load.
208
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Exercise: Work with Beams and Beam Systems In this exercise, you complete the FIRST FLR. framing, add sloped framing at the SECOND FLR. roof, and model a sloped canopy structure at the exterior of the building. You do the following: You are working on a structural project where you need to add framing to the existing structural bays using the single-click placement method and by sketching beams. In addition, you create 3D sloping beam systems by specifying the slope value of the sketch lines and by using horizontal and sloping beams. You then create girders as cantilevered members to support a canopy roof. ■ Add beams to the structural bays. ■ Add skewed framing to a framing bay. ■ Add sloped roof framing. ■ Model the sloped canopy structure. ■ Add in-fill beams to the canopy structure. ■ Complete the canopy structure.
The completed exercise
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems
■
209
Completing the Exercise
6.
To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 6: Creating Frames. Click Exercise: Work with Beams and Beam Systems.
To create another beam system: ■ Place the cursor over the girder along grid line F between grid lines 2 and 3. A vertical beam system layout is displayed.
Add Beams to the Structural Bays 1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
Open i_rst_essentials_working_with_beams.rvt or m_rst_essentials_working_with_beams.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. In the view window, zoom in the area between grid intersections F2 and G4. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Beam System. On the Options Bar: ■ Verify that W12x26 (W310x38.7) is selected from the Beam Type list. ■ Click to create the beam system. ■ Select Fixed Number from the Layout Rule list and enter 3. 7. Add beams to the bays between grid lines C and G and grid lines 1 and 4, as shown. ■ Select Framing from the Framing/System list. ■ Select the Tag check box. Note: If you select the Tag check box when the System option is selected, you will see a message that no tag is loaded for the type. Click Close, select Framing, and then select the Tag check box. In the view window: ■ Place the cursor over the beam on grid line Add Skewed Framing to a Framing Bay 4 between grid lines F and G. A horizontal beam system layout is displayed. 1. Zoom in to the area between grid intersections B1 and C2. Notice that the Beam System tool is still active. 2. Click Place Beam System tab > Sketch panel > Create Sketch.
3. ■
210
Click to create the beam system.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Click Create Beam System Boundary tab > Draw panel > Pick Supports.
4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
To sketch the boundary, in the view window, select the concrete walls and beams that define the framing bay.
Note: The line parallel to the first line you sketched indicates the direction of the beam system. Click Create Beam System Boundary tab > Edit panel > Trim. In the view window, click the portions of the sketch lines that need to be retained. This creates corners of the sketch lines and forms a continuous closed loop. To change the direction of the beams, click Create Beam System Boundary tab > Draw panel > Beam Direction. Click Create Beam System Boundary tab > Draw panel > Line.
9.
In the view window, draw a line from the intersection of the walls near grid intersection B2 to the column at grid intersection C1.
10. Click Create Beam System Boundary tab > Beam System panel > Finish Beam System.
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems
■
211
Add Sloped Roof Framing 1. 2.
Open the default 3D view. In the view window, select the structural wall on the left side of the structural model.
3. 4.
Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Constraints, for Top Offset, enter 0' 0" (0 mm). ■ Click OK. The wall updates in the view. Open the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. In the view window, zoom in to the area between grid lines A and C. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Beam System. On the Options Bar: ■ Select W18x35 (W460x52) from the Beam Type list. ■ Verify that Center is selected from the Justification list. ■ Select Maximum Spacing from the Layout Rule list. ■ Ensure that Spacing Distance is set to 6' 0" (1800 mm). ■ Select the 3D check box. On the Options Bar, verify that the Walls Define Slope check box is selected.
5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
212
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
10. In the view window: ■ Place the cursor near the left wall along the grid line A so that the layout lines of the beam system run vertically.
Click to create the beam system. 11. Exit the Beam System tool. 12. Open the Section 1 view. Notice that the beams in the beam system have different slopes because of the walls on which they are based. ■
Model the Sloped Canopy Structure 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
To finish drawing the beam, move the cursor up and click grid line 1.
7. 8.
Exit the Beam tool. In the view window, select the beam you just created. The start and end level offset values for the selected beam are displayed at the ends of the beam. To change the elevation of the lower end of the beam: ■ Move the cursor over the start level offset value at the lower end of the beam. Click when the tooltip for start level offset value is displayed. ■ For the start level offset value, enter -1' 0" (-300 mm).
Open the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. In the view window: ■ Zoom to fit. ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner between grid intersections A1 and A.5 and 2.
Click Home tab > Structure panel > Beam. To specify the beam type, ensure that WWide Flange : W12x26 (M_W-Wide Flange : W310x38.7) is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. To start drawing the beam, in the view window, click grid line 2 at a distance of 6' 0" (1800 mm) to the left of the wall on grid line A.
9.
■
Press ENTER to offset the lower end of the beam down from level 2 by -1' 0" (-300 mm).
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems
■
213
10. Change the elevation of the upper end of the beam to -1' 0" (-300 mm) by modifying the end level offset parameter.
15. Draw another beam on grid line 1, from the exterior of the wall on grid line A to the upper end of the first vertical beam.
The left end of this beam is also placed -1' 0" (-300 mm) below the level. 16. Open the Elevation 3 view. Notice that the two new beams slope to meet the lowered beam.
Note: The change is not visible in the plan view. 11. Activate the Beam tool. 12. Ensure that W-Wide Flange : W12x26 (M_WWide Flange : W310x38.7) is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 13. On the Options Bar, verify that the 3D Snapping check box is selected. 14. In the view window, draw a beam on grid line 2, starting from the exterior of the wall on grid line A to the lower end of the first vertical beam.
Add In-Fill Beams to the Canopy Structure 1. 2.
Open the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. In the view window: ■ Zoom to fit. ■ Zoom in to the upper-left area near grid lines A and A.5.
3. 4.
Activate the Beam System tool. On the Options Bar: ■ Select Fixed Number from the Layout Rule list. ■ Verify that Fixed Number is set to 3. ■ Verify that the 3D check box is selected. ■ Clear the Walls Define Slope check box. Activate the Create Sketch tool. Activate the Pick Supports tool.
The level offset values of the beam indicate that the left end is placed -1' 0" (-300 mm) below the level and the right end is at 0' 0" (0.0 mm) offset.
5. 6.
214
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
7.
In the view window, on the left of the vertical wall at grid line A: ■ CTRL+select the two cantilever W12x26 (W310x38.7) beams. ■ CTRL+select the W12x26 (W310x38.7) edge beam. Notice that the beam direction symbol displays on the first beam that you select.
Note: If required, use the Trim tool to trim the edges of the sketch lines so that they form a closed loop with no intersecting lines. 10. Finish the beam system.
Complete the Sloped Canopy Structure 1. 2.
3. 8. 9.
Activate the Line tool. In the view window, draw a line along the exterior side of the wall along the grid line A between the ends of the horizontal sketch lines.
Activate the Beam tool. To specify the beam type, select HSS-Round Structural Tubing: HSS 4x0.250 (M_HSS-Round Structural Tubing: HSS101.6X6.4) from the Type Selector drop-down. To draw a beam, in the view window, select the start point along the edge beam 2'-6" (812 mm) below the top W12x26. Note: For metric users, enter 812 to specify the start point 812 mm below the top beam.
Lesson: Working with Beams and Beam Systems
■
215
4.
Move the cursor horizontally to the face of the wall and click to finish the beam.
10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
15. 16. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
216
Exit the Beam tool. Click the HSS hanger to select it. To begin making copies of the HSS hanger, click Modify Structural Framing tab > Modify panel > Copy. On the Options Bar, select the Multiple check box. In the view window: ■ Click along the HSS hanger as the start point for copying it.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Move the cursor down until the temporary dimension equals 5'-0" (1625 mm). Again, for metric users, it is easier to enter the value 1625 to ensure the distance is correct. ■ Click to place the hanger. Place two more hangers, each 5'-0" (1625 mm) apart. Exit the Copy tool. To change the end elevation of the HSS hangers, select the four HSS hangers. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ For End Level Offset, enter 8' 0" (2500 mm). ■ Click OK. Exit the selection set. Open the Canopy Systems 3D view. Note: You can use the View Cube controls, such as zoom, pan, and spin, to verify the placement of the beam systems. Close the file without saving changes. ■
17.
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames This lesson describes how to add and edit structural steel moment and braced frames. You begin the lesson by learning about structural steel frames and how to set steel frame symbols in a plan view. Next, you learn the process of adding bracing members, the steps to edit braces, and some recommended practices for working with structural steel frames. The lesson concludes with an exercise on working with structural frames. Lateral force-resisting systems, such as structural steel frames, resist wind and seismic forces and provide overall stability to a building structure. The following illustration shows a 3D view of a structural model with a structural steel braced frame.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Describe structural steel frames. Set steel frame symbols in a plan view. Identify the steps in the process of adding bracing members. Edit braces. State the recommended practices for working with structural steel frames. Work with structural steel frames.
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames
■
217
About Structural Steel Frames Structural steel frames provide strength against lateral wind and seismic forces and provide stiffness to limit the lateral deflection of a building structure. There are two types of structural steel frames, moment frames and braced frames.
Definition of Structural Steel Frames Moment frames provide lateral stability with rigid connections between beams and columns. These rigid, or moment, connections transfer gravity and lateral loads from the beams, through the columns, and down to the foundations. Moment frames are typically specified in structural models with moment connection symbols displayed at the beam ends. Braced frames provide lateral stability using diagonal bracing members to form stable triangular shapes within the frames. These triangular shapes transfer the gravity and lateral loads down to the foundations. For each braced frame, elevations are typically generated and distinguished with dashed lines in structural models.
Examples of Structural Steel Frames The following illustrations show common shapes of structural steel braced and moment frames that you create in structural models.
K-shaped bracing
218
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
X-shaped bracing
V-chevron bracing
Plan symbols representing beam-to-column moment connections for moment frames
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames
■
219
Setting Steel Frame Symbols in a Plan View Braces are diagonal members that connect to beams and columns to form triangular shapes within a braced frame. Braced frames are represented in a plan view by either parallel- or sloped-line brace symbols.
Parallel-line brace symbol
Sloped-line brace symbol
Although brace symbols are graphical representations, they can be used to select and modify the brace members. For example, if you select a brace symbol in a plan view, the brace member gets selected in the model.
Selected brace symbol in a plan view
Corresponding brace member selected in an elevation view
Frame Connection Properties You can specify moment connections at the start and end of structural framing members. The Moment Connection parameter can be set to None, Moment Frame, or Cantilever Moment. A moment frame connection indicates that it is part of a moment frame, beam-to-column relationship and is denoted in the plan view by solid triangle symbols. A cantilever frame connection indicates that one end of the beam is not supported, such as in a balcony, and is denoted in the plan view by open triangle symbols.
220
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Setting the moment connection start and end values of a beam does not change the Start Release and End Release values of the beam. You need to change these values individually for correct structural analysis.
Procedure: Setting the Braced Frame Symbol Type The following steps describe how to set the braced frame symbol type to Parallel Line for plan views. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Manage tab > Project Settings panel > Structural Settings. In the Structural Settings dialog box, Symbolic Representation Settings tab, under Brace Symbols, select Parallel Line from the Plan Representation list. For Parallel Line Offset, enter the distance of the symbol line from the girder line in the plan view. Control the display of the brace symbols above and below the girder line by selecting or clearing the appropriate check boxes.
Process of Adding Bracing Members Bracing members are visible only in elevation, section, or 3D views. Therefore, to add bracing members to a structural model, you first create a framing elevation and then add the bracing members in that framing elevation.
Process: Adding Bracing Members The following illustration shows the process of adding bracing members to a framing elevation.
The following steps describe the process of adding bracing members to a framing elevation. 1. 2.
Open framing elevation view. Open the framing elevation view from the Project Browser. Load brace family. Load a new brace family or type if the Type Selector drop-down does not list what you require. You can load brace families from the Structural > Framing library folders.
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames
■
221
3.
Draw braces using snaps. Snap braces to the center or endpoints of a column or a beam to draw braces from one level to another. Note: If you do not select snap pick points carefully, braces placed between beams are positioned vertically by default. Specify brace parameters. Specify brace parameters in the Instance Properties dialog box to control the brace attachment location. The Start Attachment Type or End Attachment Type parameters are displayed if the brace is attached to a beam or a girder. You can select distance or ratio for the attachment type value.
4.
The Start Attachment Elevation or End Attachment Elevation parameters are displayed when the brace is attached to a column along with a level reference. You can enter the distance above or below the level to locate the brace attachment point.
Editing Braces You can copy, mirror, array, and move braces out of the vertical planes in which they are created. These editing options for braces help you to save time while working on multistory structures. For example, while designing a tower, you can array the braces vertically up the tower instead of creating each brace individually. You can also copy or move braces horizontally. The following illustration shows braces created in a framing elevation view and copied to another grid line in a plan view.
222
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Procedure: Moving Braces out of Vertical Plane The following steps describe how to move braces out of a vertical plane. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Open a plan or 3D view in which the braces that you want to move are visible. In the view window, select the braces you want to move. On the Modify panel, click Move. Note: You can also use the Copy, Rotate, Array, and Mirror tools on the Modify panel to copy, horizontally rotate, array, and horizontally mirror the braces. In the view window, select a point to specify the starting point of the move for the brace. In the view window, select a second point to place the brace at the new location out of its originating plane.
Guidelines for Working with Structural Steel Frames The following recommended practices help you work effectively with structural steel frames. ■ Understand that the moment connection symbol is only for representation. Assigning a moment connection symbol to the beam end does not automatically assign a fixed End Release property to the analytical representation. It also does not add any model components, such as connector plates, to the beam end. Familiarizing yourself with these conditions helps you prevent mistakes. ■ Place vertical braces in a specified work plane either by working in a framing elevation view or by using the Work Plane dialog box. You should place braces carefully to avoid error. ■ Copy the vertical braces to other locations after you have placed vertical braces in a specified work plane. To place multiple copies of braces quickly, you can copy or array them. ■ Use the attachment properties of vertical braces so that they remain in their proper positions if levels change or grid lines move. By paying attention to distance or ratio for the Start or End Attachment Type value, you can specify conditions that flex with the model, avoiding error and speeding up design development.
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames
■
223
Exercise: Work with Structural Steel Frames In this exercise, you create a moment frame and a braced frame. You add steel frames to the model to provide lateral strength and stability to the building structure. You place the framing members so that an engineer can determine their sizes and specify their connections. You do the following: ■ Create a moment frame in a plan view. ■ Create a framing elevation. ■ Add braces to the framing elevation. ■ Copy braces across grid lines.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 6: Creating Frames. Click Exercise: Work with Structural Steel Frames.
Create a Moment Frame in a Plan View
224
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
1.
2.
Open i_rst_essentials_structural_frames.rvt or m_rst_essentials_structural_frames.rvt. The file opens in the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. In the view window, zoom in to the columns at grid intersections G2 and G3.
3.
For Imperial users, use the TAB key and select the W18x35 girder between the grid intersections G2 and G3. For Metric users, click the W460x52 girder between the grid intersections G2 and G3 to select the girder.
6. 7.
Note: If required, you can increase the distance between the solid triangle and the column flange by clicking Manage tab > Project Settings panel > Structural Settings and adjusting the Symbolic Cutback Distance setting for the column. Click Modify. In the view window, enter ZE to zoom out in the view.
Create a Framing Elevation 4. 5.
Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Structural: ■ Select Moment Frame from the Moment Connection Start list. ■ Select Moment Frame from the Moment Connection End list. ■ Click OK. The girders now have blue solid moment triangles as shown.
1.
In the view window, zoom in to grid intersections E4 and F4.
2.
Click View tab > Create panel > Elevation dropdown > Framing Elevation.
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames
■
225
3. 4. 5.
Ensure that Elevation : Building Elevation is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar, ensure that the Attach to Grid check box is selected. In the view window, to place the elevation symbol: ■ Move the cursor to the middle of the W18x35 (W460x52) beam. Notice that the elevation symbol is shaded and snaps into place above or below the beam. ■ Place the cursor on the lower (exterior) side of the beam so that the elevation symbol points to the part of the structural frame that you want to see in the elevation view. ■ Click to place the elevation symbol. It is automatically numbered as 1 - a.
9.
stick symbols, which are single-line graphical representations of structural elements. To resize the crop region: ■ Select the crop region and drag the segment handle on the left and right sides to increase the area of the elevation. ■ Drag the upper segment handle down to just above the roof members. ■ Drag the lower segment handle above the basement floor level indicator as shown.
10. Select the FIRST FLR. level. Drag it to the right, away from the frame.
6. 7. 8.
226
Note: On the Options Bar, if you clear the Attach to Grid check box, the elevation symbol will not automatically point to the grid line. You need to select the elevation symbol and turn the elevation views on or off to generate the correct view. Open the Elevation 1 - a view. Right-click in the view window. Click View Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Graphics, select Medium from the Detail Level list. ■ Under Identity Data, for Title on Sheet, enter BRACED FRAME ELEVATION. ■ Click OK. Note: If the Detail Level parameter is set to Coarse, structural elements are represented as
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
11. On the View Control Bar, click Hide Crop Region to hide the cropped region.
Add Braces to the Framing Elevation
9.
1.
In the view window, zoom in to the column and beams as shown.
2. 3.
Click Home tab > Structure panel > Brace. Verify that HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS6x6x.250 (M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS152.4X152.4X6.4) is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. To create the first diagonal brace: ■ Click the grid intersection of grid line E and the FIRST FLR. level. ■ Click the SECOND FLR. beam at the midpoint of its centerline. To create the second diagonal brace: ■ Click the grid intersection of grid line F and the FIRST FLR. level. ■ Click the middle of the SECOND FLR. beam where the brace from grid line E meets it.
4.
5.
6. 7. 8.
In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Structural, for Start Attachment Elevation, enter -18" (-450 mm). ■ Click OK. The brace end moves to the lower part of the column.
10. Change the start attachment elevation for the right brace.
11. To add a brace to create an X-shaped braced frame, activate the Brace tool. 12. In the view window: ■ Click the intersection of grid line E and the ROOF level. ■ Click the middle of the second floor beam at its centerline.
Exit the Brace tool. To change the start attachment elevation, in the view window, select the left brace. Open the Instance Properties dialog box.
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames
■
227
13. To complete the X-shaped braced frame: ■ Click the intersection of grid line F and the ROOF level. ■ Click the middle of the second floor beam where the brace from grid line E meets it.
16. In the Structural Settings dialog box, Symbolic Representation Settings tab: ■ Under Brace Symbols, select Parallel Line from the Plan Representation list. ■ Verify that the Show Brace Above and Show Brace Below check boxes are selected. ■ Click OK. Notice that the view updates.
Copy Braces Across Grid Lines 1.
In the view window, CTRL+select the four braces that you created.
2.
To begin copying the braces: ■ On the Modify panel, click Copy. ■ On the Options Bar, select the Constrain check box. In the view window, for establishing the start point of copying the braces, click the right end of grid line 4 as shown.
14. Open the SECOND FLR. view. In the view window, notice the brace symbols that have been automatically added to the plan view. 3.
4.
15. Click Manage tab > Project Settings panel > Structural Settings.
228
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
5. 6.
For establishing the end point, click the right end of grid line 1 as shown.
Notice that the braces are copied between grid intersections E1 and F1. Open the default 3D view. In the view window, select the upper roof.
7.
Right-click the selected upper roof. Click Hide in View > Category. The copied braces are displayed on the far side of the structure.
8.
Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Working with Structural Steel Frames
■
229
Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams This lesson describes how to work with concrete beams. You begin the lesson by learning about concrete beams and options to edit concrete beam joins. Next, you learn about vertical justification of beams and some recommended practices for working with concrete beams. The lesson concludes with an exercise on working with concrete beams. Concrete beams, such as cast-in-place and precast, transfer loads from the floor slab to the columns and walls. Cast-in-place concrete beams are cast integral with the adjacent members to form a monolithic floor system. Precast concrete beams are separate and discrete members connected to adjacent members, using welded and bolted connections similar to a steel and wood framing.
Concrete beams created in the underside of a floor
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
230
Describe concrete beams. Identify the options for editing concrete beam joins. Describe vertical justification of beams. State the recommended practices for working with concrete beams. Work with concrete beams.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
About Concrete Beams You can place and analyze concrete beams like any other beams. You can either place predefined concrete beam types or customize existing types.
Definition of Concrete Beams Concrete beams are horizontal framing members that you use for supporting floor slabs and transferring gravity and lateral loads to column and wall members. Steel reinforcement is an integral part of concrete beams to increase the tensile strength of the member. Revit provides steel reinforcing tools to add the steel rebar to the concrete members.
For more information on the steel reinforcing tools, refer to Revit Help.
Types of Concrete Beams Concrete beams are of two types, precast and cast-in-place. Precast concrete beams are separate and discrete members that do not join with other beams, floors, columns, or walls. They are installed and connected in a manner similar to steel or wood beams. The following illustration shows a section view of precast concrete beams supporting a precast hollow core slab.
Cast-in-place concrete beams are poured monolithically with the floor system using formwork, assembled in-place on the site. The beams are integrally joined with other beams, floors, columns, or walls. Steel reinforcing bars extend into adjacent members to provide continuity between members. The following illustration shows a section view of cast-in-place concrete beams and a floor slab.
Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams
■
231
Example of Concrete Beams The following illustration shows a plan view of concrete beams under a floor slab.
Options to Edit Concrete Beam Joins Concrete beams interact with other beams and walls. You can edit beam joins in both plan and section views by using handles, beam cutbacks, and the Beam Join Editor.
Beam and Shape Handles Concrete beams can have two types of handles, beam and shape. Beam handles control the ends of the beam and determine the length of the beam. Shape handles control beam geometry and determine the visual display of the beam in the views that are set to medium or fine detail level, and the cut length of the beam.
Steel and wood beams also have handles.
Precast concrete beams have both beam and shape handles, and you can edit them separately. However, cast-in-place concrete beams have beam handles but no shape handles.
232
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
The following illustrations show handles in precast and cast-in-place concrete beams in a plan view. For the precast concrete beam, both the beam handle (round dot) and shape handle (double-headed arrow) are displayed. For the cast-in-place concrete beam, only the beam handle appears.
Precast concrete beam meeting another beam
Cast-in-place concrete beam meeting another beam
By default, e beam handles (round dot) extend to the centerline of the supporting member. Cast-in-place beams join automatically with other cast-in-place beams, walls, and cast-in-place columns. However, the precast beams do not join automatically with other beams or walls. The gap between the precast beams is referred to as the cut back or extension distance.
Beam Cutback Distance Settings The beam cutback distance is the gap between the end of a beam and the face of the supporting member. You can control the distance graphically by stretching the shape handles at each end of the beam or by specifying the Start Extension and End Extension instance parameters of the beam in the Instance Properties dialog box. The following illustration shows the Start Extension and End Extension instance parameters in the Instance Properties dialog box.
By default, the cut back distance is set to -1/2", which means the end of the beam geometry is 1/2" off the geometry of the supporting member. You use these parameters to calculate the cut length of the beam used for calculating the volume of the beam. The Start Extension and End Extension parameters are not available for cast-in-place beams.
Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams
■
233
Beam Join Editor When the ends of a beam meet, it is necessary to control the graphic display for illustrating the support relationships correctly between the members. You do this by using the Edit Beam Joins tool, which activates the Beam Join Editor. The editing mode displays the beam join arrow controls used to edit beam cutback. You can toggle the cutback in the direction the arrow is pointing. If a beam is cutback, the arrow points toward the join. If a beam is not cutback, the arrow points away from the join. Applying cutback to both beams at an intersection creates a miter join. Two beams must be coplanar or colinear to create a miter join. They must also be of the same family type and material.
The Edit Beam Joins tool is not available for cast-in-place beams. By default, the ends of cast-in-place beams are joined. The following illustrations show the beam join arrow controls displayed by the Beam Join Editor.
All beam ends are cutback.
234
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Vertical beam ends are cutback.
Upper-left beam is cutback at its right end and the vertical beam is cutback at its lower end.
Two overlapping beam ends are cutback, resulting in a miter join.
Beam cutback distance settings do not change in the Instance Properties dialog box when you adjust cutback with the Beam Join Editor.
Vertical Justification of Beams You can set the vertical justification of a beam relative to its associated reference level. Revit provides four options to define the vertical justification: Top, Center, Bottom, and Other. By default, the top of a beam is set to a reference level. After a beam is placed, you can change the vertical justification. The following illustration shows precast beams set to Top, Center, and Bottom justifications.
Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams
■
235
Z-Direction Offset You can define the vertical justification of a beam relative to its associated reference level using ZDirection Justification in the Instance Properties dialog box. The following illustration shows the options for Z-Direction Justification.
You activate the Z-Direction Offset Value by setting the Z-Direction Justification value to Other, as shown in the following illustration.
You can use the Z-Direction Offset Value to set the top of a beam below the reference level for accommodating a floor slab.
236
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
The following illustration shows a precast beam set 6" below the reference level, so that the top of the 6" hollow core slab matches the top of the reference level elevation.
Guidelines for Working with Concrete Beams The following recommended practices help you work effectively with concrete beams. ■ Load the beam families that you commonly use in the project templates. This saves time during design work. ■ Add custom sizes to a beam family in a project and save the custom beam family to the content library. This enables other projects to benefit from the additional beam types. ■ Understand the properties of precast and cast-in-place beams, particularly where beams meet or cross. By understanding how beams function, you can promote a smoother workflow in a project. ■ Assign the same material to all the joining members, including beams, floors, columns, and walls when modeling cast-in-place beams. This ensures that the members join properly with the correct graphical representation shown in sections and elevations. ■ Create an additional concrete material type with identity notes specifying fly ash and slag cement instead of Portland cement. This material can then be assigned to concrete elements for use on projects filing for Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) certification. Fly ash, slag cement, and other Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) can qualify for points toward LEED recycled content credits.
Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams
■
237
Exercise: Work with Concrete Beams In this exercise, you create cast-in-place and precast concrete beams. You also edit concrete beam joins. You have received a project file with structural walls, floors, a grid system, columns, and pilasters set in a place. You want to add cast-in-place concrete beams under the FIRST FLR. concrete slab. In addition, you want to add precast concrete beams to an exterior platform. You do the following: ■ Create cast-in-place concrete beams. ■ Create precast concrete beams. ■ Edit concrete beam joins.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 6: Creating Frames. Click Exercise: Work with Concrete Beams.
Create Cast-in-Place Concrete Beams 1.
238
Open i_rst_essentials_concrete_beams.rvt or m_rst_essentials_concrete_beams.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. structural plan view.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
2. 3.
4.
Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Beam to begin placing concrete beams under the floor. Ensure that Concrete-Rectangular Beam : 18 x 24 (M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam : 450 x 600mm) is selected in the Type Selector dropdown. On the Options Bar: ■ Clear the Tag check box. ■ Clear the Chain check box.
5.
To specify the start point for the beam, in the view window, click the center of the pilaster near the intersection of grid lines B and 3.
6.
To specify the endpoint for the beam, click the intersection of grid lines B and 2.
7.
8.
To place beams along the grid line A.5, in the view window: ■ Click the center of the pilaster near the intersection of grid lines A.5 and 3. ■ Click the intersection of grid lines A.5 and 2. ■ Click the intersection of grid lines A.5 and 1.
9.
Press ESC to stop placing more beams but to keep the Beam tool active.
On the Options Bar, select the Chain check box.
Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams
■
239
10. To place a beam horizontally, in the view window: ■ Click the center of the pilaster near the intersection of grid lines A and 2. ■ Click the intersection of grid lines A.5 and 2. ■ Click the intersection of grid lines B and 2.
11. Exit the Beam tool.
12. On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style > Hidden Line.
The view updates to show the beam hidden by the floor. 13. Open the Underside of Floor with Beams view. 14. To lower the concrete beams so that their top faces coincide with the underside of the floor, in the view window: ■ Select a concrete beam. ■ Right-click the selected beam. Click Select All Instances.
15. Open the Instance Properties dialog box.
240
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
16. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Constraints: ■ Set Z-Direction Justification to Other. ■ For Z-Direction Offset Value, enter -1' 0" (-300 mm). ■ Click OK. Notice that the concrete beams now appear lower in the floor. 17. In the view window, press ESC to clear the selection.
7.
Exit the Beam tool.
Edit Concrete Beam Joins 1.
Click Modify tab > Edit Geometry panel > Beam/Column Joins to activate the Beam Join Editor.
Create Precast Concrete Beams 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Open the FIRST FLR. view. In the view window, zoom in to the area between the grid intersections B1 and C2. Activate the Beam tool to begin placing precast beams. Select Precast-Rectangular Beam : 12RB24 (M_Precast-Rectangular Beam : 300 RB 600) from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar, ensure that the Chain check box is selected. To place a precast beam, in the view window: ■ Click the right face of the wall at the grid intersection of grid lines B and 1. ■ Click the intersection of grid lines B.7 and 1. ■ Move the cursor down to meet the upper wall face near the intersection of grid lines B.7 and 2 and click to place a beam.
2.
3.
Notice that the beam join arrow controls appear at the ends of the precast beams that are cantilevering over the column supports at grid lines B.7 and 1, and C and 1.2. To remove the cutback from the left end of the horizontal beam at the grid line B, click the arrow control. Notice that the arrow control reverses, indicating no cutback for the beam, and the beam now extends into the wall.
Click the arrow control at the right end of the beam along grid line 1. The arrow control reverses and the beam is cutback, as shown.
Lesson: Working with Concrete Beams
■
241
4.
5. 6. 7.
8.
242
To create a miter join condition, on the right, click the arrow controls at the end of both beams at the cantilever condition.
The beam now joins along a diagonal miter and a padlock icon appears. Click Modify to exit the Beam/Column Joins tool. Open the 3D view from Above view. If required, you can use the view cube compass to position the model as shown.
Close the file without saving changes.
■
Chapter 6: Creating Frames
Chapter
7 Creating Floors and Roofs In Revit, floors and roofs are systems families. These structural systems are 3D parametric elements that you create and add directly to a structural model and customize to any project specification as required. In this chapter, you learn how to add floors in structural models, create a roof, and add structural framing to the roof for support.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■
Add floors in structural models. Create a roof and add structural framing to the roof for support.
Chapter Overview
■
243
Lesson: Adding Floors This lesson describes how to add floors in structural models. You begin the lesson by learning about floor elements and the process of adding a floor element. Next, you learn the steps to create sloped floors and a shaft opening in a floor. You also learn about some recommended practices for adding floors. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding and modifying floor elements. Floor elements are horizontal surfaces that distribute loads to the structural framing members. They also function as diaphragms that transfer lateral loads to the lateral load resisting system. Floor elements can represent floor slabs, balconies, and roofs. The floor construction can be defined as single layer, such as a concrete slab, or multiple layers, such as a concrete on metal deck.
Floor slab and sloped roof deck in a structural model
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
244
Describe floor elements. Identify the steps in the process of adding a floor element. Create sloped floors. Create a shaft opening in a floor. State the recommended practices for adding floors. Add and modify floor elements.
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
About Floor Elements A floor element is a system family consisting of one or more layers of material. You can create new floor types and use them to add floor and roof slabs to your model.
Definition of Floor Elements Floors are horizontal surfaces that support gravity loads and transfer these loads to the supporting structure. You add floor elements in a plan view using the Floor tool. When you select the Floor tool, the sketch mode is activated and all the elements in the model are halftoned and not accessible. In the sketch mode, you add sketch lines to define the boundary of the floor. You can place sketch lines using the Pick Walls, Pick Supports, or Line tool. You can create an opening in a floor by editing the floor and sketching secondary loops inside the main floor outline. You can also create an opening in a floor using the By Face, Shaft, and Vertical tools on the Opening panel of the Modify tab. The openings that are created by this method are hosted by floors, but these openings remain independent.
The boundary of a floor or an opening in the floor must be a closed loop.
Types of Floor Elements Revit contains several preloaded floor types that can be used to model elevated floor slabs, roofs, and slab-on-grades. You can create additional floor types by duplicating an existing type and editing its structure. For example, you can add additional layers, modify the material of a layer, and change the thickness of a layer. Revit also provides a Slab tool used to model foundation slabs. This tool is similar to the Floor tool. However, the Foundation Slab family and the Floor family are separate and distinct system families. Once it is placed, you cannot change a Foundation Slab element to a Floor element or vice versa using the Type Selector drop-down.
Lesson: Adding Floors
■
245
Example of a Floor Type The following illustration shows a standard floor type. It consists of a 2-inch (50 mm) deep corrugated metal deck, overlaid by 4 1/4 inches (106 mm) of concrete. The metal deck is fastened to the underlying support framing, and lightweight concrete is poured over the metal deck (cast-in-place) to construct the floor.
Process of Adding a Floor Element To add a floor element to a project, you use the Floor tool on the Structure panel of the Home tab.
Process: Adding a Floor Element The following illustration shows the process of adding a floor element.
The following steps describe the process of adding a floor element. 1.
Open the structural model in a plan or 3D view. Open the structural model in a plan or 3D view to add a floor element. Use the Floor tool. Use the Floor tool to start placing a floor element.
2.
246
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
3.
4. 5.
Specify properties. Specify properties of the new floor type by opening the Instance Properties dialog box, followed by the Type Properties dialog box. Select Duplicate in the Type Properties dialog box to create a new floor type, and then specify the floor type properties. Sketch the outline. Sketch the outline of the floor type to place an opening. You can draw lines or pick walls, supports, or lines. Add openings in the floor sketch. Add openings in the floor sketch using additional outlines. You can also use the tools on the Opening panel of the Modify tab after the floor is completed.
Creating Sloped Floors Revit Structure provides tools to model floor elements with single or multiple slopes. You can model a single-sloped, or mono-sloped, floor by using the Slope Arrow tool or defining the slope of a sketch line. You can define only one sloped arrow or one sloped sketch line in a floor element. However, roof elements, available on the Architect & Site tab, can have multiple sloped arrows and sloped sketch lines. Roof elements are architectural elements that do not have any analytical properties. You can add multiple slopes to a structural floor slab using the shape editing tools. These tools enable you to manipulate the surface of an existing horizontal floor or roof element by defining high and low points for drainage. By specifying the elevation of these points, you split the surface into subregions that can slope independently.
Procedure: Creating Sloped Floors Using a Slope Arrow The following steps describe how to create sloped floors using a slope arrow. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
In a floor sketch, draw a slope arrow in the direction of the desired slope. Right-click the arrow. Click Element Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Constraints, set the value of Specify to Height at Tail. Specify a value for Height Offset at Tail. This value determines the height at which the slope arrow begins above the story level. If required, specify a level for Level at Tail to start the slope arrow at a certain level. For example, the floor sketch is on level 1. You could choose to start the slope arrow on level 2. Specify a value for Height Offset at Head. This value determines the height at which the slope arrow ends above the story level. If required, specify a level for Level at Head to end the slope arrow above a certain level. For example, the floor sketch is on level 1. You could choose to end the slope arrow on level 2.
Lesson: Adding Floors
■
247
Procedure: Creating Sloped Floors by Defining the Slope of a Sketch Line The following steps describe how to create sloped floors by defining the slope of a sketch line. 1. 2. 3.
In a floor sketch, select one of the sketch lines that define the extent of the floor. On the Options Bar, select the Defines Slope check box. In the view window, select the editable dimension next to the triangle icon near the selected sketch line. Enter the desired angle for the slope of the floor element. The floor will slope about the selected line at the specified angle.
4.
Procedure: Creating Sloped Floors by Using Shape Editing Tools The following steps describe how to create floors with sloping surfaces using shape editing tools. 1. 2.
Select the foundation slab, floor, or roof you want to modify. Click Modify Floors tab > Shape Editing panel > Add Point or Add Split Line. When you add points, you specify an elevation for the points. This value is the vertical offset between the vertices and the original top face of the floor. If you draw lines, the lines define valleys or ridges in the floor. Slope lines will be added when you place points. After you add points or lines, select a floor and use the Modify Sub Elements tool on the Shape Editing panel to select points or edges for editing. You can move points or edges or define different elevations. Shape editing a floor warps the lower part of the floor. To make the lower part of the floor flat the way floors are, select the floor and open the Type Properties dialog box. From the Type Properties dialog box, open the Edit Assembly dialog box and define the uppermost material in the floor by specifying its variable thickness.
3. 4.
Creating Shaft Openings in Floors You can cut openings in the entire height of a building using the Shaft tool on the Opening panel of the Modify tab. Using this tool, you can cut faces of roofs, floors, and slab-on-grades simultaneously. If you move the shaft opening on one level, it moves on all levels. The symbolic lines are visible on all levels too.
Procedure: Creating a Shaft Opening in a Floor The following steps describe how to create a shaft opening in a floor. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
248
Open a plan or a 3D view. Click Modify tab > Opening panel > Shaft. Sketch a shaft opening by drawing lines or by picking walls. If desired, add symbolic lines to the opening. Click Finish Opening. Select the opening and click Element Properties to adjust the levels that the opening cuts. For Base Constraint, specify a level for the start point of the shaft. For Top Constraint, specify a level for the end point of the shaft. The shaft cuts through and is visible on all intermediate levels.
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
Guidelines for Adding Floors The following recommended practices help you effectively add slabs. ■ Press TAB and select a floor edge to cycle through the selection options. Use this method because selecting a floor edge can be difficult while editing in a busy plan view. You can also select walls and floors using a crossing window and use the Filter tool to narrow down the selection set. You can speed up your work by learning how to select and edit floors effectively. ■ Use the material properties of floors to enhance visibility of floors in plan views by defining a floor material with a surface pattern. This saves time and eliminates the chances of duplication. ■ Create openings in floors using the tools on the Opening panel of the Modify tab instead of adding openings in the floor sketch. The tools on the Opening panel create separate opening elements that can be copied, moved, or modified outside of the floor sketch. This makes it easier to modify the opening sizes and locations later during a project. ■ Use the concrete and steel cantilever parameters to specify the edge conditions of the floor. These parameters are available on the Options Bar when sketch lines are selected in the floor sketch. Modeling the edge conditions correctly will save time when you are detailing sections through the model.
Lesson: Adding Floors
■
249
Exercise: Add and Modify Floor Elements In this exercise, you add a floor, add a shaft opening, and modify the slope of the existing roof deck. You are working on a design project where structural framing for the second floor is complete. You need to add a floor to the second floor plan and a shaft opening extending through the roof to the floor. You also need to adjust the existing roof deck to slope with the roof framing. You do the following: ■ Add a floor. ■ Add a shaft opening. ■ Modify the slope of the roof deck.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs. Click Exercise: Add and Modify Floor Elements.
Add a Floor
250
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
1.
2. 3. 4.
Open i_rst_essentials_floor.rvt or m_rst_essentials_floor.rvt. The file opens in the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. In the view window, zoom in to the area between the grid intersections B1 and G4. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Floor. Click Create Floor Boundary tab > Element panel > Floor Properties.
5.
6. 7. 8.
To specify a floor type, in the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Ensure that NW Concrete on Metal Deck is selected from the Type list. ■ Click OK. On the Draw panel, click Line to start drawing the floor boundary. On the Options Bar, verify that the Chain check box is selected. In the view window, click the grid intersections B1, G1, G4, D4, D3, and C3 to draw the floor boundary.
9. Exit the Line tool. 10. In the view window, CTRL+select the five sketch lines you just placed. 11. On the Options Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -0' 6" (-150 mm). 12. Click Modify to clear the selection. 13. In the view window, zoom in to the grid intersection G1. Notice that the magenta sketch line is along the grid line and the black line represents the edge of the concrete.
15. On the Draw panel, click Pick Walls.
16. In the view window, zoom in to the area between grid intersections B1 and C3. 17. On the Options Bar: ■ Clear the Extend into Wall (To Core) check box. ■ Verify that Offset is 0. 18. In the view window, click the interior faces of the concrete walls to complete the floor boundary.
19. Exit the Pick Walls tool. 20. In the view window, zoom in to the grid intersection B1.
21. To ensure that the sketch lines make a corner without overlapping, click Create Floor Boundary tab > Edit panel > Trim.
14. Zoom to fit the view.
Lesson: Adding Floors
■
251
22. In the view window, click the two sketch lines in succession to make a clean corner. Ensure that you click the portion of the line that needs to be retained after the trim action.
23. Enter ZF to zoom out of the grid intersection B1. 24. Zoom in to grid intersection C3.
28. Open the EDGE DETAIL view. Notice that the steel deck is on the grid line, but the concrete cantilevers extend past the grid line.
Add a Shaft Opening 1. 2. 3.
Open the SECOND FLR. view. In the view window, zoom to fit the view. Zoom in to the area between grid intersections E2 and F3.
4.
On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level > Medium to change the setting of the view. Click Modify tab > Opening panel > Shaft. Click Create Shaft Opening Sketch tab > Draw panel > Pick Lines. On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3" (75 mm).
25. Click the two sketch lines one after the other to make a clean corner.
26. On the Floor panel, click Finish Floor to complete sketching the floor. 27. Click No in all the dialog boxes that are displayed.
252
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
5. 6. 7.
8.
In the view window, in the bay below and to the right of the grid intersection E2, click the four beam flange lines as shown. Note: Pick the side of the beam flange to place the offset so that it lies inside the four selected lines.
12. To begin drawing symbolic lines for representing the floor opening, on the Options Bar: ■ Clear the Chain check box. ■ Verify that the offset is set to 0. 13. To draw an X in the new floor opening: ■ Click the upper-left corner. ■ Click the lower-right corner. ■ Click the lower-left corner. ■ Click the upper-right corner. 14. On the Element panel, click Shaft Opening Properties. 15. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Constraints: ■ Select Up to Level: ROOF from the Top Constraint list. ■ For Top Offset, enter 3' 0" (900 mm). ■ Click OK. Verify that the symbolic lines for representing the floor opening appear as shown.
9. Activate the Trim tool. 10. To pull the sketch lines together into a closed loop, click the sketch lines at each intersection so that they form four clean corners with no overlapping lines and gaps, as shown.
16. On the Shaft Opening panel, click Finish Opening.
11. On the Draw panel, click Symbolic Lines.
Lesson: Adding Floors
■
253
17. Open the default 3D view and select the shaft opening. Notice that the shaft opening extends through the roof. Also notice that the roof is horizontal and does not slope with the framing.
Modify the Slope of the Roof Deck 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
254
Open the ROOF view. To select the roof deck: ■ Place the cursor on the perimeter of the roof deck. ■ If required, press TAB to highlight the roof deck. ■ Click to select the roof deck. Click Modify Floors tab > Shape Editing panel > Pick Supports. In the view window, zoom to fit the view. Starting with the beam between the grid lines B and C, select all the beams along grid line 1. Notice that the slope lines are updated as you select each beam.
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
6.
Continue selecting beams from the left to the right along the grid lines 2, 3, and 4. When you finish, there should not be any slope lines, indicating a mono-sloped roof sloping from grid line1 to grid line 2.
7.
Press ESC two times to exit the Pick Supports and the Modify Floor tool. Open the BUILDING SECTION view. Notice that the roof deck matches the slope of the roof framing.
8.
9. Open the default 3D view. 10. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Lesson: Structural Framing This lesson describes how to create a roof and add structural framing to the roof for support. You begin the lesson by learning about roofs. Next, you learn the process of sketching roofs. Then, you learn some recommended practices for creating roofs. The lesson concludes with an exercise on creating a sloped roof with steel framing. Roofs can be modeled as structural roofs using the Floor tool, or as architectural roofs using the Roof tool. You can model most roofs as structural roofs, but for more complex geometries, such as curved roofs, you should use the Roof tool. Roofs modeled as architectural roof elements do not include an analytical representation.
Roofs modeled using the Roof tool
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Describe roofs. Identify the steps in the process of sketching roofs. State the recommended practices for creating roofs. Create a sloped roof with steel framing.
Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Structural Framing
■
255
About Roofs Roofs are system family elements, similar to walls and floors. Using Revit, you can model roofs of various shapes and constructions.
Definition of Roofs Roofs are building elements representing different types of roofs that you can create while designing building models. You can sketch roofs by footprint, extrusion, or face. You can modify roof properties, such as outline, structural composition, and slope.
Roof by Footprint A roof footprint is a 2D sketch depicting the perimeter of a roof. You draw a footprint by sketching lines or by selecting walls to define the roof perimeter. In both cases, you specify a value to control the offset of the roof from the existing walls. You sketch a footprint of the roof in the plan view of the level where the roof will be placed. The sketch must be a continuous closed loop. It can contain additional closed loops inside the footprint to define openings in the roof. You define the slopes of the roof by specifying the lines in a footprint as edges of sloping roof planes.
Roof by Extrusion You create a roof by extrusion by sketching the profile of the top of a roof in an elevation or section view, and then extruding the roof. The location of the profile in the elevation view determines the height of the roof. You set the start and end points of a roof to determine the depth of the extrusion. You can use a combination of straight lines and arcs to create the roof profile. The sketch of a roof should be a series of connected lines or arcs that are not closed in a loop. Revit defines the depth of the roof structure according to the type of roof.
Extrusion Direction of Roofs The direction in which a roof profile extrudes is known as the extrusion direction. When extruding a roof in an elevation or a section view, you need to determine a perpendicular work plane, such as a wall. After determining a work plane, the roof properties include the Extrusion Start and Extrusion End properties. The difference between the Extrusion Start and Extrusion End properties determines the depth of the extrusion, which can be positive or negative. You can extend the extrusion toward or away from the view. Extrusion directions that are upward or toward the view are positive and extrusion directions that are downward or away from the view are negative.
256
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
Properties of Roofs You select a roof or a roof sketch to edit its properties. You can modify the instance and type properties of roofs. The instance properties that you can modify include outline, slope defining edges, slope angle, and base level. When you modify the type properties of a roof, such as structure, the change affects all instances of the roof type.
Roof sketch and instance parameters
Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Structural Framing
■
257
Example of Roofs The following illustration shows a building model with different roof types.
Flat footprint Curved extruded Sloped footprint
Process of Sketching Roofs You can sketch roofs using footprint, extrusion, and roof by face methods.
Process: Sketching Roofs The following illustration shows the process of sketching roofs.
258
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
The following steps describe the process of sketching roofs. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Activate the Roof tool. Select the Roof by Footprint option from the Roof drop-down on the Architect panel of the Architect & Site tab. Specify roof properties. Specify the roof properties in the Instance Properties dialog box. For Base Offset From Level, you can specify a height value to vertically offset the roof deck from the level at which it is drawn. Select roof type or create new roof type. Select an existing roof type from the Type list. Alternatively, create a new type by selecting Edit Type in the Instance Properties dialog box. Further, you can duplicate an existing type, name the new roof type, and edit the new roof structure. Sketch roof. Sketch the roof by drawing lines or picking walls. Change value of roof slope. Change the value of the roof slope for individual edges using the angle symbol displayed below each sketch line.
Guidelines for Creating Roofs The following recommended practices help you save time and prevent inaccuracies while creating roofs. ■ Take note of the level of the plan view in which you are working when you create a footprint roof. You should be careful while creating a roof on a level above or below the view because you may not view the roof when it is finished. ■ Carefully set the View Range properties of the view you use to create a footprint roof. This provides better control over the display of roofs in a design. ■ Plan each extruded roof ahead of time, study the requirements of the roof, create views that point in the correct direction, and create reference planes, where appropriate. This saves time and enhances accuracy. ■ Use the Join/Unjoin Roof tool for creating complex roof assemblies. Make multiple roofs and join them to save time and improve accuracy. Do not try to model a complicated footprint roof to match the exterior walls of an elaborate building outline, particularly if the walls are of different heights. ■ Use the Roof tool to model complex roof assemblies; otherwise, it is recommended that you use the Floor tool to model roofs because floors have analytical models associated with them. You can export the analytical models to third-party analytical software used for designing. Exporting models can reduce the time spent in creating and working on the analytical software.
Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Structural Framing
■
259
Exercise: Create a Sloped Roof with Steel Framing In this exercise, you create a sloped roof by footprint and a curved roof by extrusion and then add structural framing to each roof. You are modeling a roof deck that is supported by steel girders and beams. The roof has a slight slope for drainage. You anticipate that the slope may change during the course of the design, so you place steel girders and beams so that they remain associated with the roof. Therefore, if the roof slope changes, the steel framing will also change. In addition, you are modeling a curved canopy roof. You want to use the curvature of the roof to place curved beams to support it. You do the following: ■ Add a sloped roof. ■ Add beams to match the roof slope. ■ Rotate girders. ■ Add a curved roof canopy. ■ Add curved beams.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs. Click Exercise: Create a Sloped Roof with Steel Framing.
260
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
Add a Sloped Roof 1. 2. 3.
Open i_rst_essentials_roofs.rvt or m_rst_essentials_roofs.rvt. The file opens in the SECOND FLR. ROOF view. Click Architect & Site tab > Architect panel > Roof drop-down > Roof by Footprint. Click Create Roof Footprint tab > Element panel > Roof Properties.
4.
5. 6.
In the Instance Properties dialog box, ensure that 2" Fill over 1 1/2" Metal Deck (50mm Fill over 38mm Metal Deck) is selected from the Type list, and close the dialog box. On the Draw panel, ensure that the Pick Walls tool is selected. In the view window, click the inside face of the concrete walls to create the outline of the roof deck. Tip: You can also place the cursor over a wall and press TAB to highlight the wall. Then, click the highlighted walls to select them.
9.
To change the slope value, in the view window: ■ Click the slope value displayed below the bottom horizontal line. ■ Enter 1.19.
Press ENTER. 10. On the Roof panel, click Finish Roof to complete the roof deck. ■
Add Beams to Match the Roof Slope
7. 8.
1. 2.
Open the Roof Section at Grid 2 view. Notice that the top of the steel column at grid line 2 is too low because the roof deck is sloping.
3.
To extend the top of the column up to the underside of the roof: ■ In the view window, select the column. ■ Click Modify Structural Columns tab > Modify Column panel > Attach. ■ On the Options Bar, ensure that Top is selected. In the view window, select the roof deck. Close the warning message that appears. Click Home tab > Work Plane panel > Set. In the Work Plane dialog box: ■ Ensure that Pick a Plane is selected. ■ Click OK.
Note: You can adjust the placement of the sketch lines using double-arrow controls. Exit the Pick Walls tool. To change the slope definition of a line: ■ In the view window, select the bottom horizontal line. ■ On the Options Bar, select the Defines Slope check box.
4. 5. 6.
Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Structural Framing
■
261
7.
In the view window, select the underside of the roof deck to set the reference plane.
8.
In the Go To View dialog box: ■ Select Structural Plan: SECOND FLR. ROOF.
Click Open View. Zoom in so that the walls between the grid lines A and B and between 1 and 3 are displayed in the view window. 10. To begin adding beams: ■ Activate the Beam tool. ■ Ensure that W-Wide Flange : W18x35 (M_W-Wide Flange : W460x52) is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 11. On the Options Bar: ■ Ensure that Placement Plane is set to Basic Roof : 2" Fill over 1 1/2" Metal Deck (Basic Roof : 50mm Fill over 38mm Metal Deck). ■ Ensure that the 3D Snapping and the Chain check boxes are not selected. ■ Ensure that the Tag check box is selected. ■
9.
262
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
12. In the view window, add beams from: ■ The wall at grid intersection A2 to the column at the intersection of the grid lines A.5 and 2. ■ The column at the intersection of the grid lines A.5 and 2 to the wall at the intersection of the grid lines A.5 and 1. ■ The column at the intersection of the grid lines A.5 and 2 to the wall at the intersection of the grid lines A.5 and 3.
13. Select W-Wide Flange : W16x26 (M_W-Wide Flange : W410x38.8) from the Type Selector drop-down.
14. In the view window, add beams from: ■ The midpoint of the horizontal W18x35 (W460x52) beam to the middle of the wall on grid line 1. ■ The midpoint of the horizontal W18x35 (W460x52) beam to the middle of the wall on grid line 3.
17. To create copies of the selected beams to the right of the grid line A.5: ■ On the Modify panel, click Mirror. ■ Select the grid line A.5 as the mirror line.
18. To add framing between the grid lines B and C, select the lower vertical beam that you just created.
15. Exit the Beam tool. 16. To add framing between the grid lines A.5 and B, select the horizontal W18x35 (W460x52) beam and the two vertical W16x26 (W410x38.8) beams. 19. To create multiple copies of the selected beam: ■ On the Modify panel, click Copy. ■ On the Options Bar, ensure that the Multiple check box is selected.
Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Structural Framing
■
263
20. In the view window: ■ Click the beam to specify the copy start point. ■ Move the cursor to the right and click the grid line B. ■ To place the second copy of the beam, move the cursor 12' (3600 mm) to the right and click.
5.
6. 7.
To check the position of the girder with respect to the grid line, click View tab > Graphics panel > Thin Lines. All the lines with a thin line weight display, making it easier to work in the view. However, this change does not affect printing; the lines still print with their assigned line weight. Thin Lines is a global setting that affects all views. In the view window, select the girder. To move the girder: ■ Click Modify Structural Framing tab > Modify panel > Move. ■ Click the midpoint of the bottom of the girder. Tip: Use the SM object snap hotkey, if necessary.
21. Exit the Copy tool.
Rotate Girders 1.
2. 3.
Open the Roof Section at Grid 2 view. Notice that the new roof support beams that you created, including the girder, slope with the roof. Zoom in to the top of the column at the grid line 2. To rotate the girder at the top of the column to a vertical position: ■ Select the girder.
Open the Instance Properties dialog box. Under Instance Parameters, Constraints, for Cross-Section Rotation, enter 1.19. Click OK to close the Instance Properties dialog box.
8.
Click grid line 2 to center the girder on the grid line.
9.
To restore the original line weight display, click View tab > Graphics panel > Thin Lines.
■ ■
4.
264
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
10. In the view window: ■ Enter ZE to view the completed sloped roof and beams. ■ Select the roof. 11. Open the Instance Properties dialog box for the roof. 12. To change the slope of the roof, in the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Instance Parameters, Dimensions, for Slope, enter 2. ■ Click OK. Notice that the roof and the support framing move together. However, the girder did not rotate automatically. 13. Rotate and move the girder for the new slope.
Add a Curved Canopy Roof 1. 2. 3.
In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box: ■ Select CANOPY from the Level list. ■ Ensure that Offset is set to 0' 0" (0.0 mm).
Click OK. On the Draw panel, select the Start-End-Radius Arc tool. On the Options Bar: ■ Select the Radius check box. ■ Enter 16' 0" (5000 mm). ■
5. 6.
Open the Canopy Elevation view. Click Architect & Site tab > Architect panel > Roof drop-down > Roof by Extrusion. In the Work Plane dialog box: ■ Select Grid : 4.1 from the Name list.
■
4.
7.
In the view window, click the intersection of the CANOPY level and the reference plane to the left of the grid line C.1.
8.
Click the intersection of the CANOPY level and the reference plane to the right of the grid line C.9.
Click OK.
Lesson: Creating Roofs and Adding Structural Framing
■
265
9.
To place the arc, click above the CANOPY level.
5. 6.
10. On the Element panel, click Roof Properties. 11. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Ensure that the Roof Type is set to 2" Fill over 1 1/2" Metal Deck (50mm Fill over 38mm Metal Deck). ■ For Extrusion Start, enter -1' 0" (-300 mm). ■ For Extrusion End, enter 19' 0" (5800 mm). ■ Click OK. 12. On the Roof panel, click Finish Roof to finish placing the roof.
7. 8.
Add Curved Beams 1. 2.
3.
4.
266
Activate the Beam tool. In the Work Plane dialog box: ■ Select Grid : 4.1 from the Name list. ■ Click OK. To place a curve beam for matching the curvature of the roof: ■ Select HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS8x4x1/2 (M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS355.6x152.4x12.7) from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ On the Draw panel, select the Pick Lines tool. In the view window, select the underside of the curved roof.
■
Chapter 7: Creating Floors and Roofs
9.
10. 11. 12.
13.
Open the CANOPY view and zoom to fit the view. In the view window, select the HSS8x4x1/2 (HSS355.6x152.4x12.7) beam along the grid line 4.1. Tip: Ensure that you select the curved beam you just placed and not the horizontal beam along grid line 4.1. Use the TAB key if necessary.
On the Modify panel, select the Array tool. On the Options Bar: ■ Ensure that Linear is selected. ■ Clear the Group and Associate check box. ■ For Number, enter 6. ■ Click the Move To: Last option. ■ Select the Constrain check box. In the view window: ■ Click the grid line 4.1. ■ Click the grid line 3.1. Open the default 3D view. Enter VG to open the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. To view the framing below the roofs, in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box: ■ For Roofs, select the Transparent check box. ■ Click OK in both dialog boxes. Close the file without saving changes.
Chapter
8 Creating Foundations You can model both shallow and deep foundations in Revit. Foundation systems can be designed so that as walls, columns, or soil conditions change, the foundation elements continuously change as well. In this chapter, you learn how to add foundations in a structural model.
Chapter Objective After completing this chapter, you will be able to add foundations to a structural model.
Chapter Overview
■
267
Lesson: Adding Foundations This lesson describes how to add foundations to a structural model. You begin the lesson by learning about foundations and the steps to create stepped walls and foundations. Then, you learn about some recommended practices for adding foundations. The lesson concludes with exercises on adding foundations and creating an elevator pit. Foundations distribute the load of a building to the underlying soil. You can model both shallow and deep foundations in Revit. The following illustration shows a deep foundation system with piles, pile caps, and grade beams.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
268
Describe foundations. Identify the steps to create stepped walls and foundations. State the recommended practices for adding foundations. Add foundations. Create an elevator pit.
■
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations
About Foundations Foundations provide support to building structures. Foundations created with Revit Structure are closely associated with the objects that they support.
Definition of Foundations Foundations are model elements that are used to represent the physical building foundation in a structural model. Foundations are typically modeled as either deep foundations or shallow foundations, depending on the soil conditions of the building site. Deep foundations consist of grade beams spanning pile caps supported on piles. Shallow foundations consist of wall footings, isolated column footings, and foundation slabs or mats.
Types of Foundations The following table describes the different types of foundations. Type
Description
Wall
System families that are used to place continuous wall footings for shallow foundations beneath walls where loads are distributed along a line.
Isolated
Component families that are placed beneath columns or other structural elements where loads are concentrated at a point. These include isolated column footings for shallow foundations and piles and pile caps for deep foundations.
Slab
System families that are used to place slabs and mat foundations beneath structural elements where loads are distributed across an area.
Lesson: Adding Foundations
■
269
Modifying Wall Foundation By default, wall foundations finish at the end of the foundation wall as shown below.
However, you can modify a wall foundation to extend past the end of the wall. The following illustration shows a wall foundation being extended past the end of the wall by selecting the foundation and dragging the end control.
270
■
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations
You can also modify the default end extension to a desired distance using the Type Properties dialog box. The following illustration shows the Default End Extension Length parameter in the Type Properties dialog box of the foundation wall.
Default End Extension Length is a type parameter; therefore, it affects all foundation wall elements of this type in the model.
Example of Foundations
Foundation with pile caps, a foundation slab, and beams
Foundation with column footings, a foundation slab, and wall foundations
Lesson: Adding Foundations
■
271
Creating Stepped Walls and Foundations Stepped walls and foundations are used to account for changes in the elevation of the ground surface on the exterior of a building. Based on the requirements, you can create stepped walls and foundations by placing separate walls, each with its top and base elevation set. You can also adjust the profile of a wall to perform the required steps.
Stepped wall with stepped foundations
Procedure: Creating Stepped Walls and Foundations The following steps describe how to create stepped walls and foundations by editing the profile of a wall. 1.
In the view window: ■ Place a structural wall of the required length. ■ Select the wall. Click Modify Walls tab > Modify Wall panel > Edit Profile. In the Go To View dialog box: ■ Select the required view. ■ Click Open View. On the Draw panel, click Line.
2. 3.
4.
272
■
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations
5.
In the view window, draw sketch lines corresponding to the required top and base offsets along the length of the wall.
6.
Use the Trim tool on the Edit panel to make the wall profile a continuous sketch with no gaps or overlaps. On the Wall panel, click Finish Wall. To place foundations, click Home tab > Foundation panel > Wall. The foundations adjust to the steps at the base of the wall.
7. 8.
Guidelines for Adding Foundations The following recommended practices help you add foundations with precision. ■ Use the Beam tool to place grade beams as foundations so that the beams are added with a corresponding analytical model line. When you use the Beam tool, the beams can be analyzed properly even in third-party software, and the beam schedules are populated accurately. ■ Create predesigned isolated footing types and load them into the template your organization uses. You can include parameters such as soil bearing pressure and concrete design strength for the depth and reinforcement of the footings. In addition, you can create and load a Footing Schedule into the template of your organization. This speeds up the process of modeling and documenting because the footing types already exist in the project and automatically populate the Footing Schedule as you add them to the model. ■ Create an additional concrete material that specifies fly ash and slag cement in place of Portland cement. You can assign the additional material created to concrete foundation elements and store it in a Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) project template. The additional concrete materials such as fly ash, slag cement, and other supplementary cementitious materials (SCM) can qualify for points toward LEED recycled content credits.
Lesson: Adding Foundations
■
273
Exercise: Add Foundations In this exercise, you create and add isolated foundations and wall foundations to a building model. You are working on a project for which the structural steel framework has been designed for gravity loads. You place appropriate footings under columns and beneath the basement and retaining walls. You do the following: ■ Add isolated footings at the column locations. ■ Add wall footings under the basement and retaining walls.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 8: Creating Foundations. Click Exercise: Add Foundations.
3. 4.
5.
Add Isolated Footings at the Column Locations 1. 2.
274
Open i_rst_essentials_foundations.rvt or m_rst_essentials_foundations.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. view. In the Project Browser, under Families, Structural Foundations, Footing-Rectangular (M_Footing-Rectangular), double-click 60" x 60" x 14" (1500 x 1500 x 350).
■
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations
6.
In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate to create a new footing type. In the Name dialog box: ■ For Name, enter 72" x 72" x 18" (1800 x 1800 x 450). ■ Click OK. In the Type Properties dialog box: ■ For Width, enter 6' 0" (1800 mm). ■ For Length, enter 6' 0" (1800 mm). ■ For Thickness, enter 1' 6" (450 mm). ■ Click OK. From the Project Browser, drag 72" x 72" x 18" (1800 x 1800 x 450) to the view window. Note: Isolated column footings can also be placed by clicking Isolated on the Foundation panel of the Home tab.
7.
In the view window, click grid intersection D2 to add a foundation. 8. Revit detects that the bottom of the column is set below the reference level of the current view and displays a warning message that an attached structural foundation will be moved to the bottom of the column. Close the warning message. 9. Click Place Isolated Foundation tab > Multiple panel > On Grids to add foundations on other grid intersections. 10. In the view window, CTRL+select grid lines 2, 3, E, and F. Foundations are displayed on grid intersections E2, E3, F2, and F3.
16. On the Multiple Selection panel, click Finish Selection. 17. Close the warning message indicating that an attached structural foundation will be moved to the bottom of the column.
Add Wall Footings Under the Basement and Retaining Walls 1. 2.
Open the BASEMENT view. Zoom in to the area enclosed by the basement walls.
3. 4.
Click Home tab > Foundation panel > Wall. Select Wall Foundation : Bearing Footing from the Type Selector drop-down. In the view window: ■ Place the cursor over a wall and press TAB to highlight the chain of walls. ■ Click to add the wall foundation.
5. 11. On the Multiple Selection panel, click Finish Selection. 12. Close the warning message indicating that an attached structural foundation will be moved to the bottom of the column. 13. From the Project Browser, drag 60" x 60" x 14" (1500 x 1500 x 350) to the view window. 14. On the Multiple panel, click At Columns to place footings at structural column locations. 15. In the view window, CTRL+select grid intersections D3, D4, E4, F4, G4, G3, G2, G1, F1, E1, D1, and C1 to add the exterior isolated footings.
Notice that portions of the wall footing and the isolated footing automatically display as dashed lines because they are below the BASEMENT slab.
Lesson: Adding Foundations
■
275
6. 7. 8. 9.
10.
11. 12.
13. 14.
276
On the Element panel, click Element Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog box, click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate to add foundations on other grid intersections. In the Name dialog box: ■ For Name, enter Retaining Footing. ■ Click OK. In the Type Properties dialog box: ■ For Structural Usage, select Retaining from the value list. ■ For Toe Length, enter 6' 0" (1800 mm). ■ For Heel Length, enter 2' 0" (600 mm). ■ Ensure that Foundation Thickness is set to 2' 0" (600 mm). ■ For Default End Extension Length, enter 2' 0" (600 mm). Click OK to close all open dialog boxes. In the view window, select the wall along the grid line A and between the grid lines 3 and 4 to place the Retaining Footing. Notice that the Retaining Footing is extended 2' 0" (600 mm) past the end of the retaining wall as specified in the Type Properties dialog box. Open the default 3D view and rotate it to view the underside of the building. Close the file without saving changes.
■
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations
Exercise: Create an Elevator Pit In this exercise, you create an elevator pit using structural walls and a slab. An architect has provided you with a 2D CAD plan view of the proposed elevator size and location. Based on the CAD import, you model the elevator pit.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 8: Creating Foundations. Click Exercise: Create an Elevator Pit.
Create Walls and a Slab for the Elevator Pit 1.
Open i_rst_essentials_elevator_pit.rvt or m_rst_essentials_elevator_pit.rvt. The file opens in the ELEVATOR PIT PLAN view. Notice that an imported CAD file is visible over an opening in the floor. Note: Detail lines are visible to indicate twin elevator locations. The illustrations in the metric dataset may vary from those shown here.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
In the view window: ■ Zoom in to the CAD plan and select the plan. ■ Right-click the selected CAD plan. Click Hide in View > Elements. Open the ELEVATOR PIT SECTION view. Tile the open views. Zoom all the views to fit on the screen. To add a slab edge to the perimeter of the elevator pit opening, click Home tab > Foundation panel > Slab drop-down > Slab Edge.
Lesson: Adding Foundations
■
277
7.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
13.
278
In the ELEVATOR PIT PLAN view: ■ Move the cursor to the edge of the elevator pit opening. ■ Press TAB to highlight all four sides of the opening. ■ Click to select all four sides.
Notice that the hidden lines represent the slab edge in the ELEVATOR PIT PLAN view and the slab edge is added in the ELEVATOR PIT SECTION view. Exit the Slab Edge tool. Click Home tab > Structure panel > Wall. Select Basic Wall : Foundation - 12" Concrete (Basic Wall : Foundation - 300 Concrete) from the Type Selector drop-down. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters: ■ Ensure that the Location Line is set to Finish Face: Interior. ■ Ensure that the Base Constraint is set to FIRST FLR. ■ For the Base Offset, enter -4' 0" (-1200 mm). ■ Ensure that the Top Constraint is set to Up to Level: FIRST FLR. ■ For the Top Offset, enter -1' 0" (-300 mm). Click OK.
■
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations
14. To create walls under the elevator pit opening: ■ On the Draw panel, click Rectangle. ■ In the ELEVATOR PIT PLAN view, click the upper-left and lower-right corners of the opening to place the structural walls. Notice that the walls have their interior faces toward the opening but not aligned to the opening.
15. To create a slab for the elevator pit, click Home tab > Foundation panel > Slab. 16. On the Element panel, click Floor Properties to set the properties of the slab for the elevator pit. 17. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Ensure that 12" Concrete (300 Concrete) is selected in the Type list. ■ Under Instance Parameters, verify that the Level is set to FIRST FLR. ■ For Height Offset From Level, enter -4' (-1200 mm). ■ Click OK. 18. On the Draw panel, ensure that Pick Walls is selected. 19. On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1' 0" (300 mm).
20. In the view window: ■ Move the cursor to the exterior face of one of the elevator pit walls. ■ Notice that the extension line is offset 1' 0" (300 mm) to the outside of the wall. ■ Press TAB to highlight all four walls. ■ Click to select all four walls.
21. On the Floor panel, click Finish Floor. 22. Click No when prompted regarding walls to be attached to the bottom of the floor. 23. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Adding Foundations
■
279
280
■
Chapter 8: Creating Foundations
Chapter
9 Stairs and Ramps Revit provides tools for quickly modeling stairs, ramps, and their associated railings. In this chapter, you learn more about developing your building model by including stairs and openings for the stairs. You also learn how to create various types of ramps and associated railings in a structural model.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■
Create stairs. Create various types of ramps.
Chapter Overview
■
281
Lesson: Creating Stairs This lesson describes how to create stairs. You begin the lesson by learning about stairs and railings. Then, you learn the steps and some recommended practices for creating stairs. The lesson concludes with an exercise on creating U-shaped and monolithic stairs. Revit provides tools to quickly create stairs and their associated railings. In a structural model with multiple similar levels, you can duplicate one set of stairs using special settings to array the stairs to all levels.
Multistory stairs with railings
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
282
Describe stairs and railings. Identify the steps to create stairs. State the recommended practices for creating stairs. Create U-shaped and monolithic stairs.
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
About Stairs and Railings You create a stair by sketching it in a plan view. The quickest and easiest way to create a stair is to sketch the run. When you sketch the run of a stair, the entire geometry of the stair, including risers, treads, and stringers, is automatically created. You can define straight runs, L-shaped runs with a platform, U-shaped stairs, spiral stairs, and any other required custom stair configuration.
L-shaped stair
Spiral stair
Revit automatically calculates the number of stair risers or rail balusters needed to span between levels. You can also override the automatic calculations and create custom stairs and railings. When you modify the outside boundary lines of stairs, the risers and runs are automatically updated.
Definition of Stairs and Railings Stairs and railings are building elements. Stairs are a flight of steps or a series of flights of steps with a supporting structure that joins different levels in a building. The supporting structure made of rails and upright members is called railings. Railings are automatically added to stairs or can be added as free-standing components to levels. You can also attach them to host components in a structural model, such as floors, stairs, or ramps. The railing structure is determined using the profile families loaded with the project, and can contain one or more rails. You can define the height, offset, and material for each rail. You can also decorate or customize railings to enhance their appearance. In Revit, stairs and railings are available as system families. They exist only in the project in which they are created and cannot be saved as component families. You do not load stairs and railings from the library. However, you can modify existing stair and railing types to suit your needs.
Lesson: Creating Stairs
■
283
Stair Properties By default, stairs rise from the current level (base level) to the next level up (top level). If stairs rise higher than one level, you can modify the Multistory Top Level parameter. You can adjust the Base Offset and Top Offset parameters to set the top or bottom of the stairs higher or lower than the default level. You can also modify stair dimension properties, such as stair width, number of risers, and tread depth.
Stair instance parameters
The default templates in Revit include predefined stair types. You can create new stair types by duplicating an existing stair type and editing the type parameters. You can specify the type parameters for treads, risers, and stringers. If you create stairs of one material, you also specify the Monolithic Stairs parameter.
Stair type parameters
284
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
Multistory Stairs In multistory structures, you can design one set of stairs and identical sets of stairs are automatically created up to the highest level defined in the stair properties. When you select the start point of the stairs in a plan view, the number of treads is calculated based on the distance between floors and the maximum riser height defined in the stair properties. The stairs are duplicated for each level until the level specified in the Multistory Top Level parameter is reached. If the levels have equal height, you do not need to make other adjustments.
Railing Types While sketching new stairs, you can specify the railing type to be used with the Railings Type tool. This tool is available only while you are sketching new stairs. You select the railing type from the list in the Railings Type dialog box. You can select None if you do not need a railing for the stairs, or Default to use the default railing.
If the railing type you want to specify is not listed in the Railings Type dialog box, you can create the stairs with any available railing type and later change the type.
Example of Stairs and Railings The following illustrations show examples of stairs and railings.
L-shaped stairs with railings
Spiral stairs with railings
Lesson: Creating Stairs
■
285
U-shaped stairs
Monolithic concrete stairs
Creating Stairs You create stairs in a structural model using the Stairs tool on the Circulation panel of the Home tab. This tool enables the sketch mode. In this mode, you can create stairs using the tools on the Draw panel of the Create Stairs Sketch tab. You can create stairs by sketching runs or by sketching riser and boundary lines.
Sketching Tools In sketch mode, three sketching tools are available: Run, Boundary, and Riser.
Sketching tools
The following table describes these tools.
286
Tool
Description
Run
Defines stairs by sketching runs of the stairs. When you sketch the runs, the boundary and risers are automatically created.
Boundary
Defines lines that are the side boundaries of the stairs and landings.
Riser
Creates lines that define the position of the risers for the stairs.
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
Procedure: Creating Stairs by Sketching Runs The following steps describe how to create stairs by sketching runs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Open a plan view in which you need to create stairs. Click Home tab > Circulation panel > Stairs. In sketch mode, modify the properties of the stairs, as required. Click Create Stairs Sketch tab > Draw panel > Run. In the view window, specify the start and endpoints of the first run of the stairs. A rectangular box is displayed, illustrating the extent of the stairs based on the current property settings. The counter below the footprint sketch indicates the number of risers created and the number of risers needed to complete the stairs. Specify the start points and endpoints for the second run of the stairs. Move the cursor beyond the end of the run rectangle to create the full run. Edit the outline of the run, if required. On the Stairs panel, click Finish Stairs to finish sketching the stairs.
Procedure: Creating Stairs by Sketching Boundary Lines and Risers The following steps describe how to create stairs by sketching boundary lines and risers. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7.
Open a plan view in which you need to create stairs. Click Home tab > Circulation panel > Stairs. Click Create Stairs Sketch tab > Draw panel > Boundary to begin sketching boundaries. In the view window, sketch the side boundaries for stairs, which can either be single lines or multisegmented lines, such as straight lines and arcs connected together. Note: Do not connect the left and right boundary lines. Boundary lines should be connected only with risers. On the Draw panel, click Riser. In the view window, sketch the risers between the boundary lines. Based on the stair parameters, the number of risers currently created and the number of risers that need to be created is displayed in the view window. The top riser line on a run of stairs represents the actual riser without a tread. On the Stairs panel, click Finish Stairs.
Lesson: Creating Stairs
■
287
Guidelines for Creating Stairs The following recommended practices help you create stairs effectively. ■ Change the direction of stairs using the flip control arrows instead of sketching them again in the other direction. This saves time and prevents errors. ■ When the level height of each floor in a multistory building is the same, set the Multistory Top Level parameter to set the stairs to rise from the base level to the level required. This saves time because you need to control only one stair object. ■ When creating U-shaped stairs, create reference planes to represent the centerline of the stairs when the stairwell plan is being designed. This saves time when sketching the stairs. ■ Use the Monolithic Stairs parameter to create cast-in-place concrete stairs that are commonly used at the entrances of a building, because such stairs are made of one material. ■ You can easily model stairs in Revit based on a CAD reference from an architect who uses traditional 2D CAD software. You can check the 3D stairs in Revit against the 2D CAD reference to ensure that the stairs fit in the given floor-to-floor heights and stair core dimensions. This helps to reduce the coordination effort and identify discrepancies, if any, in the initial stages of the design process.
Example The following illustration shows the use of the flip control arrow to change the direction of the stairs.
288
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
Exercise: Create U-Shaped and Monolithic Stairs In this exercise, you create U-shaped stairs in a structural model and monolithic stairs at the exterior of a building. You are working on a design project in which the structural framing is nearly complete and the floors are in place. You need to specify framing around a stair opening. First, you create U-shaped stairs using standard specifications to fit in the allotted space. You then add framing at the opening in the second floor to support the stairs. You also add concrete stairs at the exterior of the building. You do the following: ■ Create a U-shaped flight of stairs. ■ Modify the second floor framing to support the stairs. ■ Create monolithic concrete stairs.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps. Click Exercise: Create U-Shaped and Monolithic Stairs.
2. 3.
Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. To start creating the stairs, click Home tab > Circulation panel > Stairs. On the Create Stairs Sketch tab, Draw panel, ensure that Run is selected.
Create a U-Shaped Flight of Stairs 1.
Open i_rst_essentials_stairs.rvt or m_rst_essentials_stairs.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. STAIR PLAN view.
Lesson: Creating Stairs
■
289
4.
In the view window: ■ Click the upper end of the left reference plane to specify the starting point of the first run. ■ Move the cursor vertically down using the reference plane as a guide. The reference planes have been placed as guidelines for the stairs.
6.
To create the second run: ■ From the lower end of the stair run, move the cursor to the right and click the right reference plane to begin creating the second run. Revit shows a dashed extension line when the cursor is in line with the end of the first run. ■ Move the cursor up using the reference plane as a guide.
Click the reference plane to place the end of the stairs when the note indicates that you have created 24 risers and have 0 remaining. On the Stairs panel, click Finish Stairs. Notice that a railing is automatically added to the stairs. ■
5.
Click to complete the first run when the note indicates that you have created 12 risers and have 12 remaining. You might need to zoom in further if you cannot snap to 12 risers.
7.
Note: Completing the stair run at this point Modify the Second Floor Framing to Support ensures that the stairs are symmetrical and one run does not contain more stairs than the other. the Stairs 1. Open the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. 2. Zoom in to the stair location between the grid lines F3 and G4.
290
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
3.
In the view window: ■ Select the W12x26 (W310x38.7) beam that is interfering in the way of the right-stair stringer.
To move the beam, click the beam dimension and enter 9' 2" (2750 mm). ■ Press ENTER. The beam moves 8" (200 mm) to the right. Activate the Beam tool. Select W-Wide Flange : W12x26 (M_W-Wide Flange : W310x38.7) from the Type Selector drop-down. In the view window, to add a header to support the upper run of the stairs: ■ Click the beam that is to the left of the stairs.
10. You need to set the top of the beam at the same level as the rest of the framing, rather than at the top of the slab. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters, Constraints: ■ For z-Direction Justification, select Other. ■ For z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 5" (-125 mm). ■ Click OK. 11. On the View Control Bar, set Detail Level to Fine. 12. In the view window, zoom in to the beam and upper end of the stairs.
■
4. 5. 6.
13. To align the beam with the upper end of the stairs, click Modify tab > Edit panel > Align. 14. In the view window, click the top edge of the left stair run to set the reference point for alignment.
15. Click the lower edge of the beam.
Click the beam to the right of the stairs to place the beam. Exit the Beam tool. In the view window, select the new beam. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. ■
7. 8. 9.
Lesson: Creating Stairs
■
291
16. Click the padlock to lock the beam to the stairs.
10. Select the right end of the green detail line to complete the stair run.
Create Monolithic Concrete Stairs 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
7. 8.
9.
292
Open the FIRST FLR. CONCRETE STAIR view and zoom in to fit in the view window. Activate the Stairs tool. Click Create Stairs Sketch tab > Element panel > Stairs Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog box, select Monolithic Stair from the Type list. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters, Constraints: ■ For Base Offset, enter -2' 9" (-800 mm). ■ For Top Level, select FIRST FLR. from the value list. ■ Ensure that Top Offset is set to 0' 0" (0.0 mm). In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters, Dimensions: ■ For Width, enter 6' 0" (1800 mm). ■ Click OK. Click Create Stairs Sketch tab > Tools panel > Railing Type. In the Railings Type dialog box: ■ Select None. ■ Click OK. In the view window, select the left end of the detail line.
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
11. On the Stairs panel, click Finish Stairs. 12. Open the default 3D view and rotate it to view the front side of the building. 13. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Creating Ramps This lesson describes how to create various types of ramps. You begin the lesson by learning about ramps and the process of creating them. Next, you learn some recommended practices for creating ramps. The lesson concludes with an exercise on creating a ramp and modifying the railing. Revit provides tools to quickly create ramps and associated railings. You can use ramps to model pedestrian walkways and handicap-accessible entrances to buildings. In a parking structure with multiple similar levels, you can create a single ramp and use the multistory parameter to array the ramp to all levels.
Multistory ramps in a parking garage structure
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Describe ramps. Identify the steps in the process of creating ramps. State the recommended practices for creating ramps. Create a ramp and modify the railing.
Lesson: Creating Ramps
■
293
About Ramps You sketch a ramp in a plan view. The quickest and easiest way to create a ramp is to sketch the run. You can sketch straight or curved runs for the ramp. Revit automatically generates the ramp geometry, including the sloped segments, landings, and railings.
Definition of Ramps Ramps are uniformly sloping surfaces that connect levels at different elevations. You can create ramps with different configurations, such as L-shaped and circular, and you can edit them after they are placed in the model. When you create ramps, railings are automatically added to them. However, you can also add railings as free-standing components to levels.
Ramp Properties You can modify ramps by modifying their parameters in the Instance Properties dialog box. By default, ramps rise from the current or base level to the next or top level. If similar ramps continue up to several levels above, you can modify the Multistory Top Level parameter. You can also adjust the Base Offset and Top Offset parameters to set the top or bottom of the ramp higher or lower than the default level. In addition, you can change the width of the ramp by specifying a value for the Width parameter under Dimensions.
Ramp instance parameters
294
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
Type parameters are used to define the thickness, function, material, maximum incline length, maximum slope, and shape of the ramp. The following illustration shows the values in the Type Properties dialog box that define a handicap-accessible ramp. The illustration shows the maximum incline length of 30' 0" and the maximum slope of 1 to 12, which are requirements set by the Americans with Disability Act (ADA). You can create additional ramp types for other purposes.
Ramp type parameters
Multistory Ramps In multistory structures, you can design one ramp and identical sets of ramps are automatically created up to the highest level defined in the ramp properties. When you select the start point of the ramp in a plan view, the required length of each sloped segment is calculated based on the height between floors and the maximum inclined length and slope defined in the ramp properties. The ramp is duplicated for each level until the level specified in the Multistory Top Level parameter is reached. If the levels are equal in height, you do not need to make other adjustments.
Examples of Ramps The following illustrations show various types of ramps.
Circular ramp
Multisegment ramp
Lesson: Creating Ramps
■
295
Process of Creating Ramps You create ramps in a structural model by using the Ramp tool on the Circulation panel of the Home tab. This tool enables the sketch mode, in which you can define the ramp by defining the sketch run, riser, and boundary lines.
Sketching Tools In the sketch mode, three sketching tools are available: Run, Boundary, and Riser. You can use any of these sketching tools to sketch ramps.
When you create a ramp using these sketching tools, three lines of different colors are displayed. The following table lists the significance of each line color. Color
Significance
Green
Represents boundary lines
Blue
Represents the riser and run lines
Black
Represents the riser and run limit lines
The following illustration shows a ramp in a plan view:
296
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
Ramp run Ramp run limit Ramp boundary
Process: Creating Ramps The following illustration shows the process of creating ramps.
The following steps describe the process of creating ramps. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Activate the Ramp tool. Activate the Ramp tool on the Circulation panel of the Home tab. Specify the ramp properties. Specify the ramp properties in the Instance Properties dialog box. Create a new ramp type. Create a new ramp type, if required. You need to specify the type and instance parameters for the new ramp type. Sketch the ramp. From the Draw panel on the Create Ramp Sketch tab, use the Line option to sketch a straight ramp and the Center-Ends Arc option to sketch a circular ramp. When you draw a ramp, the software displays text below the ramp to indicate the length of the completed run and the length that remains to be drawn. Landings are automatically created between run segments. Edit ramp properties. Edit the ramp properties, if required. For example, you can edit the location of a ramp by adjusting the boundary, riser, and run element lines.
Lesson: Creating Ramps
■
297
Guidelines for Creating Ramps Follow these recommended practices to improve your efficiency and reduce the possibility of errors while creating ramps. ■ Create ramps in a manner similar to stairs. The software automatically calculates floor-to-floor heights for ramps, which increases efficiency. ■ Set the base and top conditions before drawing footprints when creating pedestrian ramps. This is because pedestrian ramps have strict controls on the slope and run length between landings. Setting the conditions before drawing footprints reduces errors and saves time. ■ Assign standard steel and concrete shape profiles to the railing structure and locate these shape profiles using the height parameter to act as the stringer support for the ramp. This saves time when you model the ramp framing and also ensures that the stringer supports match the slope of the ramp. ■ Create a solid ramp by setting the Shape parameter to Solid in the Type Properties dialog box. This is useful for modeling ramps with a constant bottom elevation. ■ Define standard railing styles and save them in the content library and template file of your organization. Creating the commonly used railing styles with their associated rail profiles in advance saves time during design creation.
298
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
Exercise: Create a Ramp and Modify the Railing In this exercise, you create a multisegment ramp by drawing its run in the sketch mode. You then modify the railing. You are working on a design project in which floor levels are set and the floors are placed. You need to design an exterior wheelchair ramp for the building entrance. You do the following: ■ Create a multisegment ramp. ■ Modify the railing.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps. Click Exercise: Create a Ramp and Modify the Railing.
2. 3.
Note: Lines and annotations are placed in this view as guidelines to assist you in sketching the run outline of the ramp. The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Click Home tab > Circulation panel > Ramp. Click Create Ramp Sketch > Element panel > Ramp Properties.
Create a Multisegment Ramp 1.
Open i_rst_essentials_ramp.rvt or m_rst_essentials_ramp.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. RAMP view.
Lesson: Creating Ramps
■
299
4.
5. 6.
In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Constraints, for Base Offset, enter -3' 0" (-900 mm). ■ Under Constraints, select FIRST FLR. from the Top Level list. ■ Under Dimensions, for Width, enter 6' (1800 mm). ■ Click OK. On the Draw panel, ensure that Run and Line are selected. In the view window: ■ Zoom in to the lower part of the drawing. ■ Click the guide line at RAMP START POINT.
7.
Click SECOND POINT, THIRD POINT, and FINAL POINT to create two run segments at right angles to each other with a landing in between.
8. 9.
On the Tools panel, click Railing Type. In the Railings Type dialog box: ■ Ensure that Default is selected. ■ Click OK. 10. On the Ramp panel, click Finish Ramp. 11. Open the 3D RAMP view.
Modify the Railing 1. 2.
300
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
In the view window, verify that the ramp is still selected. Open the Type Properties dialog box.
3.
In the Type Properties dialog box: ■ Under Other, for Shape, select Solid. ■ Click OK. Notice that the ramp is no longer of a constant thickness but is now a solid shape.
4.
In the view window, select one of the railings.
5. 6.
Open the Type Properties dialog box. In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, for Rail Structure, click Edit. In the Edit Rails dialog box: ■ Click Insert. ■ Rename New Rail(1) to Bottom Rail. ■ For Height, enter 2' 0" (600 mm). ■ Select Rectangular Handrail : Rectangular Handrail from the Profile list. ■ Click OK. In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, for Baluster Placement, click Edit.
7.
8.
9.
In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box: ■ Under Main Pattern, for Regular Baluster, for Dist. from Previous, enter 3' 0" (900 mm). ■ Select Spread Pattern To Fit from the Justify list.
10. Click OK to close all the dialog boxes. Notice the railing structure is modified.
11. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Creating Ramps
■
301
302
■
Chapter 9: Stairs and Ramps
Chapter
10 Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules Revit provides tools to quickly annotate a structural model. You use annotations to document a design and transform concept designs into construction document sets. In this chapter, you learn how to add dimensions and tags to a project. You also learn how to create a legend and work with different types of schedules.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Add dimensions and spot dimension symbols to a project. Work with text and tags. Create a legend with notes, annotation symbols, and legend components. Work with different types of schedules.
Chapter Overview
■
303
Lesson: Adding Dimensions This lesson describes how to add dimensions and spot dimension symbols to a project. You begin the lesson by learning about temporary dimensions, permanent dimensions, and spot dimension symbols. Next, you learn about some recommended practices for working with dimensions and spot dimension symbols. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding dimensions and spot symbols. You use temporary dimensions to quickly and accurately locate elements in a model and you use permanent dimensions to annotate the design. Further, you use spot dimensions to locate and annotate the elevation, coordinates, and slope of the structural members in a model. The following illustration shows temporary dimensions in blue and permanent dimensions and spot elevations in black.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
304
Describe temporary dimensions. Describe permanent dimensions. Describe spot dimension symbols. State the recommended practices for adding dimensions and spot dimension symbols. Add dimensions and spot symbols.
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
About Temporary Dimensions Temporary dimensions help place or move elements accurately in a structural model. These dimensions are either automatically displayed when you select an element or can be activated from the Options Bar.
Definition of Temporary Dimensions Temporary dimensions are the dimensions displayed in reference to the nearest element that is perpendicular or parallel to the element that you are creating or have selected. The following illustrations show the temporary dimensions in a structural steel framing plan.
Temporary dimensions while a beam is being created
Temporary dimensions when a placed beam is selected
To edit an element using its temporary dimension, you select the element and change the dimension value.
Listening Dimensions Temporary dimensions that appear when you create elements are called listening dimensions. Listening dimensions appear in bold, and they change as you create an element, such as a wall. You use listening dimensions to adjust the length or placement of elements. The following illustration shows the listening dimension that displays when you specify the end point of a beam placed at an angle in a plan view. Notice that the listening dimension begins at the specified start point of the beam.
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
305
You can modify the listening dimension while creating or after placing an element in the drawing by typing the required dimension directly. The following illustrations show the listening dimension when a beam is copied by entering a specific value for distance.
Specific value for distance being entered Beam is copied at the specified distance
When you enter dimension values using imperial units, you can enter either the feet and inch symbols, such as 10' 6 3/4", or just the feet and inch numbers separated by a space, such as 10 6 3/4. If you enter a value without specifying a unit, such as 10, it is interpreted as 10 feet (10').
306
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Modifying Temporary Dimension Settings You can specify temporary dimension settings and dimension increment values.
Specifying Temporary Dimension Settings You can specify settings such as snapping points for temporary dimensions. For example, you can specify that temporary dimensions snap to the centerlines or to the faces of a wall. To specify such preferences, you use the Temporary Dimension Properties dialog box, which you access from the Settings drop-down on the Project Settings panel of the Manage tab. You can set separate preferences for walls, doors, and windows.
Dimension Increments When you create an element, its temporary dimension value is incremented based on the amount you zoom in the view. The increment also depends on the dimension snap increment settings specified in the Snaps dialog box, which you access from the Settings drop-down. You can set increment values for length and angular dimensions separately using the Snaps dialog box.
Viewing Temporary Dimensions Temporary dimensions appear when you select a single element. However, when you select multiple elements, you can view the dimensions by selecting Activate Dimensions on the Options Bar. Then, you can use the temporary dimensions to move the selected elements. When you view an element's temporary dimensions, they might differ from those displayed while you were creating the element. This is because when you are creating an element, its temporary dimensions are displayed in reference to the nearest element, which might have changed.
Modifying Temporary Dimensions You can resize or move elements by modifying their temporary dimensions. You can move the witness lines of temporary dimensions to reference specific elements using the blue square control on the witness line. To change the reference of the temporary dimension, you drag the blue square control to a new reference object. In addition, by selecting the square, you can toggle the position of the witness line within a wall, such as from the wall centerline to its alternate faces. The changes you make to witness lines are not saved. The following illustrations show the witness line of the temporary dimension being repositioned within the wall.
Initial temporary dimension references the centerline of the wall
After modification, the temporary dimension toggles the references between the faces of the wall
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
307
Example of Temporary Dimensions The following illustration shows the temporary dimensions of a selected wall. The temporary dimensions indicate the length of the wall and its position relative to the other walls in the drawing.
About Permanent Dimensions Permanent dimensions are system families that have type and instance properties. You can customize these properties to create new dimension types that better suit your requirements. For example, you can change the tick mark, line weight, and color of dimensions. In addition, you can control the witness lines for dimensions. You can also set the font, height, and unit format for dimension text. You use permanent dimensions to document the structural design. These dimensions are view specific and adjust to the scale of a view. You do not need to create dimension styles for standard view scales. There are two methods by which you can associate permanent dimensions with an element. You can make temporary dimensions permanent by using the dimension symbol, or you can add permanent dimensions using the dimension tools on the Dimension panel of the Annotate tab.
Definition of Permanent Dimensions Permanent dimensions are the dimensions that you add to elements after placing them in a building model. Unlike temporary dimensions, permanent dimensions are visible even if the elements are not selected. Permanent dimensions occur in two states, modifiable and nonmodifiable. You can modify permanent dimensions for an element individually only when the element is selected. In the nonmodifiable state, you cannot edit the values of permanent dimensions because the element with which they are associated is not selected. You can select dimensions and change their properties, lock or unlock them, and apply equality constraints.
308
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
The following illustrations show the two states of permanent dimensions.
Modifiable state
Nonmodifiable state
Using a Dimension Symbol A dimension symbol appears near the temporary dimension of an element. You need to select this symbol to change a temporary dimension to permanent. The following illustrations show how to use a dimension symbol.
Before clicking the dimension symbol
After clicking the dimension symbol
Using Dimension Tools You can add three types of permanent dimensions using dimension tools. The following table describes the permanent dimension types that you can use. Types
Description
Linear
Placed between selected points and aligned either to the horizontal or to the vertical axis of the view.
Radial
Placed in the radial dimension of an arc.
Angular
Placed on multiple reference points that share a common intersection.
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
309
Specifying Wall Dimension Preferences You can specify the way a pointer snaps when you assign permanent dimensions to a wall. For example, you can specify the reference line that should be highlighted first. You can also specify the place where the pointer snaps first when you move it over a wall. You can make these specifications by selecting appropriate options from the Place Dimensions list on the Options Bar. The following illustration shows the Place Dimensions list on the Options Bar.
The Place Dimensions list is activated for all dimension types except the linear dimension.
Locking Permanent Dimensions When you add a permanent dimension to an element, an unlocked padlock appears near the dimension line. You can click the padlock and lock the permanent dimensions to maintain the dimensional relationships among the elements. The following illustrations show locked and unlocked permanent dimensions for a wall. When you constrain the wall to the grid at a distance of 1' - 6", the wall is locked to the grid and moves when the grid location changes.
Locked permanent dimensions
310
■
Unlocked permanent dimensions
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Overriding Permanent Dimensions You can change the text display of permanent dimensions by using the Dimension Text dialog box. You can replace the numeric value with text, and specify the text position above, before, after, or below the actual value.
Dimension Text dialog box
Editing Witness Lines You can add witness lines to a permanent dimension with the Edit Witness Lines option on the Options Bar. You can use this option to extend the existing dimension by placing additional dimension lines. The resulting dimension string is a single object. The following illustrations show the use of the Edit Witness Lines option to include dimensions for grid lines along the existing dimension string.
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
311
Single dimension selected
Adding witness lines using the Edit Witness Lines option
Example of Permanent Dimensions The following illustration shows examples of the different types of dimensions available in Revit, including aligned, linear, angle, radial, and arc length.
Arc Length Radial Angle Aligned Linear
312
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
About Spot Dimension Symbols Spot dimensions are assigned to structural elements to define their location and orientation in the structural model. These dimensions automatically update if the structural element is relocated in the model.
Definition of Spot Dimension Symbols Spot dimension symbols are symbols that display the elevation, coordinate location, or slope of specific elements in a structural model. To add spot dimension symbols, you use the Spot Elevation, Spot Coordinate, and Spot Slope tools on the Dimension panel of the Annotate tab.
Types of Spot Dimension Symbols The three types of spot dimension symbols include spot elevations, spot coordinates, and spot slopes. Spot elevations are placed on objects to display the elevation of objects. For example, structural plans have spot elevations for footings that are at differing elevations. Spot elevations can show the actual or selected elevation, top, bottom, or top and bottom elevations. Spot coordinates are placed on objects to display the north-south and east-west coordinates of objects in a structural model. The spot coordinates locate elements, such as a reference to a site plan or survey marker, that need to be identified precisely in the structural model. You can have spot elevations with or without leader lines and with or without shoulders. Leader lines connect an annotation to an element or part of the building model in a view. You can display leader lines by selecting the Leader check box on the Options Bar. With the Leader check box selected, you can also select the Shoulder check box on the Options Bar. This adds a bend to the spot elevation leader. Spot slopes are added to sloping members to display the direction and magnitude of the slope. Spot slopes can be displayed as arrows or triangles. By default, the value of the slope displays according to the project units; however, you can override the format by editing the Units parameter in the Format dialog box.
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
313
Examples of Spot Dimension Symbols The following illustrations show examples of spot dimension symbols.
Spot elevation with a leader line and a shoulder
314
■
Spot coordinate
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Spot slope with a triangular shape to display the slope of a concrete slab
Spot elevation showing the top and bottom elevations of an element
Guidelines for Adding Dimensions The following recommended practices help you add dimensions effectively in a project. ■ Create separate views for documentation and distinguish them from views used for modeling because annotation elements belong to the view and are lost if the view is deleted. Creating and distinguishing separate views helps prevent annotation elements from being inadvertently modified or deleted. ■ Set the scale of the view before adding the annotation elements. The size of annotation elements automatically adjusts to changes in the scale of the view. However, the relative position of the annotation elements may need adjustment depending on how drastic the scale change. Establishing and maintaining the scale of the view prior to adding annotation speeds up the documentation process. ■ Customize the default annotation elements according to your organization’s standard font and linework. This makes the sheets created in Revit consistent with the organization’s standards and enhances the pace of document production for a project. ■ Lock permanent dimensions only when necessary. Locking multiple permanent dimensions can over constrain the structural model, making it difficult to modify the design later.
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
315
Exercise: Add Dimensions and Spot Symbols In this exercise, you add individual dimensions, dimensions to an entire wall, spot dimension symbols to show the top of footing elevations, and a spot slope symbol to call out the slope of the roof. You are working on a design project that has moved into the construction documentation phase. You need to place annotations in a plan view. You do the following: ■ Add dimensions to a concrete wall. ■ Add dimensions to an entire wall. ■ Add spot dimension symbols. ■ Add a spot slope symbol.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise
2.
Zoom in to the center of the vertical wall at grid line C.
3.
Click Annotate tab > Dimension panel > Aligned.
To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules. Click Exercise: Add Dimensions and Spot Symbols.
Add Dimensions to a Concrete Wall 1.
316
Open i_rst_essentials_dim_symb.rvt or m_rst_essentials_dim_symb.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here.
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
4. 5.
6.
7.
On the Place Dimensions tab, Dimension panel, ensure that Aligned is selected. On the Options Bar, ensure that: ■ Wall Faces is selected from the Place Dimensions list. ■ Individual References is selected from the Pick list. To add the dimension, in the view window: ■ Click the left face of the vertical wall. ■ Click the right face of the vertical wall. ■ Click to the right of the vertical wall.
4.
In the view window, click the upper face of the concrete wall between grid intersections B2 and C2 to establish the start point for adding dimensions.
5.
Move the cursor up and click to place the dimension string, as shown.
6.
On the Options Bar, click Options to place another dimension with different properties. To specify the setting for the new dimension, in the Auto Dimension Options dialog box: ■ Select the Intersecting Walls check box. ■ Click OK. In the view window, click the concrete wall between grid intersections B2 and C2.
Click the square blue dot grip below the dimension text and drag it to the right to relocate the dimension text outside the wall. Notice the curved leader that is displayed as you drag the dimension text.
8. 9.
Exit the Aligned dimension tool. In the view window, select the dimension that you just created. 10. To access the Dimension Text dialog box, click the dimension text 1' - 0" (300). 11. In the Dimension Text dialog box: ■ Under Text Fields, for Suffix, enter TYP. ■ Click OK. 12. Enter ZP to zoom to previous view.
Add Dimensions to an Entire Wall 1. 2.
3.
Activate the Aligned dimension tool. To add dimensions to an entire wall, on the Options Bar: ■ Select Entire Walls from the Pick list. ■ Click Options. To specify the settings for the dimension, in the Auto Dimension Options dialog box: ■ Ensure that all the check boxes are cleared. ■ Click OK.
7.
8.
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
317
9.
In the view window: ■ Move the cursor up to locate the new dimension string just above the previous dimension. ■ Click to place the new dimension. Notice the difference in the two dimension strings.
10. Exit the Aligned dimension tool. 11. Zoom in to the view window and reposition the dimension strings away from the wall, as shown.
3. 4. 5.
Click Annotate tab > Dimension panel > Spot Elevation to start adding the spot dimension symbol. Ensure that Spot Elevations : Dot Leader is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar, ensure that: ■ The Leader check box is selected. ■ The Shoulder check box is selected. ■ Actual (Selected) Elevation is selected from the Display Elevations list.
Add Spot Dimension Symbols 1. 2.
318
Enter ZE to zoom to extents. In the view window, zoom in to the footings at grid intersections D2 and D3, above and below the elevator pit.
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
6.
To create a new spot elevation, in the view window: ■ Click the upper-left corner of the spread footing at the top of the elevator pit to create the first leader point. ■ Move the cursor up and to the left of the spread footing. Click to create the second leader point. ■ Move the cursor to the left of the second leader point. Click to create the third leader point. Notice that the dimension -5' - 0" (-1500) is displayed, which is the elevation of the top of the footing below the finished floor.
Exit the Spot Elevation tool. In the view window, select the spot dimension symbol that you just created. 9. To specify the properties of the spot dimension symbol, open the Instance Properties dialog box. 10. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Text, for Single/Upper Value Prefix, enter TOF. ■ Click OK. 11. Add a second spot dimension symbol in the lower-right corner of the spread footing at grid line 3 below the elevator pit, as shown.
12. For the new dimension, specify the prefix as TOF.
13. In the view window, select the lower spread footing. Notice that the dimension displayed now is active.
7. 8.
14. In the view window: ■ Click the TOF -1' - 6" (TOF -450) dimension text. ■ Enter -3' (-900 mm). Press ENTER.
The footing is still selected. 15. To view the properties of the lower spread footing, open the Instance Properties dialog box.
Lesson: Adding Dimensions
■
319
16. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Notice that the Offset is -3' 0" (-900.0), which indicates that you have moved the footing by editing the spot dimension value.
5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
■
Exit the Spot Slope tool. In the view window, select the roof. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. To change the slope value, in the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Dimensions, for Slope, enter 2.25. ■ Click OK. Notice that the spot slope symbol has changed. Close the file without saving changes.
Click Cancel.
Add a Spot Slope Symbol 1. 2. 3.
Open the Elevation 2 - a view. Click Annotate tab > Dimension panel > Spot Slope. In the view window: ■ Zoom in to the ROOF level. ■ Click near the intersection of the roof and the grid line 2.
4.
Move the cursor up and click above the roof to place the spot slope symbol.
320
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags This lesson describes how to work with text and tags. You begin the lesson by learning about text and tags. Then, you learn the process of adding text and the steps to set text placement parameters. You also learn about some recommended practices for working with text and tags. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding column and beam tags to a structural framing design. Annotations, such as text and tags, are an important part of construction documents. Annotations provide specific instructions that are necessary for fabricators and constructors to understand the structural design of a building. You use text to provide descriptive information about structural elements and tags to label structural elements. The following illustration shows a plan view with footing tags and text notes specifying the slab construction and concrete piers.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Describe text. Describe tags. Identify the steps in the process of adding tags. Set text placement parameters. State the recommended practices for working with text and tags. Add column and beam tags to a structural framing design.
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags
■
321
About Text As part of construction documentation, text is added to clearly convey the structural design intent of the building. You can add text notes to views and sheets to document instructions and specifications of building materials and design requirements.
Definition of Text Text is a system family with predefined parameters specific to the current project. You can use existing text types or create additional text types by duplicating the existing types and modifying type parameters, such as font, size, and width factor. Text types can also be transferred across projects. Text elements are view-specific and automatically change size according to the view scale. You add text to a drawing as a text note using the Text tool. When you add text, the text and the leaders automatically snap into alignment with other text and leaders in the view. After adding text, you can format its various parameters, such as size, font, justification, width, underlining, lineweight, background, and color. To keep the view and graphics clear and readable, you can move text to different positions. You can also edit and wrap text. In addition, you can copy or paste text from other applications, such as Microsoft Word. You can add or remove leaders of a text note at any time, if required.
Example of Text The following illustration shows a roof framing plan view with text notes.
322
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
About Tags Tags are annotations that display parametric information about the elements with which they are associated. Tags use unique symbols to represent each structural element. Unlike text, the values displayed in tags are updated automatically when the structural model is updated. Tags are viewspecific, can be placed with or without leaders, and have horizontal or vertical orientation. Tags automatically adjust to the view scale and align with other tags in the view. You can modify tags by changing their position in a view, turning their leaders on or off, and changing their orientation. You can tag a structural element with more than one tag if you have multiple tag types loaded for that element. Tags can be automatically assigned when you add the corresponding structural element to the model. For the structural elements that do not have the corresponding preloaded tags, you need to load the tags from the software library. Revit provides predefined tag families for each category of structural elements. Some of these tags, such as structural framing, column, and foundation tags, are preloaded into the default project templates. You can create custom tags by editing the predefined tag family files, graphics, and element parameters.
Types of Tags The following table describes the various types of predefined and preloaded tags. Type
Description
Structural Framing Tag
Displays the Type Name property of a structural framing member. This tag rotates with its associated element.
Structural Framing Tag-w-Studs-Camber
Displays the Type Name, Number of Studs, and Camber Size properties of a steel structural framing member. This tag rotates with its associated element.
Structural Column Tag
Displays the Type Name property of a structural column member. This tag orients to the view.
Structural Column Tag-45
Displays the Type Name property of a structural column member at a 45degree angle to the column member. This tag orients to the view.
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags
■
323
Tag Options You can place tags in a view using the tag options available in the Tag drop-down on the Tag panel of the Annotate tab. The Tag drop-down provides three options: By Category, Multi-Category, and Material.
The following table describes the various tag options. Option
Description
By Category
Automatically identifies the category of the object being tagged and adds the appropriate tag.
Multi-Category
Uses shared parameters to add tags that work across categories. Multicategory tags are custom objects.
Material
Displays a question mark when first placed. You need to specify a value for the material parameter, which is then displayed in the tag.
Beam Annotations Dialog Box Using the Beam Annotations dialog box, you can place or remove structural framing tags and spot elevation symbols on selected or all beams in a view. To access the Beam Annotations dialog box, you use the Beam Annotations tool on the Tag panel of the Place Text tab. You can also specify the position of framing tags or spot elevation symbols at the start, middle, or end of beams.
324
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Beam Annotations dialog box
Examples of Tags The following illustrations show different tags.
Structural framing tags with type, stud, and camber values
Foundation tags with size and elevation values
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags
■
325
Vertical brace tags with size values
Process of Adding Tags You can add tags to the selected or all structural framing members in a view.
Process: Adding Tags The following illustration shows the process of adding tags.
The following steps describe the process of adding tags. 1.
Activate the Tag tool. Activate the Tag tool on the Tag panel of the Annotate tab. Note: You can use the Tag All tool on the Tag panel of the Annotation tab to tag all elements of one type, such as columns in the current view. Specify tag properties. Specify the tag properties, such as tag orientation and leader length, on the Options Bar. Place tags. Place tags using reference lines to align the tag with the nearby tags and text. You can change the tag orientation and add or remove a leader after tag placement.
2. 3.
326
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Setting Text Placement Parameters To add text notation to a structural model, you use the Text tool. Then, you can set text placement parameters for the added text notation. Text placement parameters allow you to define the left, center, or right justification of the text.
After placing text in a particular view, you can copy the text to the Clipboard and paste it to other views. This eliminates the need to add text separately for each view.
Procedure: Setting Text Placement Parameters The following steps describe how to set text placement parameters for text notation. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Annotate tab > Text panel > Text. Select a text style from the Type Selector drop-down. Click Place Text tab > Alignment panel > Left, Center, or Right. On the Leader panel, use the appropriate leader options for the text note. The leader options are One Segment, Two Segments, Curved, and No Leader.
Guidelines for Working with Text and Tags The following recommended practices help you work efficiently with text and tags. ■ Use the Tag All tool on the Tag panel of the Annotate tab to tag all elements of a particular category in a drawing. This saves time during documentation. ■ Use the alignment planes to align a tag with other nearby tags. Aligning tags helps you easily decipher a view with a lot of tags, text, and dimensions. The alignment planes also apply to text elements. ■ Create a custom tag to display the Type Mark parameter for steel structural framing and column members. You can then use the Type Mark parameter by manually assigning the nominal dimensions of the beam to the parameter. For example, in the design development phase, you can assign the custom tag type that displays Type Mark of W14 to indicate the beam depth. Later, in the construction documentation phase, you can change the tag type to the standard tag that displays Type Name of W14 x 22 to indicate the full size of the beam. This will speed up the construction documentation process. ■ Add leaders to the tags to clearly mark the object of reference and avoid any interference with the display of other objects. Adding leaders helps you position the tags neatly when framing members are closely placed. ■ Use the spelling checker available on the Text panel of the Annotate tab to make sure that the text and tags do not contain any spelling errors. ■ Create different types of text by adding leaders with different end symbols, such as a dot and a large arrow. You can then use different text symbols for specific situations or conditions. ■ Create separate views for documentation and distinguish them from the views used for modeling because annotation elements belong to the view and will be lost if the view is deleted. Creating and distinguishing separate views will help prevent annotation elements from being inadvertently manipulated or deleted.
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags
■
327
■
■
Set the scale of the view before adding annotation elements. The size of annotation elements will automatically adjust to the changes in the scale of the view. However, the relative position of the annotation elements may need to be adjusted depending on how drastically the scale has changed. Establishing and maintaining the scale of the view prior to adding annotation elements will speed up the documentation process. Customize the default text, tags, dimensions, and symbols according to your organization’s standard font and linework. This enables the sheets produced in Revit to blend with the organization’s standards and enhances the pace of document production for a project.
Example The following illustrations show the use of leaders to position the tag neatly.
Default tag position
328
■
Repositioned tag
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Exercise: Add Column and Beam Tags In this exercise, you add column and beam tags and reposition them to improve their visibility. You are working on a project for which the structural framing design is complete. You need to add text and tag annotations to the framing and foundation plans to clearly designate the element size and requirements of the structural design. You do the following: ■ Add column tags. ■ Add text notes. ■ Add beam tags.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules. Click Exercise: Add Column and Beam Tags.
Add Column Tags 1.
2. 3.
Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Click Annotate tab > Tag panel > Tag drop-down > By Category. On the Options Bar: ■ Ensure that Horizontal is selected from the Horizontal/Vertical list to set the orientation of the tag. ■ Ensure that the Leader check box is selected. ■ For Leader Length, enter 3/4" (19 mm).
Open i_rst_essentials_text_tags.rvt or m_rst_essentials_text_tags.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. structural plan view.
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags
■
329
4.
In the view window: ■ Click the bottom of the columns at the grid intersections E1 and F1 to add column tags. ■ Ensure that the column tags are added below the columns, not on the sides.
8. 9.
In the view window, select the column tag for the column at the grid intersection F1. To move the tag, drag the tag grip to the left.
In the view window: ■ Click the top of the columns at the grid intersections E2 and F2 to add column tags. ■ Ensure that the column tags are added above the columns, not on the sides.
10. Enter ZP to zoom out to the previous view. 11. In the view window: ■ Select the column tag at the grid intersection E1 to reposition it. ■ Drag the column tag to the right until a horizontal dashed line appears. The dashed line helps you align this tag with the tag at the grid intersection F1.
6.
In the view window, zoom in to the column at grid intersection F1.
12. Drag the column tags at the grid intersections E2 and F2 until they vertically align with the tags on the grid line 1. Tip: Use the horizontal and vertical dashed alignment lines to align the tags.
7.
Exit the Tag tool.
5.
330
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
13. To clear the selection set, press ESC. 14. In the view window, CTRL+select the columns at the grid intersections E2 and F2. 15. Select W-Wide Flange-Column : W10x49 (M_WWide Flange-Column : W250X73) from the Type Selector drop-down to change the column type. Notice that the tags update to show the change in the column type.
6.
In the view window: ■ Select the text. ■ Use the drag controls to adjust the text string.
7.
To add leaders, on the Modify Text Notes tab, Leader panel: ■ Click Left Arc. ■ Click Right Arc. In the view window, use the drag controls to adjust the leader.
Add Text Notes 1. 2.
3.
Click Annotate tab > Text panel > Text. To set the text properties, on the Place Text tab, ensure that: ■ On the Element panel, 3/32" Arial (2.5mm Arial) is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ On the Alignment panel, Center is selected. ■ On the Leader panel, No Leader is selected. In the view window, click in the center of the bay.
8.
4. 5.
Enter 4" SLAB ON GRADE (100mm SLAB ON GRADE) in the text box. Exit the Text tool.
Add Beam Tags 1. 2. 3.
Open the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. Activate the Tag By Category tool. On the Options Bar: ■ Clear the Leader check box to add tags without leaders. ■ Click Tags.
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags
■
331
4.
5.
In the Tags dialog box: ■ Under Category, for Structural Framing, select Structural Framing Tag-w-StudsCamber : Standard from the Loaded Tags list. ■ Click OK. In the view window, between grid intersections E1 and G2: ■ Place the cursor over the first untagged vertical beam from the left. The beam is highlighted and a tag is displayed. ■ Click the beam to place the tag.
6.
Click the remaining three untagged vertical beams between the grid intersections E1 and G2 to tag them.
7. 8.
Exit the Tag By Category tool. In the view window, CTRL+select the four beams you just tagged to modify their tags.
9.
Open the Instance Properties dialog box.
332
■
10. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters, Structural: ■ For Camber Size, enter c=1" (c=25mm). ■ For Number of Studs, enter [22]. ■ Click OK to update the beam tags.
11. Click Annotate tab > Tag panel > Beam Annotations. 12. In the Beam Annotations dialog box: ■ Under Placement, click All Beams in Current Plan View to display tags for all beams in the view. ■ Select the Remove Existing Beam Tags and Spot Elevations check box. ■ Under Annotation Location and Type, on the Level Beams in Plan tab, for the Middle field appearing on one side of the beam, click […] to place tags in the middle of one side of the beams.
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
13. In the Select Annotation Type dialog box: ■ Under Select Element to Place, click Structural Framing Tag. ■ Under Structural Framing Tag, select Structural Framing Tag : Standard from the Type list. ■ Click OK. 14. In the Beam Annotations dialog box, under Annotation Location and Type, on the Level Beams in Plan tab, for the Middle field appearing on the other side of the beam, click […] to place tags in the middle of the beams.
15. In the Select Annotation Type dialog box: ■ Under Select Element to Place, click Spot Elevation. ■ Under Spot Elevation, ensure that Plan is selected from the Type list. ■ Ensure that Current Level is selected from the Relative Base list. ■ Select Top Elevation from the Display Elevation list. ■ Click OK. 16. Click OK to close the Beam Annotations dialog box. All beams in the view now display tags. Notice that the Standard Beam tags display above the beam and the elevations of the beams relative to the level are displayed below the beam. 17. Tile all the open views. 18. Zoom all the views to fit on the screen. 19. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Working with Text and Tags
■
333
Lesson: Creating Legends This lesson describes how to create a legend with notes, annotation symbols, and legend components. You begin the lesson by learning about legends. Then, you learn about some recommended practices for creating legends. The lesson concludes with an exercise on creating a legend with annotation symbols, notes, and legend components. Legends are used to define the standard notes and symbols used in the construction documentation of a building project. You can store legends in a project template file for use on multiple projects.
Legend on a drawing sheet
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■
334
Describe legends. State the recommended practices for creating legends. Create a legend with annotation symbols, notes, and legend components.
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
About Legends You use legends to explain the symbols, abbreviations, and elements used in construction documentation. You can also use legends to add notes to multiple plan and elevation sheets.
Definition of Legends A legend is a view containing 2D annotation elements, including text, dimensions, symbols, tags, filled regions, and detail lines. Typically, legends appear as tables with one column for graphic symbols and another column for explanatory text that defines symbols used in a particular view or in the entire project. You can use the same legend on multiple drawing sheets.
Legend Components Legend components are 2D representations of model elements that you can add to a legend view. Some examples of legend components are types of columns, beams, floors, and walls. Legend components are only available for the model elements currently loaded into the project. You can add these components to a legend using the Legend Component tool available in the Component dropdown on the Detail panel of the Annotate tab. Components in legends have detail level properties that you can control independent of the detail level of the legend. You can use the legend visibility settings to turn on or off the display of subcategories of component families.
Tools for Creating Legends You use annotation tools to add information to the legend components in a legend view. Text and Dimension are two commonly used annotation tools. Using the Text tool, you can specify the name or description for a legend component. Using the Dimension tool, you can add dimensions to a legend component to specify its size and the distance between two points within the component.
Lesson: Creating Legends
■
335
Annotation Symbol Legends Annotation symbols in a legend represent sheet annotations such as section heads and elevation symbols. To place annotation symbols in a legend, you use the Symbol tool on the Symbol panel of the Annotate tab. After adding the annotation symbols, you add text to the legend to describe them.
Annotation symbols
Model Element Legends Model element legends are symbolic representations of model elements with some descriptive text. You create a model element legend by creating a legend view and then adding model elements using the Legend Component tool available in the Component drop-down on the Detail panel of the Annotate tab.
Model elements and notes added to a legend
336
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
You can use legend views to create typical details that are parametrically linked to the model view. When the type parameters for the model element change, the model element in the legend view also changes.
Examples of Legends The following illustrations show some examples of legends.
Legend with annotation symbols
Legend with reinforcing steel detail components
Lesson: Creating Legends
■
337
Legend with pile cap model elements, detail components, dimensions, and text
Guidelines for Creating Legends The following recommended practices help you create legends effectively. ■ Set up legends based on the standard documentation of your organization and load the legends into the project templates. Then, you can place legends on the required sheets from the templates. Placing legends saves time when you are creating a project's construction documents. ■ Import CAD files into legends to reuse previously developed legend content. This helps you avoid rework and errors and allows you to use the same legend content in different project files. ■ Copy and paste legend information from one project file to another because you cannot save legend views as separate files. This helps you save time and increase efficiency while duplicating information across multiple project files. ■ Use legend views for standard framing plan notes when working on multistory projects or projects with multiple partial plan views. When you use a legend view, any change to the notes in the legend view is automatically updated on all project sheets. This saves time and reduces errors because legend views can be placed on multiple sheets.
338
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Exercise: Create a Legend In this exercise, you create a legend to add floor framing notes for the Construction Documentation phase. You then add annotation symbols, notes, and legend components to the legend. You are working on a project that is moving into the Construction Documentation phase. You want to prepare notes with instructions and symbols used in the floor plan views. You can add these notes to multiple framing plan sheets. You do the following: ■ Add text notes. ■ Add annotation symbols with additional text notes. ■ Add legend components with additional text notes.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules. Click Exercise: Create a Legend.
Add Text Notes
1. 2. 3.
4.
Open i_rst_essentials_legend.rvt or m_rst_essentials_legend.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. structural plan view. Click View tab > Create panel > Legends dropdown > Legend. In the New Legend View dialog box: ■ For Name, enter 2ND FLR NOTES. ■ Ensure that Scale is set to 1/4" = 1'-0" (1 : 50). ■ Click OK. On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse.
Lesson: Creating Legends
■
339
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
To add a text note, click Annotate tab > Text panel > Text. Select Text : 1/8" Arial (3.5mm Arial) from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Place Text tab, Alignment panel, ensure that Left is selected. On the Place Text tab, Leader panel, ensure that No Leader is selected. Click in the upper part of the view window to place a text box. Click Place Text tab > Format panel > Bold. In the text box that you just placed, enter FLOOR FRAMING NOTES. To complete the text string, click outside the text box. Select Text : 3/32" Arial (2.5mm Arial) from the Type Selector drop-down. In the view window, click a point below the first note to place the second note. While placing the second note, use the blue reference lines to align it with the first note.
3.
In the view window, click below the second text box to place the symbol.
4. 5.
Exit the Symbol tool. In the view window, select the annotation symbol to modify the size of the symbol. Open the Instance Properties dialog box for the symbol. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Other, for Top, Right, Left, and Bottom, enter 1/4" (6 mm). ■ Click OK. In the view window, drag the annotation symbol closer to the second text box to realign it.
6. 7.
8.
15. In the second text box, enter the following text: 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, EQUALLY SPACE BEAMS. 2. T.O.S. INDICATES TOP OF STEEL. 3. PLAN SYMBOLS: Note: Add a blank line after each item in the list. 16. Exit the Text tool. 17. Zoom to fit to view the complete legend.
9.
To add a note for the annotation symbol, activate the Text tool. 10. In the view window, click to the right of the annotation symbol to add a note. 11. To add text in the note for the annotation symbol: ■ In the new text box, enter - INDICATES SPAN EXTENTS. ■ Click outside the text box.
Add Annotation Symbols with Additional Text Notes 1. 2.
340
Click Annotate tab > Symbol panel > Symbol to add an annotation symbol. Ensure that Span Direction : One Way Slab (M_Span Direction : One Way Slab) is selected in the Type Selector drop-down.
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
12. Add a text note below the new note with text - INDICATES SPAN DIRECTION- INDICATES SPAN DIRECTION
4.
5.
To add the second legend component, on the Options Bar, select Structural Columns : HSS-Hollow Structural SectionColumn : HSS6X6X.375 (Structural Columns : M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section-Column : HSS152.4x152.4x9.5) from the Family list. In the view window, place the hollow column symbol below the wide flange column symbol.
13. Exit the Text tool. 14. In the view window, select the note containing the text - INDICATES SPAN EXTENTS. 15. Click Modify Text Notes tab > Leader panel > Left Straight to add a leader to the note. 16. In the view window, reposition the note and then drag the leader grip at the arrow head to resize the leader, as shown. 6. 7. 17. Add a leader to the note containing the text - INDICATES SPAN DIRECTION and adjust the leader as shown.
Add Legend Components with Additional Text Notes 1. 2.
3.
Activate the Text tool. To add a note to the wide flange column symbol, in the view window: ■ Click to place a text box to the right of the wide flange column symbol. ■ Enter - INDICATES WIDE FLANGE STEEL COLUMN. ■ Click outside the text box. 8. Add a note to the right of the hollow column symbol and enter the text - INDICATES HOLLOW STEEL COLUMN. 9. Exit the Text tool. 10. Select the notes for the symbols and use the arrow keys to reposition the notes as required. 11. Zoom to fit the view.
Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Component drop-down > Legend Component. On the Options Bar: ■ Select Structural Columns : W-Wide FlangeColumn : W10x33 (Structural Columns : M_W-Wide Flange-Column : W250x49.1) from the Family list. ■ Verify that Floor Plan is selected from the View list. In the view window, click below the slab symbol to place the wide flange column symbol. 12. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Creating Legends
■
341
Lesson: Working with Schedules This lesson describes how to work with different types of schedules. You begin the lesson by learning about schedules. Next, you learn the steps and some recommended practices for working with schedules. The lesson concludes with an exercise on creating schedules. Schedules are used to quantify and document a structural model. Using scheduling tools, you can filter, sort, and group elements as needed to develop quantity takeoffs, including the volume of concrete or the weight of steel. These quantities can help you make design decisions that result in more efficient building structures. You can also generate schedules for construction documentation, including footing and beam schedules.
Structural column schedule
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
342
Describe schedules. Identify the steps for working with schedules. State the recommended practices for working with schedules. Create schedules.
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
About Schedules In conventional CAD applications, you need to manually update schedules that provide information about the structural components contained in a project. These schedules inevitably become out of date after changes are made to the structural design, and there is always a possibility of errors. In Revit, you can create schedules at any stage in the design process. Schedules are created as views, and all views are associated with the same underlying model; therefore, when changes are made to the model in any view, schedules are automatically updated. This is because the information displayed in a schedule is contained in the properties of the components that you place in a model. Construction document sets for a building design include schedules and views. You can add a schedule to a drawing sheet and control its appearance.
Definition of Schedules A schedule view lists elements in tabular format according to common parameters based on their category. Every instance of an element type can be listed in a schedule, or the element types can be grouped to condense the information into a single row based on the grouping criteria you define. For example, a structural framing schedule can be generated to list the type, length, structural usage, and family of the structural framing elements present in the model. When more elements are added to the model, they are automatically added to the schedule. There are three different types of schedules: instance, type, and graphical column.
Instance Schedules An instance schedule displays information extracted from the properties of each of the selected components. For example, in an instance schedule, you can include the length, camber, cost, manufacturer, and level location of every structural framing component used in a structural model. The information about each instance of the framing members is displayed in a separate row. If there are components with the same instance properties in a structural model, the information about each element is displayed in a separate row. As a result, the instance schedule may appear to contain duplicate information.
Type Schedules A type schedule groups components of the same type into a single line item in the schedule. Instead of displaying the same information in each row of the schedule, the software groups similar components. For example, you can generate a footing schedule in Revit to list all the isolated footings used on the project. However, instead of listing each instance, all the isolated footings with the same width, length, depth, and reinforcement can be assigned a type mark and grouped in a single row in the footing schedule. You can format the appearance of the footing schedule so that it can be placed on sheets and becomes part of the documentation. Any modifications to the foundation design are automatically reflected in the footing schedule.
Graphical Column Schedules Graphical column schedules list columns in a graphical format that is keyed to grid lines. You must have at least two intersecting grid lines in a project for a graphical column schedule to display columns. The schedule appears like an elevation and displays columns listed by their grid locations so that you can see column height and grid location graphically. The graphical column schedule identifies each column by its corresponding grid intersections. Offset
Lesson: Working with Schedules
■
343
distances to the nearest grid intersection are added for columns not located on grids. You can choose not to display off-grid columns. You can also group similar columns to reduce the size of the graphical column schedule.
Schedule Properties Dialog Box You use the Schedule Properties dialog box to control the display of content in schedule views.
The dialog box has the following tabs: Tab
Description
Fields
Lists the available headings that you can add to the schedule.
Filter
Restricts the display of elements in single and multicategory schedules.
Sorting/Grouping
Sorts and groups the rows in a schedule.
Formatting
Changes the appearance of a schedule view.
Appearance
Changes the appearance of a schedule view added to a sheet.
Viewing Schedules After a schedule is created, it is displayed in the view window and the new schedule view is added to the list of views in the Project Browser. You need to double-click the required schedule view name in the Project Browser to view a schedule. You can view a schedule placed on a sheet by opening the sheet view. If the schedule is too long or too wide to display correctly on a sheet, you can edit the appearance of the schedule, resize it, or split it to improve viewing.
Updating Schedules Schedules are automatically updated when you modify the structural model. If you modify a property of a component in a schedule, the component is automatically updated to reflect the modified value. For example, if you change the height of a level, the height of the columns attached to that level changes accordingly, which is reflected in the column schedule.
Exporting Schedules You can export a schedule to another application, such as a spreadsheet. To export a schedule, you save it as a delimited text file that can be opened in another application. You re-export the schedule to the same file name and location to update the exported schedule as the design process progresses.
344
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Example of Schedules The following illustrations show examples of schedules created in Revit.
An instance schedule itemizing every instance of a column
A type schedule used to create a footing schedule
A graphical column schedule
Lesson: Working with Schedules
■
345
Working with Schedules After creating schedules, you can modify and export them to external files so that they are available to other stakeholders, such as project managers and contractors. You can place schedules on sheets and edit their appearance on the sheets. You can also use schedules to edit element parameters. Sometimes, it is advantageous to edit these parameters in a schedule view instead of a graphical view.
Procedure: Creating and Modifying Graphical Column Schedules The following steps describe how to create graphical column schedules and modify their appearance. 1.
Click View tab > Create panel > Schedules drop-down > Graphical Column Schedule. A new view called Graphical Column Schedule is displayed. Right-click in the view window. Click View Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Other, for Hidden Levels, click Edit. In the Levels Hidden in Graphical Column Schedules dialog box, select the check boxes corresponding to the levels that you want to hide. Close all the dialog boxes to view the graphical column schedule with the specified levels hidden.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Procedure: Exporting Schedules The following steps describe how to export a schedule to a text file. 1. 2. 3.
Open the schedule that you want to export. On the application menu, click Export > Reports > Schedule. In the Export Schedule dialog box: ■ Specify the name and directory for the schedule. ■ Click Save. In the Export Schedule dialog box, under Schedule Appearance: ■ To export the column heads to an output file, select the Export Column Headers check box. ■ To export only the bottom column header, click One Row. ■ To export all column headers and retain the formatting of the headers in the exported schedule, click Multiple Rows, as Formatted. ■ To export group header rows, footers, and blank lines to the output file, select the Export Group Headers, Footers, and Blank Lines check box. In the Export Schedule dialog box, under Output Options: ■ Select the required option from the Field Delimiter list to separate fields in the output file. ■ Use the Text Qualifier list to specify whether the text in each field of the output file should be enclosed in single or double quotation marks or should have no annotation. Note: Both these output options affect how the fields and text are read in the spreadsheet application. For example, the imperial foot-inch measurements can create problems if single or double quotes are selected as the text qualifier. Create the text file, which can then be opened in a spreadsheet application.
4.
5.
6.
346
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Procedure: Placing Schedules on Sheets and Changing Their Appearance The following steps describe how to place schedules on sheets and change their appearance. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click View tab > Sheet Composition panel > New Sheet. In the Select a Titleblock dialog box, click Load to load a titleblock, if necessary. In the Project Browser, select a schedule, and drag it onto the sheet. Notice that a preview of the schedule appears when you release the mouse button over the drawing sheet. Move the schedule to its desired location, and click to place it on the sheet. Right-click the schedule. Click Edit Schedule to change the appearance of the schedule, if required.
Procedure: Edit Element Parameters Using Schedules The following steps describe how to edit element parameters using schedules. 1. 2. 3.
In the schedule, click the cell that you want to edit. Select a value from the list or enter the required text in the cell. To enter line breaks in a text cell, press CTRL+ENTER. The line breaks are visible only when you place the schedule on a sheet.
Guidelines for Working with Schedules When working with schedules, follow these recommended practices to enhance your productivity and save time. ■ In addition to creating schedules that you will place on drawing sheets, create companion schedules to speed up the workflow. Companion schedules are working schedules that you would not ordinarily place on drawing sheets. These schedules display useful information about structural models to facilitate modeling. ■ Create parameters for system families and shared parameters for component families, and add them to structural elements to schedule necessary information about the elements. This makes schedules more useful and provides better control over component properties in a structural model. For example, beam connection types are not a standard property but can be listed as shared parameters. You can then schedule beams by their connection types. ■ Develop and include all structural schedules in your project template file so that you do not need to develop these schedules for each project. This saves setup time at the start of each project and allows you to generate schedule information at very early stages. ■ Use the Hidden Field option on the Formatting tab in the view properties of a schedule view to hide the fields that you need to keep available for filtering, sorting, or calculating but that you do not want to show in the schedule view. This makes schedules easier to read and format for construction documentation. For example, you can use the structural usage parameter to filter the vertical braces from the structural framing schedule. However, if you do not want to list the structural usage, you can hide it in the schedule. ■ Use headers, footers, and blank lines to identify and separate groups of similar information in a schedule. You can create these headers, footers, and blank lines using the Sorting/Grouping tab in the Schedule Properties dialog box.
Lesson: Working with Schedules
■
347
Exercise: Create Schedules In this exercise, you create a structural framing schedule and a structural foundation schedule. You are working on a design project that has moved into the construction documentation phase. You need to provide an accurate listing of the structural framing members and the types of structural foundations so that construction contractors can prepare accurate cost estimates. You do the following: ■ Create a structural framing schedule. ■ Create a structural foundation schedule. 3.
In the New Schedule dialog box: ■ Select Structural Framing from the Category list. This displays a default schedule name, Structural Framing Schedule. ■ Enter Steel Beam Schedule in the Name field. ■ Ensure that Schedule Building Components is selected.
4. 5.
Click OK to close the New Schedule dialog box. In the Schedule Properties dialog box, Fields tab: ■ Select Reference Level from the Available Fields list. Note: In this schedule, you will list every instance of structural framing according to its reference level.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules. Click Exercise: Create Schedules.
Create a Structural Framing Schedule 1.
2.
348
Open i_rst_essentials_schedules.rvt or m_rst_essentials_schedules.rvt. The file opens in the default 3D view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. To create a schedule, click View tab > Create panel > Schedules drop-down > Schedule/ Quantities.
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
■
■
6.
To add the selected field to the Scheduled Fields (In Order) list, click Add. Double-click the Family, Type, Length, Structural Usage, and Volume fields to add them to the Scheduled Fields (In Order) list so that they appear as columns.
On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ Select Reference Level from the Sort By list. ■ Select the Footer check box. ■ Ensure that the Itemize Every Instance check box is selected. 7. Click OK to close the Schedule Properties dialog box. An instance schedule is created that lists all the framing members. You can drag the columns in the schedule to increase their width. 8. To list only the steel beams in the schedule and filter the concrete and HSS members, right-click the schedule. Click View Properties. 9. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Other, for the Filter parameter, click Edit. 10. In the Schedule Properties dialog box, Filter tab: ■ Select Structural Usage from the first Filter By list. ■ Select Does Not Equal from the list on the right of the first list. ■ Select Vertical Bracing from the list below the first list.
11. In the Schedule Properties dialog box, Filter tab: ■ Select Structural Usage from the first And list. ■ Select Does Not Equal from the list on the right of the first list. ■ Select Other from the list below the first list.
12. Click OK to close all open dialog boxes. Note: The schedule now lists only the Wide Flange steel beams for FIRST FLR. 13. Scroll down the structural framing schedule table to the end of the SECOND FLR. list. Notice that the number of beams is displayed to the right of the reference level name. In this case, there are 67 steel beams on SECOND FLR.
Note: You can use any of the available schedule fields to sort, group, and filter the schedule according to your needs. In addition, you can calculate a quantity based on the available fields.
Create a Structural Foundation Schedule 1.
Click View tab > Create panel > Schedules drop-down > Schedule/Quantities to create a schedule.
Lesson: Working with Schedules
■
349
2.
3.
In the New Schedule dialog box: ■ To create a structural foundation schedule, select Structural Foundations from the Category list. ■ In the Name field, enter Footing Schedule. ■ Ensure that the Schedule Building Components option is selected. ■ Click OK. In the Schedule Properties dialog box, Fields tab: ■ Add Type Mark as a column in the Footing Schedule. Note: Type Mark is a type property. Therefore, the value entered for Type Mark will be assigned to all instances of that type. ■
Add Family, Type, and Count to the Scheduled Fields (In Order) list.
6.
7. 8. 9.
4.
350
Tip: Disregard the Revit warning message, if it is displayed. To change the appearance of the schedule, right-click the schedule. Click View Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Other, for the Formatting parameter, click Edit. In the Schedule Properties dialog box, Formatting tab: ■ Select Family from the Fields list. ■ Select the Hidden Field check box.
In the Schedule Properties dialog box, Sorting/ Grouping tab, to create a type schedule: ■ Select Type from the Sort By list. ■ Select Family from the Then By list.
Clear the Itemize Every Instance check box. Click OK to close the Schedule Properties dialog box. A type schedule is created with the number of instances for each type of footing listed in the Count column. ■
5.
In the Footing Schedule: ■ Under Type Mark, in the first row, enter F1 to provide a Type Mark value to a family name. The Type Mark values are simpler and shorter than type or family names. ■ Similarly, enter F2 and F3 in the Type Mark cells for the remaining rows. You have assigned values that will appear in all instances of each footing type.
■
Note: Any parameter used to filter, sort, or calculate a value in the schedule must be included in the Fields list. However, if required, you can hide these parameters using the Hidden Field check box.
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
10. In the Schedule Properties dialog box, Appearance tab: ■ Clear the Blank Row Before Data check box.
Click OK. Note: You can format the elements in the schedule view. For example, the heading can be grouped with a subtitle. 11. Click OK to close the Instance Properties dialog box. 12. Close the file without saving changes. ■
Lesson: Working with Schedules
■
351
352
■
Chapter 10: Creating Plan Annotations and Schedules
Chapter
11 Creating Detailing Revit Structure simplifies the process of creating construction details to communicate the structural design intent at specific locations in the structural model. In this chapter, you learn how to work with detail views by modifying and annotating them to create construction details for inclusion in construction documentation. You also learn to add reinforcement elements and detail components to concrete detail views, and work with drafting views and CAD details in Revit.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Work with detail views by modifying and annotating them. Add 3D and 2D reinforcement elements and detail components to concrete detail views. Work with drafting views. Work with CAD details in Revit.
Chapter Overview
■
353
Lesson: Working with Detail Views This lesson describes how to work with detail views by modifying and annotating them to create construction details for inclusion in construction documentation. You begin the lesson by learning about detail views. Then, you learn about the process and some recommended practices for saving and reusing detail views. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding 2D annotations to a detail view. Detail views display a section of structural model elements. To document a structural design, 2D annotation and detailing elements are superimposed over model elements. The model elements in the detail view automatically update with changes to the structural model. However, you need to adjust 2D annotations manually if required. After the detail views are created, you can assemble them onto sheets and include them in construction documentation. The following illustration shows a steel detail view before and after it is detailed.
Detail view without 2D annotation elements
Detail view with 2D annotation elements
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
354
Describe detail views. Identify the steps in the process of saving and reusing a detail view. State the recommended practices for saving and reusing a detail view. Add 2D annotations to a detail view.
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
About Detail Views You create detail views to display a portion of the building model at a finer scale. The basic geometry of the detail is defined by the model elements displayed in the view. However, you can include additional design information using 2D annotation and detailing elements. To place 2D annotation and detailing elements, you use the annotation and detailing tools. You can group the selected annotation and detailing elements to form a detail group for use in multiple locations in a project. The annotation and detailing tools are available on the Annotate tab. Some of the tools that you can use are Dimension, Text, Repeating Detail, Filled Region, Detail Line, Detail Component, and Symbol.
Definition of Detail Views A detail view is a view of the structural model that appears as a section or a callout in other views. You can create a detail view using the Section or Callout tool on the Create panel of the View tab. You can also create a detail view by duplicating an existing view, cropping it, and changing its scale. After creating the detail view, you can modify its detail level, scale, and graphical settings, as required.
Detail Levels You can view a building model in three levels of detail: Coarse, Medium, and Fine. You can access these levels from the Detail Level option on the View Control Bar. Changing the detail level affects the display of the elements in a building model. The following illustration shows the list of detail levels on the View Control Bar.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
355
The following illustrations show a model displayed in different detail levels. In the Coarse detail level, the steel beam is shown by stick representation. In the Medium detail level, the steel beam is displayed as an extruded shape, and in the Fine detail level as an extruded shape with fillets at the corners.
Coarse detail level
Medium detail level
Fine detail level
Dimension The Dimension tool applies specific dimensions to the detail. You use this tool for specifying exact distances or placement instructions. Annotation elements, including dimensions, text, and symbols, automatically adjust to the scale of the view. For example, if you change the scale of a view, annotation elements automatically adjust to maintain their actual sizes on the sheet.
Text The Text tool creates text annotation to add notes. You can insert wrapping or nonwrapping text notes. As you place the text, you can specify a one-segment, two-segment, or arch leader. After the text element is placed, you can add more leaders or remove the last leader added.
Symbol You use the Symbol tool to place symbols in a drawing. Symbols are 2D annotation elements used to document both the detail and plan views. A common detailing symbol is the weld symbol that specifies the shape, length, and size of welds used to connect steel elements. You can modify the appearance and placement of welding symbols by changing their properties.
356
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
The following illustrations show the standard welding symbols.
Fillet
Flare Bevel
Bevel
V
Back
Flare V
J
Slot
Square
U
The following table describes the welding symbol properties. Property
Description
Top symbol type, size, and length
Indicates the top weld size and length.
Bottom symbol type, size, and length
Indicates the bottom weld size and length.
Contour symbol type
Indicates how the weld is grounded down, flush (flat), or convex (above the surrounding surfaces).
Leader configuration
Points the leader to the left or the right.
Tail and tail note display
Displays a text note as part of the symbol.
Weld all-around
Indicates that a weld is needed all around a particular joint.
Field weld symbol display
Indicates that the field weld is created on-site and is not prefabricated.
Left or right symbol orientation
Points the weld symbol to the left or the right.
Detail Line The Detail Line tool places 2D lines in the detail view. These lines can trace over model components or add lines that are not shown in the model. The Detail Line tool that you use for creating 2D detail lines has the same drawing options as the Line tool that you use when creating walls, floors, or roofs, except that detail lines are specific to a view. You use detail lines in drafting views, which have no reference to the building model.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
357
Filled Region Filled regions are detail elements that consist of line patterns within a border. You place a filled region by sketching its border using the Filled Region tool and specifying a pattern to represent surfaces, such as concrete or compacted earth. The line style for each sketch line can be defined separately. Filled regions can be opaque or transparent. Opaque regions hide the surface on which they are placed. White and opaque filled regions are known as masking regions. You can set the edge lines of the filled and masking regions to the invisible line type, which hides the edge lines.
Detail Component You use the Detail Component tool to place 2D detail components, such as fasteners and connections, in a detail view. Detail components may be actual construction components, such as bolts and CMU blocks, or nonconstruction components, such as break lines. Like annotation elements, detail components are visible only in the view in which you place them. Unlike annotation elements, which automatically adjust to the scale of the view, detail components maintain their actual size, independent of the scale of the view. Model elements also exhibit this behavior. You load the detail components into a file from the Detail Component libraries that are installed with Revit. These detail components are stored according to the CSI MasterFormat. After detail components are loaded and placed in the project, they cannot be exploded or disassembled into separate lines and filled regions. However, you can create custom detail components using the Family Editor. The following illustrations show the 2D detail component family of an engineered wood joist.
Section view
Side view
Repeating Detail Repeating details are used to create an array of detail components based on a specified pattern, such as courses of CMU or reinforcing steel at specified spacing. In the Type Properties dialog box for a repeating detail, you can specify the detail component for which an array needs to be created, and the spacing and layout of the array. You can create an array only for a detail component that is loaded into the current project.
358
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
The following illustration shows the Type Properties dialog box for a repeating detail in which bolts are spaced at 3" o.c.
The following illustrations show examples of commonly used repeating details.
CMU courses
Metal deck
Reinforcing steel
Draw Order of Elements The draw order of elements in a detail or drafting view determines which 2D elements, such as filled regions, hide other elements. You can set the draw order for detail items in a detail view. By default, elements that are added later hide those placed earlier.
Detail Groups You can assemble detail objects, such as detail lines, filled regions, and text to create detail groups. You can group model and detail elements and combinations of both. You create a detail group by using the tools from the Detail Group drop-down on the Detail panel of the Annotate tab. Creating detail groups minimizes repetition of elements. You can place detail groups in many views, save them as library files, and access them from the Project Browser.
Draw Order of Detail Groups The draw order of a detail group is the sequence in which you group the detail elements. A detail group's draw order does not change when the group is moved, copied, or inserted. You can change the draw order of individual group members. To do this, you need to edit the group. After you edit the draw order of the members of a detail group, all instances of that detail group are updated with the new draw order.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
359
Sorting Detail Element Display Depth You sort the display depth of selected detail elements in a view using the Bring to Front and Send to Back options on the Arrange panel of the Modify Detail Items tab. These options are available when you place or select detail elements in the view. The following table describes the display depth sorting options. Option
Description
Bring to Front
Places the detail element in front of all detail elements in the view.
Send to Back
Places the detail element behind all detail elements in the view.
Bring Forward
Moves the detail element incrementally closer to the front of all detail elements in the view.
Send Backward
Moves the detail element incrementally closer to the back of all other detail elements in the view.
Example of Detail Views The following illustration shows a section detail view before any detailing.
360
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
The following illustration shows a section detail view with drafted and model components. The floor and walls are the model components to which text notes have been added. The insulation, siding, baseboard, plywood, joist, sill, wall plate, and anchor bolt are all detail lines or components that have been placed in the view.
The following illustration shows the detail view with filled region, detail lines, and detail components without text.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
361
Process of Saving and Reusing a Detail View Saving a detail view increases its usability across projects. You can save views with view-specific elements, such as text, dimensions, detail lines, and detail components, as library content and reuse them in different projects.
Process: Saving and Reusing a Detail View The following illustration shows the process of saving and reusing a detail view.
The following steps describe the process of saving and reusing a detail view. 1.
Select a view. Select a view in the Project Browser that you want to save to a separate file. Select Save to New File from the view shortcut menu. Save the view. Save the view as an RVT file in a selected library folder. Insert the view. Insert the view in another project, as required. You can insert schedules, drafting views, reports, sheets, or 2D content from one project to another using Insert from File on the Import panel of the Insert tab. Open the view. Open the inserted view to reuse it. You need to ensure that when you open a view for reuse, its properties are also transferred to your project. You can also select a view scale for the view that you want to reuse.
2. 3.
4.
362
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Guidelines for Saving and Reusing a Detail View The following recommended practices help you work effectively with detail views. ■ Copy details, such as detail lines, components, and text annotations, to the Clipboard and paste them in other views to reuse them in multiple views. Reusing components saves time because you do not need to re-create them from scratch. ■ Create and include frequently used detail components and repeating details in the project template file. This saves time and effort during project documentation. ■ Create and use detail groups for grouping details that are repetitive, so that when you change the detail group, the changes are made to that group throughout your project. ■ Add annotations and detail components to drafting or detail views and not to the sheet where you place the views. This reduces work when you change the scale of the view or move a view from one sheet to another.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
363
Exercise: Add 2D Annotations to a Detail View In this exercise, you add 2D annotations to a detail view. You are working on a project in which the structural framing is already designed. You want to add 2D connection detailing elements, such as detail lines, detail components, and annotation symbols, to a steel beam to column detail view. You do the following: ■ Add hidden lines. ■ Sketch a steel plate. ■ Add bolts to the plate. ■ Create a new detail group and mirror it. ■ Add a weld symbol.
The completed exercise
364
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 11: Creating Sections and Details. Click Exercise: Add 2D Annotations to a Detail View.
7.
Tip: Zoom in to the lower-left corner of the floor to view the thick line properly. Move the cursor to the right and click the lower-right corner of the floor to draw the detail line.
Add Hidden Lines 1.
2. 3.
4. 5.
6.
Open i_rst_essentials_detail_view.rvt or m_rst_essentials_detail_view.rvt. The file opens in the Beam-Column Connection section view. This displays beams and a floor at a column intersection. No connections have been specified. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Detail Line to start creating detail lines. On the Place Detail Lines tab, Element panel, select from the Line Style list to draw lines for representing hidden faces in the metal deck layer of the floor. On the Draw panel, verify that the Line tool is selected. On the Options Bar: ■ Verify that the Chain check box is cleared. ■ For Offset, enter 1/4" (6 mm). In the view window, click the lower-left corner of the floor represented by a thick line.
8.
To draw another detail line: ■ Click the upper-right corner of the metal deck portion of the floor represented by a thin line. ■ Move the cursor to the left and click the upper-left corner of the floor.
9.
Exit the Detail Line tool.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
365
Sketch a Steel Plate 1.
In the view window: ■ Zoom to fit the view. ■ Zoom in to the beam.
2.
Click Modify tab > Edit Linework panel > Linework to modify the line style representing the edge of the steel beam. Select from the Line Style list. In the view window, click the vertical edges of the beams on either side of the column to represent hidden edges.
3. 4.
5.
366
Activate the Detail Line tool.
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
6. 7. 8.
On the Element panel, select Thin Lines from the Line Style list to draw the connection plate. Activate the Rectangle tool. To draw a rectangle, in the view window: ■ Click the midpoint object snap along the left edge of the column to add the upperright corner of the rectangle, as shown.
■
Move the cursor to the left and below the selected point to draw the rectangle.
9.
Click to place a rectangle that is 0' - 5" (125 mm) wide and 1' - 2 1/2" (370 mm) long, as shown.
13. In the view window: ■ Click the vertical temporary dimension. ■ Enter 0' 2" (50 mm).
■
Press ENTER.
Add Bolts to the Plate 1. 2. 3. 4. 10. Exit the Detail Line tool. 11. To adjust the position of the detail lines, in the view window, CTRL+select the four sides of the rectangle. Tip: Place the cursor on one of the sides of the rectangle and press TAB to highlight all four sides. Then, click to select all the sides of the rectangle. 12. On the Options Bar, click Activate Dimensions.
5.
Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Component drop-down > Repeating Detail. Ensure that Repeating Detail : A325 - 5/8" Plan (Repeating Detail : A325 - 15mm Plan) is selected in the Type Selector drop-down. Activate the Pick Lines tool. On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1 1/4" (30 mm). In the view window, move the cursor to the left edge of the connection plate. The dashed offset indicator displays the side on which the offset occurs.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
367
6.
Click the left plate edge to add the bolt detail. It is offset to the right by the distance that you specified. The bolt placement needs to be adjusted.
Exit the Repeating Detail tool. In the view window, select the bolt string detail to edit it. Notice that control dots are displayed at both ends of the bolt string detail. 9. Activate the Move tool. 10. On the Options Bar, select the Disjoin check box to adjust the relative placement of items in the repeating detail. 11. To reposition the top bolt, in the view window: ■ Click the center of the top bolt. ■ Move the cursor down to 0' - 1 1/4" (30 mm) and click to place the top bolt. Drag the bottom control dot up to position it at 12. a distance of 1' (300 mm) from the control dot at the top.
13. Exit the Move tool.
Create a New Detail Group and Mirror It 1.
In the view window: ■ Draw a selection box from the left to the right to select the plate lines, outer beam edge line, and bolts. ■ Verify that you selected only the detail lines and not the beam.
2.
Click Multi-Select tab > Create panel > Create Group. In the Create Detail Group dialog box: ■ For Name, enter Beam to Column Connection. ■ Click OK. Activate the Mirror tool. In the view window, click the column centerline to mirror the new detail group on the beam end on the right.
7. 8.
368
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
3.
4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Detail Group drop-down > Place Detail Group to add a detail showing bolts and a plate in the section. Ensure that Detail Group : Plate and 5 Bolts in Section is selected from the Type Selector dropdown. In the view window, click the midpoint of the detail line at the top of the girder to place the detail group.
9. Exit the Place Detail Group tool. 10. In the view window, zoom to fit.
3.
In the view window, place the weld symbol above the floor slab and to the right of the column grid, as shown. The exact placement of the symbol is not critical.
4. 5. 6.
Exit the Symbol tool. In the view window, select the weld symbol. Click Modify Generic Annotations tab > Leader panel > Add. In the view window, reposition the leader head to point to the right edge of the column where the connection plate meets the column.
7.
Add a Weld Symbol 1. 2.
Click Annotate tab > Symbol panel > Symbol to add a weld symbol to the detail view. Verify that Weld Symbol : Both is selected from the Type Selector drop-down.
Lesson: Working with Detail Views
■
369
8.
Open the Instance Properties dialog box for the weld symbol. 9. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Text, select the Tail Note Visible check box. ■ Under Text, for Tail Note, enter TYP. ■ Click OK. 10. In the view window, zoom to fit the view. 11. Clear the selection. 12. Close the file without saving changes.
370
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Lesson: Adding Concrete Reinforcement This lesson describes how to add 3D and 2D reinforcement elements to concrete sections. You begin the lesson by learning how to add 3D reinforcement elements and 2D detail components to concrete sections. Next, you learn some recommended practices for adding concrete reinforcement. The lesson concludes with an exercise on adding 3D reinforcement elements and 2D reinforcement detail components to a concrete section. Concrete sections are created by cutting detail or wall section views through a structural model. These views display concrete model elements that include concrete beams, columns, footings, and walls, which are automatically updated when changes are made to the structural model. You can add 3D reinforcement model elements to concrete sections, which become part of the structural model and can be displayed in multiple views. In addition, you can superimpose 2D detail components over concrete sections to represent the reinforcement. The following illustrations show a concrete section before and after the reinforcement is added.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
Add 3D reinforcement elements to concrete sections. Add 2D reinforcement detail components to concrete sections. State the recommended practices for adding concrete reinforcement. Add 3D reinforcement elements and 2D reinforcement detail components to a concrete section.
Lesson: Adding Concrete Reinforcement
■
371
Adding 3D Reinforcement Reinforcement elements are 3D objects that you add to concrete sections. These elements are part of the structural model and are also displayed in other views. You place reinforcement in concrete host elements by using the tools on the Reinforcement panel of the Home tab. You can add reinforcement in the following ways: ■ By placing reinforcement bars (rebars) parallel to the work plane of the current view ■ By placing rebars perpendicular to the work plane of the current view ■ By sketching area reinforcement ■ By sketching path reinforcement Revit Structure includes various reinforcement types that are based on the actual dimensions of the reinforcing bars. The bar thickness and hook dimensions are predefined in the reinforcement family files per the building code requirements and can be overridden using the type parameters. Rebar shapes are separate families, which are automatically loaded when you create a design. These families are listed in the Rebar Shape Browser.
Rebar Shape Browser
Based on the design requirements, you can use predefined reinforcement elements or create custom elements. You can also specify layout rules for the reinforcement. The placed reinforcement appears in all model views, but the sketched reinforcement appears as outline sketches in plan views and as bars in section views.
372
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Rebar Cover Concrete floor, slab, and wall model elements have instance parameters that are used to specify the cover of the interior, exterior, and other faces. The 3D reinforcement elements are automatically positioned to conform to the cover requirements of the concrete host element.
Procedure: Adding Rebars The following steps describe how to add rebars to concrete detail views. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Load the required rebar shapes from the Imperial Library or Metric Library. Click Home tab > Reinforcement panel > Rebar drop-down and select Place Rebar Perpendicular to Work Plane or Place Rebar Parallel to Work Plane. On the Options Bar, click […] to launch the Rebar Shape Browser for viewing various shape profiles. Specify the required rebar type and shape. Place the rebar in the drawing. Rotate the rebar, if required.
Adding Detail Components Detail components are 2D shapes that you add to concrete sections. These components are superimposed over model elements to specify the reinforcement requirements of concrete elements. You add detail components to concrete sections by using the Detail Component tool from the Component drop-down on the Detail panel of the Annotate tab. Detail components are listed in the Type Selector drop-down, as shown in the following illustration. Based on the design requirements, you can use predefined detail components or create custom ones.
Lesson: Adding Concrete Reinforcement
■
373
Detail components are displayed only in the view in which they are added. They are not displayed in other views because they are not part of the structural model.
Procedure: Adding Detail Components The following steps describe how to add detail components to concrete detail views. 1. Load the reinforcement detail component families from the Imperial Library or the Metric Library by clicking Insert tab > Load From Library panel > Load Family. The reinforcement detail components are stored at the following default file location.
Note: The default file location for the Metric Library is similar to that for the Imperial Library. Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Component drop-down > Detail Component. Select the type of reinforcement detail component to be placed from the Type Selector drop-down. The types of reinforcement detail components include Reinf Bar Bend, Reinf Bar Elevation, and Reinf Bar Section for the various bar sizes.
2. 3.
374
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
4.
In the concrete section view, place the detail component at the desired location. You can rotate or change the orientation of the detail component using the SPACEBAR, either during or after the placement.
Guidelines for Adding Concrete Reinforcement The following recommended practices help you effectively add reinforcement to concrete sections. ■ Focus only on modeling essential 3D reinforcement elements so that the project is cost effective. Overpopulating a design with nonessential elements takes time, increases the size of the Revit file, and degrades the processing time of the software. ■ Place the 3D reinforcement in the model if the reinforcement is to be displayed in multiple views so that if the spacing or size of the reinforcement changes, it is propagated to all associated views. This saves time by eliminating the need to make the same change in multiple views. ■ Place detail components in concrete sections if the components are not to be displayed in other views. This helps reduce the file size and increase the performance of the file. ■ Set the detail level of a view to Fine for displaying the extruded shape of the 3D reinforcement elements. This allows you to see the actual bar dimensions and facilitates accurate placement of the reinforcement.
Example The following illustrations show section views of a footing with 3D reinforcement elements. Notice that when the size of the footing is increased, the reinforcement elements are updated.
Footing before increasing the size
Footing after increasing the size
The following illustrations show section views of a footing with detail components. Notice that when the size of the footing is increased, the detail components are not updated.
Footing before increasing the size
Footing after increasing the size
Lesson: Adding Concrete Reinforcement
■
375
Exercise: Add Reinforcement Elements and Detail Components In this exercise, you add 3D reinforcement elements and 2D reinforcement detail components to a concrete section. You are working on a project in which the structural walls, foundations, and framing are already designed. You now need to add reinforcement elements at the base of a foundation wall and footing. You do the following: ■ Add 2D reinforcement detail components to the concrete section. ■ Create and add a repeating detail. ■ Add 3D reinforcement elements parallel to the footing. ■ Modify concrete cover settings of the footing. ■ Add 3D reinforcement elements perpendicular to the footing. ■ View 3D reinforcement elements in various views.
The completed exercise
376
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Completing the Exercise
4.
To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 11: Creating Detailing. Click Exercise: Add Reinforcement Elements and Detail Components.
In the view window: ■ Press SPACEBAR to rotate the selected rebar to a vertical orientation. ■ Click in the lower-left corner of the foundation wall. The exact placement of the reinforcement bar is not critical.
Add 2D Reinforcement Detail Components to the Concrete Section 1.
2.
3.
Open i_rst_essentials_concrete_reinforcement.rvt or m_rst_essentials_concrete_reinforcement.rvt. The file opens in the Basement Footings section view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Component drop-down > Detail Component to start adding a vertical reinforcement bar to the foundation wall. Select Reinf Bar Elevation : #_5 (M_Reinf Bar Elevation : #16) from the Type Selector dropdown. 5.
Note: In the metric dataset, the component is not visible until you click to place it in the view window. To adjust the position of the reinforcement bar: ■ Modify the temporary dimension by entering 0' 2" (50 mm). Press ENTER.
■
Use the shape handles to stretch the rebar upward, above the break line.
Lesson: Adding Concrete Reinforcement
■
377
6.
7.
Note: The display order of the components will be adjusted after all the detail components are placed. To add a dowel reinforcement bar between the foundation wall and the footing, select Reinf Bar Bend 3-8: #_5 (M_Reinf Bar Bend 10-25 : #16) from the Type Selector drop-down. In the view window, when the horizontal temporary dimension of the centerline of the wall is 0' 2" (50 mm) and the vertical temporary dimension from the top of the footing is 0' 6" (150 mm), click to place the dowel reinforcement bar as shown below.
11. In the Instance Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters: ■ For L1, enter 1' 0" (300 mm) to specify the horizontal length of the dowel reinforcement bar. ■ For L2, enter 4' 0" (1200 mm) to specify the vertical length of the dowel reinforcement bar. 12. Click OK to close the Instance Properties dialog box.
Create and Add a Repeating Detail 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
8. 9.
Exit the Detail Component tool. In the view window, select the dowel reinforcement bar that you just added. 10. Open the Instance Properties dialog box.
378
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
7. 8. 9.
Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Component drop-down > Repeating Detail. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box, click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. In the Name dialog box: ■ For Name, enter #5 AT 12" O.C. (#16M AT 300 mm O.C.). ■ Click OK. To set the type parameters for the new repeating detail, in the Type Properties dialog box, under Pattern: ■ Select Reinf Bar Section : #_5 (M_Reinf Bar Section : #16) from the Detail list. ■ Select Maximum Spacing from the Layout list. ■ For Spacing, enter 1' 0" (300 mm). Close OK in both the dialog boxes. Click Place Repeating Detail tab > Draw panel > Pick Lines. On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 0' 3/4" (20 mm).
10. In the view window, select the inside face of the vertical wall rebar as shown below.
14. In the view window: ■ Place the cursor at the center of the foundation wall as shown.
11. Exit the Repeating Detail tool. 12. In the view window, CTRL+select the vertical rebar, the repeating detail, and the dowel reinforcement bar to mirror this wall reinforcement to the opposite face of the wall.
Click the vertical extension line representing the center of the wall. 15. In the view window, select the break line element at the top of the wall. 16. Click Modify Detail Items tab > Arrange panel > Bring to Front to obscure the reinforcement above the break line. ■
Add 3D Reinforcement Elements Parallel to the Footing 1. 13. Activate the Mirror tool. 2. 3. 4.
Click Home tab > Reinforcement panel > Rebar drop-down > Place Rebar Parallel to Work Plane to add a reinforcement element in the footing. Select Rebar Bar : #5 (Rebar Bar : 16M) from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar, click […] to launch the Rebar Shape Browser. In the Rebar Shape Browser, ensure that Rebar Shape : 00 (Rebar Shape : M_00) is selected.
Lesson: Adding Concrete Reinforcement
■
379
5.
6. 7.
In the view window, click just above the bottom cover line in the footing element as shown below.
Exit the Rebar tool. On the View Control Bar, change the detail level to Fine. Notice that the rebar thickness is now visible.
Modify Concrete Cover Settings of the Footing 1. 2. 3.
4.
In the view window, select the footing. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Structural, select Cast Against Earth Detail panel > Filled Region. On the Create Filled Region Boundary tab, Element panel, verify that Thin Lines is selected in the Line Style list. To draw the surrounding soil, in the view window, sketch a profile along all the lower edges of the slab component. Ensure that the sketch line along the right edge extends up to 1' - 0" (300 mm) from the bottom of the slab component.
Exit the Detail Component tool. In the view window: ■ Select the slab component. ■ Right-click the slab component. Click Element Properties.
Lesson: Working with Drafting Views
■
387
4. 5.
6.
7. 8. 9.
Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab > Edit panel > Offset to offset the current sketch lines. On the Options Bar: ■ Verify that Numerical is selected. ■ Ensure that 0' 6" (150 mm) is specified as the Offset value. ■ Verify that the Copy check box is selected. In the view window, click the sketch lines you added along the slab component to create a sketch, as shown.
Tip: You should click the sketch lines by ensuring that the offset appears outside the slab component, not inside it. Exit the Offset tool. Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab > Draw panel > Line. Add lines at both the ends to close the loop for the surrounding soil.
13. Clear the selection. 14. To make the offset lines invisible, in the view window, CTRL+select the offset lines as shown.
15. On the Element panel, select from the Line Style list. These lines do not display in the view after the filled region is finished. 16. On the Element Panel, click Region Properties. 17. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Ensure that Earth is selected in the Type list. ■ Click OK. 18. Click Finish Region to finish sketching the region.
Add Detail Lines and Detail Components to Represent Reinforcement 1. 2. 3. 4.
10. Click Modify. 11. To change the line type representing the top of the grade, in the view window, select the horizontal line to the right of the slab component, as shown.
To add a detail representing a reinforcing bar, activate the Detail Line tool. On the Element panel, select Wide Lines from the Line Style list. On the Options Bar, ensure that the Chain check box is selected. To draw the reinforcement dowel, in the view window: ■ Click 2" (50 mm) below the upper-left corner of the slab component.
■
12. On the Element panel, select Wide Lines from the Line Style list. Note: The sketch lines look the same and do not display according to their line styles until the filled region is finished by selecting Finish Region on the Region panel.
388
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Move the cursor to the right and enter 2' 10" (850 mm). Press ENTER.
5.
To create a vertical detail line, move the cursor down and enter 1' 0" (300 mm). Press ENTER.
6.
To add a bend radius to the bent bar, on the Draw panel, click Fillet Arc. On the Options Bar: ■ Select the Radius check box. ■ For Radius, ensure the value specified is 0' 1" (25 mm). In the view window: ■ Zoom in to the corner of the bent bar. ■ Click the horizontal detail line. ■ Click the vertical detail line.
7.
8.
9.
To add the longitudinal bars, activate the Detail Component tool. 10. Select Reinf Bar Section : #_5 (M_Reinf Bar Section: #16) from the Type Selector dropdown. This family is preloaded into the project file. 11. In the view window, click in the corner of the wide lines representing the bent rebar to place the reinforcement bar, as shown.
12. Place a second rebar near the bottom of the vertical leg of the bent rebar.
Note: This is a schematic detail, so the exact location of the reinforcement bar is not specified. However, the temporary dimensions can be used to precisely position the reinforcement detail components.
Add Detail Lines and Detail Components to Annotate the Detail 1. 2.
3. 4.
Ensure that the Detail Component tool is active. Select Break Line : Break Line (M_Break Line : M_Break Line) from the Type Selector dropdown. This family is preloaded into the project file. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the break line component by 90 degrees. In the view window: ■ Click to the right of the left edge of the slab. ■ Exit the Detail Component tool. ■ Select the break line component.
Lesson: Working with Drafting Views
■
389
5.
Use the shape handles to stretch the break line component to obscure the left portion of the slab component, as shown.
6.
To place a horizontal dimension to specify the width of the haunch, in the view window: ■ Click the right vertical edge of the slab component. ■ Click the vertical reference on the opposite end of the bottom edge of the slab component, as shown.
7.
Click below the lower horizontal edge of the component slab to finish placing the dimension.
8.
Double-click the 1' - 0" (300 mm) dimension value. In the Dimension Text dialog box, under Dimension Value: ■ Click Replace With Text. ■ For Replace With Text, enter SEE PLAN. ■ Click OK.
Note: The break line should extend above the slab.
Add Dimensions to Detail Components 1. 2. 3.
To add a dimension to specify the required depth below the grade, in the view window, zoom in to the right of the slab edge. Activate the Aligned dimension tool. In the view window: ■ Click the horizontal wide line of the filled region to begin placing the dimension. ■ Click the bottom edge of the slab component. ■ Click to the right of the filled region to finish placing the dimension.
9.
4. 5.
390
Double-click the 1' - 0" (300 mm) dimension value. In the Dimension Text dialog box: ■ Under Text Fields, for Suffix, enter MIN. ■ Click OK.
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Add Text Notes 1. 2.
Activate the Text tool to add a text note. On the Place Text tab: ■ Verify that 3/32" Arial (2.5mm Arial) is selected in the Type Selector drop-down. ■ On the Alignment panel, under Horizontal, ensure that Left is selected. ■ On the Leader panel, click Two Segments.
3.
To specify the location of the leader head, in the view window: ■ Click the horizontal portion of the wide detail line representing the bent rebar.
Move the cursor above the horizontal portion and click above the slab component to specify the second point of the leader line. ■ Move the cursor to the right and click to specify the text location. In the text box, enter PROVIDE DOWELS TO MATCH SLAB REIN. (SEE PLANS FOR SLAB CONSTRUCTION). Click Modify. Select the new text box. Use the Drag controls to resize the text box.
11. In the view window: ■ To specify the location of the leader head, click the center of the top reinforcement bar, as shown.
■
4. 5. 6. 7.
8. Click Modify. 9. Activate the Text tool. 10. To specify the longitudinal bars, ensure that Text : 3/32" Arial Open Dot (Text : 2.5mm Arial Open Dot) is selected in the Type Selector drop-down. Note: The open dot leader text type has been preloaded into the dataset. It was created by duplicating an existing text type and assigning the open dot leader.
Click above the slab component to specify the text location. ■ Move the cursor to the right and click to define the shoulder length of the leader. 12. In the view window: ■ Enter CONT. BAR T&B in the text box. ■ Click outside the text box to place the text. ■
13. Exit the Text tool. Note: You can add this Revit detail to your detail library for use on other projects. 14. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Working with Drafting Views
■
391
Lesson: Working with CAD Details This lesson describes how to work with CAD details in Revit. You learn about the options for importing and editing CAD files and some recommended practices for working with CAD details. The lesson concludes with an exercise on importing and editing a DWG file. Many structural engineering firms have developed and maintained extensive libraries of CAD files that can be used across multiple projects. You can import these CAD details into Revit project files and edit them as required. Importing and editing typical details enables you to save time and effort and avoid duplication of work.
AutoCAD details imported and placed in a Revit view
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■
392
Describe the options for importing and editing CAD files. State the recommended practices for working with CAD details. Import and edit a DWG file.
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Options for Importing and Editing CAD Files Revit enables you to import and edit CAD files, such as DWG and DGN. You import typical CAD files by using the Import CAD Formats dialog box. The Import Line Weights dialog box enables you to manage the appearance of CAD files as you import them. When you import a CAD file, the layer information of the imported objects is retained. Revit does not internally use layers; however, it can recognize layers and it enables you to edit the appearance of layers and map them to object categories. You use the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box to edit the visibility or graphical representation of the layers in an imported CAD file. When you import a CAD file, it changes to an import symbol, which you can explode and disassemble into Revit annotation elements. You use the Explode tool to explode an import symbol.
Import CAD Formats Dialog Box In the Import CAD Formats dialog box, the imported objects are either automatically positioned or need to be manually placed with reference to the surrounding objects. While importing a CAD file, you can specify whether to import all the layers, only the layers that are visible in the CAD file, or selected layers. After importing a file, you can delete separate layers and objects contained in the imported file. The following illustration shows the options that you can specify for importing layers.
Linking CAD Files When you link a CAD file, Revit recognizes the path to the CAD file and allows you to reload and update any changes made to the file. You can import a linked CAD file in the Manage Links dialog box and it changes to an import symbol, which you can then explode.
Lesson: Working with CAD Details
■
393
Import Line Weights Dialog Box Using the Import Line Weights dialog box, you can map colors from a DWG or DXF file to Revit line weights and save these mappings in a text file. You can create as many text files as required and then load the required files.
Import Line Weights dialog box
Visibility/Graphic Overrides Dialog Box Using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, you can specify whether the CAD layers should be visible. You can also override the line weight, colors, and patterns, if required. The Imported Categories tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box controls the visibility of imported files.
Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box
394
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Explode Tool Using the Explode tool on the Import Instance panel, you can explode the import symbol either partially or fully.
A partial explode breaks the import symbol into either Revit annotation elements or more import symbols, depending on the nested blocks in the imported CAD file. A full explode breaks the import symbol into Revit annotation elements.
The explode tool is not available for linked CAD files.
In the following illustration, detail line properties are imported from CAD layers. On importing, an exploded dimension line becomes a detail line with the S-ANNO-TEXT line style. You can assign a line weight or linetype to this line style. The assigned line weight or linetype applies to all detail lines that are originally present on a layer.
Lesson: Working with CAD Details
■
395
Guidelines for Working with CAD Details The following recommended practices help you work effectively with CAD details. ■ Place drafting views with standard imported CAD details into your project templates if your organization regularly creates similar project designs and has an extensive CAD details library. By following this practice, you can reduce the detailing time for new projects. ■ Save the settings in the Import Line Weights dialog box according to the standards of your organization at an early stage in the design development process. If you receive DWG files from various sources, save the settings for each source and provide the saved standards to all the design teams. Following this practice saves time and promotes accuracy. ■ Build a time allowance into each project to make a certain percentage of the drafted details Revitbased. This is required because if the imported CAD files are not accurate for the current project, cleaning up the imported details may require additional time. ■ Link the CAD files to Revit instead of importing them if the files are likely to change during the course of a project. Linking enables you to reload the CAD files when drafters update them. Following this practice saves time and enhances accuracy. Note: Linking multiple CAD files to a Revit project can adversely affect the performance of your computer. ■ Include all the details for a system in the same view when creating the drafting views for a Revit project. By following this practice, you can prepare the document set for a project more quickly, as the details that do not apply can be easily deleted. ■ Convert CAD details to Revit details by importing CAD files into Revit and exploding them into Revit annotation elements. Converting the details library from CAD to Revit eliminates the need to work in both CAD and Revit, resulting in a more efficient workflow. ■ Export views to CAD formats and import CAD files to drafting views when other members of your project team are working in CAD. This allows detailers who are proficient in programs other than Revit to participate in a Revit project.
396
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Example The following illustrations show various imported DWG files.
DWG file imported to and partially exploded in Revit. Dimensions are imported as lines and text.
Three details of a slab, which is set to Slab on Grade, included in a drafting view.
Depiction of a typical detail library organized as a directory structure.
Lesson: Working with CAD Details
■
397
Exercise: Import and Edit DWG Details In this exercise, you import a DWG file to a drafting view and edit the DWG details. You need to create a standard detail for a welded connection. You use a library file that exists in the company archive so that you do not have to model or sketch the connection. You do the following: ■ Import a DWG file. ■ Edit the DWG details.
The completed exercise
398
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Completing the Exercise
7.
To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 11: Creating Sections and Details. Click Exercise: Import and Edit DWG Details.
In the Import Line Weights dialog box: ■ Notice that the value for the DWG/DXF color number 5, which represents blue, is mapped to a Line Weight value of 4 in Revit. The line weight of 4 is equal to 0.018"(0.3048 mm) in the new drafting view scale.
Import a DWG File 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
Open i_rst_essentials_dwg_detail.rvt or m_rst_essentials_dwg_detail.rvt. The file opens in the SECOND FLR. structural plan view. Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. To specify a view for placing the DWG file, click View tab > Create panel > Drafting View. In the New Drafting View dialog box: ■ For Name, enter Brace Connection. ■ Select 3/4" = 1'-0" (1 : 20) from the Scale list. ■ Click OK. Notice that the drafting view is an empty 2D view. To define the line weights settings before importing the DWG file, click Insert tab > Import panel > dialog launcher.
Click OK. Click Insert tab > Import panel > Import CAD. To specify the DWG file to be opened, in the Import CAD Formats dialog box: ■ Navigate to the folder where you saved the exercise datasets and select brace_connection.dwg. ■ Ensure that Black and White is selected from the Colors list. ■ Ensure that All is selected from the Layers list. ■ Ensure that Auto-Detect is selected from the Import Units list. ■ Ensure that Auto - Center to Center is selected from the Positioning list. 10. Click Open. ■
8. 9.
To load predefined settings for mapping the layer colors in the DWG file with the line weights in Revit, in the Import Line Weights dialog box, click Load. In the Load Import Lineweight File dialog box: ■ Navigate to the folder where you saved the datasets for this exercise. ■ Select AOTC.txt. ■ Click Open.
Lesson: Working with CAD Details
■
399
11. In the view window, zoom in to the bottom center of the import symbol.
6.
7.
8.
Notice that the leader lines in the DWG file retain their defined line weight when imported to Revit. As specified before importing the DWG file, the line weight is 4 for elements on layers with blue color. Therefore, the grid lines and break lines in the import symbol are slightly thicker than the leader lines and much thicker than the other lines. Note: Revit detail line weights are scaled to view properties.
Edit the DWG Details 1.
2. 3.
4. 5.
400
In the view window: ■ Enter ZF to zoom to fit the view. ■ Select the view boundary of the import symbol. To remove references to the unused layers, click Modify Brace_Connection.dwg tab > Import Instance panel > Delete Layers. In the Select Layers/Levels to Delete dialog box: ■ Select the 0 and DEFPOINTS check boxes. ■ Click OK. Enter VG to open the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. To modify the line weights for lines representing the edges of the steel members, on the Imported Categories tab: ■ Expand Brace_Connection.dwg. ■ CTRL+select S-STL-EDGE and S-STL-SCT to highlight them. ■ Under Lines, click Override.
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
9.
In the Line Graphics dialog box: ■ Select 4 from the Weight list. ■ For Color, click No Override. In the Color dialog box: ■ Under Custom Colors, click the black color. ■ Click OK. Click OK to close the Line Graphics dialog box. Notice that black lines appears in the Lines column.
Click OK to close the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. Notice that the line weights for lines representing the edges and section of the steel member are modified. Tip: Zoom in to the right area of the import symbol to view the changes.
10. In the view window: ■ Zoom to fit the view. ■ Select the view boundary of the import symbol. 11. To explode the 2D data contained in the import symbol: ■ Click Modify Brace_Connection.dwg tab > Import Instance panel > Explode dropdown > Full Explode. ■ Close the warning message. Note: The DWG detail disassembles into the Revit line and text elements. Revit automatically creates line styles for each of the layers in the DWG file and assigns line weights based on the settings established in the Import Line Weights dialog box prior to importing the DWG file. Revit also creates new next types based on the text properties from the DWG file. 12. In the view window, select the S-STL-EDGE beam edge. Tip: The name of the line style appears in the Type Selector drop-down.
16. To change the exploded AutoCAD text to a standard Revit font, in the view window, select the BRACE FORCE text note.
17. Right-click in the view window. Click Select All Instances. 18. Select Text : 3/32" Arial (Text : 2mm Arial) from the Type Selector drop-down. 19. In the view window: ■ Click anywhere to remove the selection. ■ Select the title text. 20. Select Text : 1/4" Arial (Text : 5mm Arial) from the Type Selector drop-down. 21. In the view window, click anywhere to remove the selection. 22. Close the file without saving changes.
13. Click Manage tab > Project Settings panel > Settings drop-down > Line Styles. 14. In the Line Styles dialog box: ■ Under Category, expand Lines. Notice the line styles corresponding to the various AutoCAD layers. ■ Under Lines, click S-STL-EDGE. ■ For S-STL-EDGE, select 4 from the Projection list. ■ Click OK. 15. In the view window, zoom in to the import symbol.
Lesson: Working with CAD Details
■
401
402
■
Chapter 11: Creating Detailing
Chapter
12 Creating Construction Documentation Revit allows you to easily produce all the standard construction documents required for a project, and to export content to CAD formats to effectively share data. In this chapter, you learn how to work with sheets and titleblocks, print sheets, and export Revit Structure content to CAD formats.
Chapter Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■
Work with sheets and titleblocks. Print sheets. Export Revit Structure content to CAD formats.
Chapter Overview
■
403
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks This lesson describes how to work with sheets and titleblocks. You begin the lesson by learning about sheets, titleblocks, and revision tracking. Next, you learn about the process of creating sheets by using customized titleblocks, the steps for creating revision clouds, and some recommended practices for working with sheets and titleblocks. The lesson concludes with an exercise on creating a sheet by using a titleblock. Views are added to sheets and assembled to create construction documentation. Each sheet has a titleblock that defines the border of the sheet and displays both project- and sheet-specific information. You can add revision schedules to a titleblock to track design changes.
Sheet with views and titleblocks
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
404
Describe sheets and titleblocks. Describe revision tracking. Identify the steps in the process of creating sheets by using customized titleblocks. Create revision clouds. State the recommended practices for working with sheets and titleblocks. Create a sheet by using a titleblock.
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
About Sheets and Titleblocks While working on projects, you create sheets and then add views to the sheets to create construction documentation. You define the format of the sheets by using titleblocks.
Definition of Sheets A sheet is an individual page of a construction document set. You can add plan, elevation, section, schedule, and 3D views to a sheet. You can also add annotation elements, including text, detail lines, and symbols. When creating a new sheet, you specify the titleblock that you want to use for the sheet.
Definition of Titleblocks Titleblocks define the size and appearance of a sheet. You place titleblocks on a sheet to clearly display information specific to a project, such as the project name and sheet-specific information, which includes the sheet name and number. When placing a titleblock on a sheet, you can either use the standard titleblocks included in the imperial or metric library, or create customized titleblocks based on the project requirements. You can customize titleblocks to create sheets of various sizes. You can also delete or replace a titleblock in a sheet by changing the titleblock type.
Example of Sheets with Views and Titleblocks The following illustrations show sheets with different views and titleblocks.
Sheet with framing elevation and callout views
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
405
Sheet with section views
Sheet with a 3D view
406
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
About Revision Tracking You can track changes to structural design by using revision tools. You begin by entering revision information in the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog box. Next, you identify the design change in the views by using revision clouds and tags. You can then list the revisions by sheet or by project, using a revision schedule.
Definition of Revision Tracking Revision tracking is the process of recording design changes to construction documents. Each revision is assigned revision properties, including a revision number, date of issue, and description of the design change.
Sheet Issues/Revisions Dialog Box You create and manage a revision table by using the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog box. You can access this dialog box by selecting the dialog launcher on the Sheet Composition panel of the View tab, as shown below.
The following illustration shows the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog box.
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
407
After you make changes to a structural design and revise the sheet views, you can lock a revision by issuing it. This ensures that you have a record of the revision and no further changes can be made to the design. You then publish the revised design to make the revision available to your team members.
Revision Clouds Revision clouds are annotation elements that are used to graphically indicate changes to the construction documents. You place a revision cloud on a view by drawing its outline. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except the 3D view. You can view a revision cloud only in the view in which it is sketched. After you place the revision cloud, you can add a revision tag to identify the revision cloud. The following illustration shows a revision cloud placed in a plan view.
You can draw multiple revision clouds for every revision in a revision table. A revision cloud has certain read-only properties. However, you can also set additional properties, such as revision, comment, and mark, for each revision cloud. The following table describes the read-only properties of a revision cloud.
408
Property
Description
Revision Number
Specifies the revision tag number.
Revision Date
Specifies the date of release of a revision.
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Property
Description
Issued To
Provides details about the entity, such as the builder or client, to whom the revision is being issued. When a revision is issued, the construction documents are officially updated to include the change that the revision specifies. After a revision is issued, no further revision clouds are possible for that revision number and a new revision number needs to be created in the revision table. Note: To edit an issued revision, you need to unlock it by clearing the Issued check box in the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog box. However, unlocking an issued revision is not advisable.
Issued By
Provides details about the issuer of the revision, such as the reviewing engineer.
Revision Tags You use revision tags to identify revision clouds and map them to the corresponding date and description listed in the revision schedule. When you tag a revision cloud, the tags are numbered on the basis of the numbering method that you specified while creating the revision table. You can tag a revision cloud even if the revision has been issued.
Tagged revision cloud
A revision cloud A revision tag
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
409
Revision Schedule A revision schedule displays information derived from revision clouds. It is a part of a titleblock that can be viewed only in the sheet view. Most titleblocks that Revit provides include revision schedules, and you can place revision schedules in custom titleblocks. As you add views with revision clouds to a sheet, the revision information is automatically displayed in the revision schedule in a titleblock. The schedule tracks only the revision numbers and not the actual changes in the project. You can also edit the revision schedule to modify columns or headings. The following illustration shows a revision schedule in a titleblock.
Example of Revision Tracking The following illustrations show the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog box, revision clouds, and a revision schedule.
Revision information entered in the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog box
410
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Revision clouds tagged for identifying the location of revisions
Revision schedule displaying revision information
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
411
Process of Creating Sheets by Using Customized Titleblocks You create a sheet by specifying the titleblock you want to use for that sheet. The titleblock determines the size and format of the sheet. You can create titleblocks based on your company and project requirements, and then use the customized titleblock to create sheets. For example, you can create titleblocks to display the company logo, project name and number, and sheet-related information, such as the sheet number and sheet title. After creating a titleblock, you save it to a library as a separate family file with the extension .rfa to be able to use it for creating sheets in the future.
Process: Creating Sheets by Using Customized Titleblocks The following illustration shows the process of creating sheets by using customized titleblocks.
The following steps describe the process of creating sheets by using customized titleblocks. 1.
Open titleblock. Open a blank titleblock by clicking New > Title Block on the application menu. Specify sheet size. Specify the sheet size by selecting the appropriate template. Standard templates are available in the Titleblocks folder in the imperial and metric libraries. Customize titleblock. Customize the titleblock by adding the linework required to define the drawing and title areas. You can import a JPG or a BMP image file to insert a logo, if required. You can also add text and labels for variables, such as the sheet number and sheet title. Save titleblock. Save the titleblock as a family file. Open a sheet. Open a sheet in a project by right-clicking Sheets (All) in the Project Browser and selecting New Sheet. Load titleblock. Load the customized titleblock from the Select a Titleblock dialog box into the new sheet.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
Note: You can either load a customized titleblock or use a standard titleblock from the imperial or metric library. Place view on sheet. Place a view on the sheet by dragging the required view from the Project Browser. Change title of view. Change the title of the view by selecting the view, opening its properties, and editing either the New Name field or the Title on Sheet field in the Instance Properties dialog box.
7. 8.
412
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Creating Revision Clouds You use revision clouds to indicate the location of a design change in a project. A revision cloud is an annotation element and is visible only in the view where it is created. You create revision clouds in a sheet and then add information about revisions in the revision table of the Revision dialog box. After entering revision information, you can assign a revision to one or more clouds.
Procedure: Creating Revision Clouds The following steps describe how to create a revision cloud. 1. 2. 3.
4.
Click Annotate tab > Detail panel > Revision Cloud. On the Create Revision Cloud Sketch tab, Tools panel, ensure that Draw Lines is selected. In the view window: ■ Click near the elements you have changed to start creating a revision cloud. ■ Move the cursor in a clockwise direction and click to create a segment of the cloud. ■ Keep clicking until all the segments of the cloud are drawn and the ends of the clouds are connected. On the Revision Cloud panel, click Finish Cloud to exit sketch mode.
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
413
Guidelines for Working with Sheets and Titleblocks The following recommended practices help you to enhance productivity and save time when working with sheets and titleblocks. ■ Plan for extra time on initial Revit projects for creating titleblocks according to the graphic standards of your organization. You can load these titleblocks into the project templates and use them to create a few standard sheets in the project templates. This way, you can reduce the titleblock creation time for future projects. ■ Activate a view after placing it on a sheet if you wish to add annotations to the view. This allows you to see the effects of adding elements to the active view, on adjacent views on the sheet, which saves editing time and prevents elements overlapping on the sheets. ■ Pin views and titleblocks in position on a sheet after placing them to prevent the views and titleblocks from being inadvertently moved after you have a working page layout. This prevents errors and saves time. You can unpin views to change their location, if required. ■ Use the built-in Revit revision tools to track revisions. These tools automatically associate revision clouds, tags, and the schedule. The built-in revision tools are internally coordinated and eliminate the errors that may occur when the revision clouds, tags, and schedules are manually drafted. ■ Spend time to use the supplied revision schedule components and alter their appearance to suit your organizational standards when creating custom company titleblocks. This saves time when you use the parametric revision annotations in Revit. ■ Show or hide issued revisions in accordance with your company standards. In a project with many revisions, you might want to print and save versions of sheet files as revisions are issued and then turn off the visibility of issued revisions to reduce visual clutter. You can turn on issued revisions later if you need to print them. ■ Assemble the sheets before annotating the views. This enables you to identify the views that you need to document and to establish the view scales prior to adding the annotation, making the documentation process more efficient.
414
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Exercise: Create a Sheet by Using a Titleblock In this exercise, you create a sheet by using a titleblock. You want to create a project-specific sheet that displays the basement and floor plan views so that you can print it and send it for review. You import your company logo and add it to create a customized titleblock. You also add a drawing number and date labels to the titleblock. Finally, you create a new sheet using the customized titleblock, and add plan views to the sheet. You do the following: ■ Add a company logo to a titleblock. ■ Add a drawing number label to the titleblock. ■ Add a date label to the titleblock. ■ Create a sheet using the new titleblock.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation. Click Exercise: Create a Sheet by Using a Titleblock.
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
415
Add a Company Logo to a Titleblock 1.
2.
Open i_rst_essentials_project_titleblock.rfa or m_rst_essentials_project_titleblock.rfa. A sheet is displayed, as shown.
Note: The illustrations for the metric dataset will be slightly different from those shown here. In the view window, zoom in to the upper-right corner of the sheet.
Add a Drawing Number Label to the Titleblock 1. 2.
In the view window, zoom to fit. Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the sheet.
3.
Click Create tab > Annotate panel > Label to add a label for the drawing number. Select Label : Drawing Number from the Type Selector drop-down. To align the label text to the center and middle, on the Place Label tab, Alignment panel: ■ Under Horizontal, click Center. ■ Under Vertical, click Middle.
4. 5.
3. 4.
5.
Click Insert tab > Import panel > Image to import a company logo. In the Import Image dialog box: ■ Navigate to the folder where you saved the exercise datasets. ■ Select the company_logo file. ■ Click Open. To place the logo, in the view window: ■ Click in the center of the upper-right box on the sheet.
6.
Note: When you click the required alignment option under Horizontal, the alignment option under Vertical may get adjusted by default. You may need to click the options under Horizontal and Vertical a few times to get the desired alignment. In the view window, click the center of the lower-right box on the sheet to place the label.
Note: You can use the arrow keys to accurately position the logo. ■
416
Click outside the image to finish placing the logo.
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
7.
To specify a parameter for the Drawing Number label, in the Edit Label dialog box: ■ Select Sheet Number from the Category Parameters list. ■ Click Add Parameter(s) to Label. The Sheet Number parameter appears under Label Parameters.
11. In the view window, click anywhere to finish resizing the label.
Add a Date Label to the Titleblock 1. 2.
In the view window, zoom to fit. In the view window, zoom in to the lower-left corner of the sheet.
3.
On the Annotate panel, click Text to add a text box for the date on the sheet. Select Text : Text Arial 3/32" (Text : Text Arial 2.5mm) from the Type Selector drop-down. On the Alignment panel, under Horizontal, click Left to align the text to the left. In the view window, click to place the text box at the lower-left corner of the sheet, outside the working area, as shown.
4. 5. 6. Click OK. Notice that the sheet number A101 is displayed in the titleblock. Exit the Label tool. In the view window, click the sheet number to select it. ■
8. 9.
7.
In the new text box, enter Save DateSave Date
8.
Exit the Text tool.
10. Drag the right grip of the label to the right, as shown, so that the label width becomes approximately the same as the width of the outer box.
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
417
9.
In the view window: ■ Click the new text box to select it. ■ Use the Rotate the Text Note control to rotate the text box by 90 degrees.
17. In the view window: ■ Select the date and time label. ■ Use the Rotate the Text Note control to rotate the label by 90 degrees. ■ Place the label near the lower-left corner of the sheet, as shown.
10. Use the arrow keys to align the text, as shown.
11. Activate the Label tool to add another label on the sheet. 12. Select Label : Tag 2 from the Type Selector 18. Clear the selection. drop-down. 19. Enter ZE to zoom to extents. 13. To align the label text to the left and top, on the Place Label tab, Alignment panel: Create a Sheet Using the New Titleblock ■ Under Horizontal, ensure that Left is 1. Open i_rst_essentials_sheet_views.rvt or selected. m_rst_essentials_sheet_views.rvt. The file ■ Under Vertical, click Top. opens in the BASEMENT structural plan view. Note: Again, you may need to click the options 2. Click View tab > Window panel under Horizontal and Vertical a few times to get > Switch Windows drop-down > the desired alignment. i_rst_essentials_project_titleblock - Sheet: 14. In the view window, click to place the new label (m_rst_essetials_project_titleblock - Sheet: -) above the earlier text box, as shown. to return to that view. 3. To open a sheet in the project, click Create tab > Family Editor panel > Load into Project. 4. Close any warning message that displays. 5. To add a new sheet, in the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (All). Click New Sheet. 6. In the Select a Titleblock dialog box: ■ Ensure that i_rst_essentials_project_titleblock 15. To add the current date and time, in the Edit (m_rst_essentials_project_titleblock) is Label dialog box: selected in the Select a Titleblock list. ■ Double-click Date/Time Stamp in the ■ Click OK. Category Parameters list. The Date/Time Notice that the new sheet opens with the stamp parameter is added under Label titleblock. Parameters. ■ Click OK. Notice that the current date and time are displayed on the sheet. 16. Exit the Label tool.
418
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
7.
In the view window, zoom in to the two boxes in the lower-right corner of the sheet.
8.
In the lower-right box: ■ Double-click the text box displaying the drawing number.
Enter S-2.1 to change the drawing number. Click anywhere outside the label to finish editing it. In the box above the lower-right box, change the drawing title to Basement and First Floor Plans. Clear the selection. Zoom to fit. To add a view to the sheet, drag FIRST FLR. from the Project Browser to the sheet. Click in the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. ■ ■
9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
14. Add the BASEMENT view to a point below the FIRST FLR. view, as shown.
Tip: Use the dashed extension line to align the BASEMENT view with the FIRST FLR. view. 15. In the view window, zoom in to the bottom of the first floor view and select FIRST FLR.
Note: By default, the view title is the same as the view name in the Project Browser, unless you populate the Title on Sheet parameter in the Instance Properties dialog box for the view. 16. Open the Instance Properties dialog box. 17. In the Instance Properties dialog box: ■ Under Identity Data, for Title on Sheet, enter First Floor Framing & Foundation Plan. ■ Click OK. The changed title is displayed in the view window.
18. Clear the selection. 19. Zoom to fit. 20. Close all files without saving changes.
Lesson: Working with Sheets and Titleblocks
■
419
Lesson: Printing Sheets This lesson describes how to print sheets. You begin the lesson by learning about print and print setup settings. Then, you learn about some recommended practices for printing sheets. The lesson concludes with an exercise on printing a sheet set. Revit offers several options for printing views and sheets. You can batch print all or selected views and sheets and save the batch print settings for future use. You can also print directly to a printer or to a file that can be printed later. The following illustration shows the dialog boxes in which you specify the print settings for printing sheets.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
420
Identify print settings. Identify print setup settings. State the recommended practices for printing sheets. Print a sheet set.
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Print Settings To print views or sheets, you specify print settings, such as the name of the printer and the number of copies to print, in the Print dialog box. You use the View/Sheet Set dialog box to specify views or sheets that you want to print.
Print Dialog Box You select Print from the application menu to access the Print dialog box, as shown.
Lesson: Printing Sheets
■
421
The following table describes the various sections in the Print dialog box, which you use to specify the print settings. Section
Description
Printer
Specifies the name of the printer or plotter to which you want to print the sheets of a project. The status, type, and location of the selected printer or plotter are displayed automatically. To configure the printer or plotter, click Properties. If you do not want to print a view or sheet immediately, you can select the Print to File check box. This saves the view or sheet as a PLT or PRN file that you can print later. These PLT and PRN file formats are read in specific hardware and software combinations.
File
Specifies whether you want to print multiple selected views and sheets to a single file or separate files. This section is active only when printing to a file.
Print Range
Specifies the print range as either the active window, the visible portion of the active window, or the selected views and sheets. You can select the views and sheets that you want to print in the View/Sheet Set dialog box. Note: If you select the active window or the visible portion of the active window as the print range, you can preview the print job before you send it to a printer.
Options
Specifies the number of copies that you want to print. For a multiple-page print job, you select the Reverse Print Order check box to print the view or sheet set in the reverse order. You can also select the Collate check box to print the complete view or sheet set before the next copy is printed.
Settings
Specifies the default print settings. Click Setup to access the Print Setup dialog box where you specify and save the print setup settings as the default settings.
View/Sheet Set Dialog Box You can access the View/Sheet Set dialog box by clicking Select in the Print Range section of the Print dialog box.
422
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
In the View/Sheet Set dialog box, you can select the Sheets check box in the Show section to display only the sheet names. You can also select the Views check box to display only the view names. Then, to create a set of views and sheets that you want to print, you can select the check boxes corresponding to the required views and sheets. You can also save the set of selected views and sheets with a specific name by clicking SaveAs.
You can click Check All to select all check boxes or Check None to clear all check boxes corresponding to the sheet or view names.
Print Setup Settings You use the print setup settings to define the size, placement, orientation of paper, and other settings that set the appearance of the printed views and sheets. You specify these settings in the Print Setup dialog box.
Print Setup Dialog Box You access the Print Setup dialog box by clicking Setup under Settings in the Print dialog box, or by clicking Print Setup on the application menu.
Lesson: Printing Sheets
■
423
The following table describes the print setup settings. Setting
Description
Paper
Specifies the size of the paper on which you want to print a view or a sheet. You can also specify the source of paper as manual feed or printer trays.
Orientation
Specifies the layout of the paper as portrait or landscape.
Paper Placement
Specifies whether the view or sheet should be printed at the center of the paper or at a specific offset from the corner of the paper. Note: If you select User Defined from the Offset From Corner list, you need to enter the offset values for the X and Y coordinates.
Hidden Line Views
Specifies the processing type as vector or raster to determine the print performance for hidden lines in elevation, section, and 3D views. Note: The time required for vector processing depends on the number of views processed and the view complexity. The time required for raster processing depends on the dimensions of the view and the number of graphics in the view.
424
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Setting
Description
Zoom
Specifies whether you want to fit the view or sheet to the size of the paper or zoom the view or sheet to a percentage of the original size.
Appearance
Specifies the raster quality and the color of print. Raster quality controls the resolution of the raster data being sent to the print device. The higher the raster quality, the longer it takes to print. You can specify the color of print as Black Lines, Grayscale, or Color. The Black Lines option prints all text, nonwhite lines, pattern lines, and edges in black. The Grayscale option prints all colors, text, lines, images, raster images, and solid patterns in grayscale. The Color option prints all colors, text, images, and lines in their actual colors, provided the printer supports all these colors. Note: Black Lines and Grayscale options are not available for printing DWF files.
Options
Specifies the following additional print settings: ■ View Links in Blue: Prints view and sheet links in blue. By default, these links are printed in black. ■ Hide Ref/Work Planes: Excludes reference planes and work planes from printing. ■ Hide Unreferenced View Tags: Does not print section, elevation, and callout tags that are not on sheets. ■ Hide Scope Boxes: Does not print scope boxes. ■ Hide Crop Boundaries: Does not print crop boundaries. ■ Replace Halftone with Thin Lines: Prints elements that are half toned as thin dark lines.
Guidelines for Printing Sheets You are recommended to follow these practices for printing sheets. ■ Create drawing sheets in the project templates for your company and place views on the drawing sheets at an early stage in a project. As the project develops, the drawing sheets and viewports update automatically, and you can print the sheets at any time. This saves time later during the construction documentation phase. ■ Save multipage print setups as part of project templates. These setups can be calibrated to different project stages. For example, when a project is in a conceptual design stage, the concept design setup may print 3D views but not sheets. However, during design development, you can print plans, external elevations, and 3D views placed on sheets. Using multipage print setups saves time when printing the drawing set. ■ Set the Zoom setting to 50% and specify the paper size to half of the full-size sheet in the Print Setup dialog box to print a half-size sheet. A half-size set of drawings is convenient and manageable for internal coordination and uses less paper. However, printing a full-size set is recommended to ensure the quality of the plot before submitting a final drawing set.
Lesson: Printing Sheets
■
425
Exercise: Print a Sheet Set In this exercise, you select a sheet set for printing, set up the appearance of the sheets, and print the sheets to a file. You are working on a structural model. During the design phase, you created various sheets and placed views on them. Now, you want to print the sheets to create construction documents and deliver them to the client. You specify the sheet size and print the sheets to a file. You do the following: ■ Select a sheet set for printing. ■ Set up the sheet appearance. ■ Print sheets to a file.
The completed exercise
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation. Click Exercise: Print a Sheet Set.
2. 3.
On the application menu, click Print. In the Print dialog box, under Print Range: ■ Ensure that Selected Views/Sheets is selected to specify sheets or views that you want to print. ■ Click Select.
Select a Sheet Set for Printing 1.
426
Open i_rst_essentials_sheets.rvt or m_rst_essentials_sheets.rvt. The file opens in the S-4.1 Wall Sections view.
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
4.
To display and save only the project sheets, in the View/Sheet Set dialog box: ■ Under Show, clear the Views check box. ■ Click Check All to select all the check boxes corresponding to the sheet names.
5.
6. 7.
Under Hidden Line Views, click Raster Processing. Note: It is important to select Raster Processing in this exercise because views in some of the sheets to be printed may include colors. Colored images are rasters or bitmaps and therefore require raster processing to look sharp. Click Save As to save the print setup settings with a specific name. In the New dialog box: ■ For Name, enter MyPrinter.
Click OK. Click OK to close the Print Setup dialog box. ■
Click SaveAs. In the New dialog box, to name the selected sheet set: ■ For Name, enter Phase 1. ■ Click OK. Click OK to close the View/Sheet Set dialog box.
8.
■
5.
6.
Print Sheets to a File 1.
Set Up the Sheet Appearance 1. 2.
3.
4.
In the Print dialog box, under Settings, click Setup. In the Print Setup dialog box, ensure that: ■ Under Paper, Letter is selected from the Size list to print the sheet on this paper size. ■ Under Paper Placement, Center is selected to print the sheet at the center of the paper. ■ Under Zoom, Fit to Page is selected so that no text or image on a sheet is cut off from the print area. Under Options, select all check boxes except: ■ View Links in Blue to print all links in black. ■ Replace Halftone with Thin Lines to maintain the halftone settings. Under Orientation, ensure that Landscape is selected so that sheets are printed horizontally on paper.
2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
In the Print dialog box, under Printer, ensure that the Print to File check box is selected to print sheets to a file. Note: If the printer is set to document writer software, such as Adobe PDF, the Print to File check box is inactive. Under File, for Name, click Browse. In the Specify Prefix and Extension dialog box: ■ Browse to the desktop and create a folder named Sheets. You can also save the files to be printed in any folder of your choice. ■ Open the Sheets folder. ■ For File Name, enter Publish Sheets to name the files to be printed. ■ Select Plot Files (*.plt) from the Files of Type list to specify a type for the files to be printed. ■ Click Save. In the Print dialog box: ■ Under Options, ensure that the Reverse Print Order check box is selected to print the sheet set in the reverse order. ■ Click OK to process the printing of files. Navigate to the location where you saved the files to be printed. Notice that the files are listed in alphabetical order in that folder. Close the file without saving changes.
Lesson: Printing Sheets
■
427
Lesson: Exporting Content to CAD Formats This lesson describes how to export Revit Structure content, such as views and sheets, to CAD formats. You begin the lesson by learning about the settings for exporting content and the process of exporting views to CAD formats. Next, you learn some recommended practices for exporting content to CAD formats. The lesson concludes with an exercise on exporting views. You can export content from the Revit Structure model to CAD formats. Exporting content allows you to share the structural design with other members of the design team who use CAD. The following illustration displays the first floor plan view of a structural model exported from Revit Structure to AutoCAD.
Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ■ ■ ■ ■
428
Identify the settings for exporting content. Identify the steps in the process of exporting views to CAD formats. State the recommended practices for exporting content to CAD formats. Export views.
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Settings for Exporting Content You can export views, schedules, and sheets from Revit Structure to AutoCAD and MicroStation in formats such as DXF, DWG, and DGN. When you export views, you can specify various settings, such as the model graphics styles, visibility settings, and layer mapping standards, as required. You can also specify how intersecting geometries are exported.
Exporting 3D Views When you export a 3D view, the actual 3D model is exported and not a 2D representation of the model. To export a 2D representation of the 3D model, you add the 3D view to a sheet and then export the sheet view. The model graphics style set for the sheet view is visible in the exported file. Illustrations 1 and 2 show the 3D model before export to AutoCAD, and illustrations 3, 4, and 5 show the model after export.
Model graphics style set to Hidden Line Model graphics style set to Shading with Edges Wireframe view mode Hidden line mode Flat shading with edges mode
Lesson: Exporting Content to CAD Formats
■
429
Controlling Visibility You can control the properties of the view to be exported by changing its visibility settings. For example, if you do not want to export the cut pattern of a floor or the column tags in a plan view, you can turn them off by using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. You can also control visibility for the exported view by turning on or off layers in the CAD application.
Mapping Layers When you export a Revit view to CAD applications, the model and annotation elements in the view are mapped by category to preconfigured layer names. As part of the process of exporting the view to CAD, you can customize the mapping settings to conform to your company or project standards. You can save the customized mapping settings as a text file and load them into multiple projects. You can also use the following predefined mapping standards: ■ American Institute of Architects Standards (AIA) ■ ISO Standard 13567 (ISO 13567) ■ Singapore Standard 83 (CP83) ■ British Standard 1192 (BS1192) These mapping standards are installed with the product and stored in the Data folder under the installation folder in Revit.
Exporting Intersecting Geometry When you export a view that includes intersecting geometry, such as an extrusion passing through a wall surface without an opening, no new edges are created along the lines of intersection during export. If you set the model graphics style for a view to Shading with Edges and then export the view, you may see unexpected results when you open the view in another CAD application. Therefore, you should either create an opening in one surface before passing another surface through it, or join the geometry of the two surfaces to create an edge. The following illustration shows the before and after export images of a wall and an intersecting extrusion without an opening. The first row in the illustration displays the geometry in Revit, and the second row displays the geometry after exporting it to the CAD format. Notice that no edges are created at the intersection of the two surfaces. The images from left to right are in wireframe, hidden line, and shading with edges view modes.
430
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
In the following illustration, the same wall and extrusion have been joined. The first row in the illustration displays the edge lines in Revit, and the second row displays the edge lines after exporting them to the CAD format. The images from left to right are in wireframe, hidden line, and shading with edges view modes.
Process of Exporting Views to CAD Formats You can export views and sheets to various CAD formats. You can specify the views and sheets to be exported and set the layer and color mapping standards.
Process: Exporting Views to CAD Formats The following illustration shows the process of exporting views to CAD formats.
The following steps describe the process of exporting views to other CAD formats. 1. 2.
Select the CAD format. Using the application menu, select the CAD format in which the views will be exported. Specify views and sheets. Specify the views and sheets to be exported on the View/Sheet Set tab of the Export CAD Formats dialog box.
Lesson: Exporting Content to CAD Formats
■
431
3.
Specify the CAD properties. Specify the properties for the CAD format in which the view will be exported. You define these properties on the DWG Properties tab of the Export CAD Formats dialog box. Specify the Export settings. Specify the export settings by clicking Export in the Export CAD Formats dialog box. In this dialog box, you can specify settings such as the exported file format, the destination for saving the exported file, and a file name for the view. You can also specify whether multiple views from a sheet should be exported into a single file or externally referenced files (xrefs) should be created for each model view.
4.
Note: The option for creating xrefs is automatically selected for the DGN and SAT files, but it is unavailable for DXF files. Export the view. Export the view to the specified destination by clicking Export.
5.
Guidelines for Exporting Content to CAD Formats The following recommended practices help you export content to CAD formats effectively. ■ Create layer setting files for mapping the Revit elements to the CAD standards your clients use. You can speed up the export process and reduce errors by using client-specific layer setting files. ■ Specify which plan, elevation, section, 3D, and sheet views you want to export when exporting views to CAD. For example, you can create a set containing the sheets for a specific submittal. You can also create a set containing structural plan views for coordination. The view and sheet sets can be saved and reused for future exports. By creating view and sheet sets, you can speed up the process of exporting views to CAD formats. ■ Export drafting and detail views to CAD formats to build a standard detail library for design teams working in CAD. Use of the standard detail library helps you share the details created in Revit with others who use CAD in your organization.
432
■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Exercise: Export Views In this exercise, you export the first and second floor views of a structural model. You want to send a copy of the first and second floor framing plans of the structural model that you have designed to a colleague who uses AutoCAD. Following are the completed exercise graphics for the first and second floors. Structural Plan - FIRST FLR-.dwg
Structural Plan - SECOND FLR-.dwg
Completing the Exercise To complete the exercise, follow the steps in this book or in the onscreen exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters and exercises, click Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation. Click Exercise: Export Views.
1.
2.
Open c_rst_essentials_exporting_views.rvt. The file opens in the FIRST FLR. plan view. Note: This lesson uses a common unit dataset to explain the concepts. On the application menu, click Export > CAD Formats > DWG to initiate the process of exporting to a DWG file.
Lesson: Exporting Content to CAD Formats
■
433
3.
4.
In the Export CAD Formats dialog box, on the View/Sheet Set tab: ■ Select from the Export list. ■ Select Views in the Model from Show in List. ■ Select the check box for the Structural Plan: SECOND FLR. to add it to the set. ■ Ensure that check box for the Structural Plan: FIRST FLR. is selected. Note: You can double-click on a view name to display a preview of the selected view. On the DWG Properties tab, click […] to specify the standard to be used for mapping Revit elements to corresponding AutoCAD layers.
5. 6.
In the Export Layers dialog box, click Standard. In the Undefined Layering Standard dialog box, click ISO Standard 13567 (ISO 13567).
7. 8.
Click OK to close the Export Layers dialog box. Click Export to specify the name and path for saving the DWG file.
434
■
9.
In the Export CAD Formats dialog box: ■ Select Desktop from the Save In list. ■ Ensure that AutoCAD 2010 DWG Files (*.dwg) is selected from the Files of Type list. Note: If you have AutoCAD installed on your system and want to verify the export, use the DWG version appropriate for your setup.
Select Automatic - Short from the Naming list. ■ Ensure that the Xref Views on Sheets check box is clear. ■ Click Export. A warning message is displayed stating that the exported wireframe views may contain overlaid lines. 10. In the Exporting Wireframe Views dialog box, click Yes, Export the Wireframe View. After the export process is complete, you find four new files on the desktop, Structural Plan - FIRST FLR-.dwg, Structural Plan - FIRST FLR-.pcp, Structural Plan - SECOND FLR-.dwg, and Structural Plan - SECOND FLR-.pcp. The DWG files are the exported first and second floor plan views, and the corresponding PCP files are AutoCAD legacy plotter control files that contain the exported line colors and line weights. 11. If you have AutoCAD installed, open the DWG files. 12. Close the files without saving changes. ■
Chapter 12: Creating Construction Documentation
Appendix
A Additional Resources A variety of resources are available to help you get the most from your Autodesk® software. Whether you prefer instructor-led, self-paced, or online training, Autodesk has you covered. For additional information, please refer to the disc that accompanies this training guide. ■ Learning Tools from Autodesk ■ Autodesk Certification ■ Autodesk Authorized Training Centers (ATC®) ■ Autodesk Subscription ■ Autodesk Communities
Learning Tools from Autodesk Use your Autodesk software to its full potential. Whether you are a novice or an advanced user, Autodesk offers a robust portfolio of learning tools to help you perform ahead of the curve. ■ Get hands-on experience with job-related exercises based on industry scenarios from Autodesk Official Training Guides, e-books, self-paced learning, and training videos. ■ All materials are developed by Autodesk subject matter experts. ■ Get exactly the training you need with learning tools designed to fit a wide range of skill levels and subject matter—from basic essentials to specialized, in-depth training on the capabilities of the latest Autodesk products. ■ Access the most comprehensive set of Autodesk learning tools available anywhere: from your authorized partner, online, or at your local bookstore. ■ To find out more, visit http://www.autodesk.com/learningtools.
Autodesk Certification Demonstrate your experience with Autodesk software. Autodesk certifications are a reliable validation of your skills and knowledge. Demonstrate your software skills to prospective employers, accelerate your professional development, and enhance your reputation in your field.
Certification Benefits
Appendix: Additional Resources
■
435
■ ■ ■ ■
Rapid diagnostic feedback to assess your strengths and identify areas for improvement. An electronic certificate with a unique serial number. The right to use an official Autodesk Certification logo. The option to display your certification status in the Autodesk Certified Professionals database.
For more information: Visit www.autodesk.com/certification to learn more and to take the next steps to get certified.
Autodesk Authorized Training Centers Enhance your productivity and learn how to realize your ideas faster with Autodesk software. Get trained at an Autodesk Authorized Training Center (ATC) with hands-on, instructor-led classes to help you get the most from your Autodesk products. Autodesk has a global network of Authorized Training Centers that are carefully selected and monitored to ensure you receive high-quality, resultsoriented learning. ATCs provide the best way for beginners and experts alike to get up to speed. The training helps you get the greatest return on your investment, faster, by building your knowledge in the areas you need the most. Many organizations provide training on our software, but only the educational institutions and private training providers recognized as ATC sites have met Autodesk's rigorous standards of excellence.
Find an Authorized Training Center With over 2,000 ATCs in more than 90 countries around the world, there is probably one close to you. Visit the ATC locator at www.autodesk.com/atc to find an Autodesk Authorized Training Center near you. Look for ATC courses offered at www.autodesk.com/atcevents. Many ATCs also offer end-user Certification testing. Locate a testing center near you at www.autodesk.starttest.com.
Autodesk Subscription Autodesk® Subscription is a maintenance and support program that helps you minimize costs, increase productivity, and make the most of your Autodesk software investment. For an attractive annual fee, you receive any upgrades released during your Subscription term, as well as early access to product enhancements. Subscription also gives you flexible license terms, so you can run both current and previous versions (under certain conditions) and use the software on both home and office computers. In addition, Subscription gives you access to a variety of tools and information that save time and increase productivity, including web support direct from Autodesk, self-paced learning, and online license management. ■ Autodesk Subscription offers a way to make software costs predictable. Whether a customer opts for a one-year subscription or a multiyear contract, the costs are known for the entire term of the contract. ■ A complete library of interactive learning tools and high-quality, self-paced lessons help users increase their productivity and master new skills. These short lessons are available on demand and complement more in-depth training provided through Autodesk Authorized Training Centers. ■ Autodesk Subscription makes managing software licenses easier. Customers have added flexibility to allow their employees to use their Subscription software—in the office or at home. Better yet, designers are entitled to run previous versions of the software concurrently with the latest release under certain conditions. ■ Get what you need to stay productive. With web support, Autodesk support technicians provide answers to your installation, configuration, and troubleshooting questions. Web and email communications deliver support straight to your desktop. ■ For more information, visit www.autodesk.com/subscription.
Autodesk User Communities
436
■
Appendix
Autodesk customers can take advantage of free Autodesk software, self-paced tutorials, worldwide discussion groups and forums, job postings, and more. Become a member of an Autodesk Community today!
Free products are subject to the terms and conditions of the end-user license agreement that accompanies download of the software.
Feedback Autodesk understands the importance of offering you the best learning experience possible. If you have comments, suggestions, or general inquiries about Autodesk Learning, please contact us at
[email protected]. As a result of the feedback we receive from you, we hope to validate and append to our current research on how to create a better learning experience for our customers.
Useful Links Learning Tools www.autodesk.com/learningtools Certification www.autodesk.com/certification Find an Authorized Training Center www.autodesk.com/atc Find an Authorized Training Center Course www.autodesk.com/atcevents Autodesk Store www.store.autodesk.com
Communities www.autodesk.com/community Student Community www.students.autodesk.com Blogs www.autodesk.com/blogs Discussion Groups www.discussion.autodesk.com
Appendix: Additional Resources
■
437
438
■
Appendix
